Canon 3041C002 XF705 4K 1" Sensor XF-HEVC H.265 Pro User Manual

Firmware ver. 1.0.3.1

4K Camcorder

Instruction Manual

PUB. DIE-0524-000D

Unauthorized recording of copyrighted materials may infringe on the rights of copyright owners and be

contrary to copyright laws.

Trademark Acknowledgements

• SD, SDHC and SDXC Logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.

• Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United

States and/or other countries.

• Apple, macOS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

• Avid and Media Composer are trademarks or registered trademarks of Avid Technology, Inc. or its

subsidiaries in the United States and/or other countries.

• Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

• Wi-Fi Certified, WPA, WPA2, and the Wi-Fi Certified logo are trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

• WPS as used on the camcorder’s settings, onscreen displays and in this manual signifies Wi-Fi Protected

Setup.

• The Wi-Fi Protected Setup Identifier Mark is a mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.

• JavaScript is a trademark or registered trademark of Oracle Corporation, its affiliates or subsidiaries in the

United States and other countries.

• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of

HDMI Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the United States and other countries.

• Other names and products not mentioned above may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their

respective companies.

• This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.

• This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding

MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video that was encoded only (1) for a personal

and noncommercial purpose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4

compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.

• THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL USE

OF A CONSUMER OR OTHER USES IN WHICH IT DOES NOT RECEIVE REMUNERATION TO (i) ENCODE

VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT

WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM

A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE

IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C.

SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM

Highlights of the XF705

The Canon XF705 4K Camcorder is a high-performance camcorder whose advanced functionality and versatile

usability make it the perfect choice for a variety of 4K productions. The following are just some of the functions

featured in the camcorder.

4K Recording System

Advanced sensor and image processor

At the heart of the camcorder is the type 1.0 (1.0 in.)

single plate CMOS sensor with an 8,290,000

effective pixel count, and an image processing

platform with two DIGIC DV 6 processors. Thanks to

its advanced high-sensitivity and noise reduction

technology, the camcorder can shoot nuanced

images with little noise even in low-light situations.

Three video formats available to select depending

on your needs

You can choose the video format from XF-HEVC

(HEVC/H.265 codec), XF-AVC (MPEG-4 AVC/H.264

codec) or MP4 (MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 codec),

according to your workflow needs. XF-HEVC and

XF-AVC clips are recorded as industry-standard

MXF (Material eXchange Format) files.

Using the XF-HEVC format you can record video

using 3840x2160 resolution and YCC422, 10-bit

color sampling up to 59.94P/50.00P. With the

XF-AVC format you can record video using

3840x2160 resolution and YCC420, 8-bit color

sampling up to 29.97P/25.00P. While the MP4

format allows you to record only Full HD

(1920x1080) resolution with YCC420, 8-bit color

sampling but up to 59.94P/50.00P.

With the XF-HEVC and XF-AVC formats, audio is

recorded as 4-channel linear PCM audio (24 bit,

48 kHz). With the MP4 format, you can select

4-channel linear PCM audio (16 bit, 48 kHz) or

2-channel AAC audio (16 bit, 48 kHz).

Operability and Adaptability

Versatile design

The camcorder was designed to be operated

comfortably by a single camera operator. It features

3 separate rings for independent focus, zoom and

iris operation. The camcorder also features 14

buttons to which you can assign a large number of

functions (A 119) to personalize the camcorder to

your needs and preferences.

Improved displays

The camcorder features a 4.0-in. LCD display

(equivalent to 1,230,000 dots) that offers 100%

coverage and touch-to-focus functions. The LCD

panel can open to the left or right. The viewfinder

offers an OLED display (also with 100% coverage)

and a large eye cup for a comfortable fit in various

shooting conditions.

SD card recording options

The camcorder can record 4K video on SD cards,

offering great cost-performance in terms of

recording media. It is equipped with 2 card slots,

allowing you to use double slot recording to record

the same clip on two cards, or relay recording to

automatically switch to the other card when the one

being used is full (A 36).

Versatile Artistic Expression

Special recording modes

The special recording modes (A 115) give you

more creative control over your recordings. You can

change the shooting frame rate (up to 119.88P

using XF-HEVC or XF-AVC format) to achieve a slow

motion effect

or use pre-recording to record

3 seconds before you press the button, helping you

capture those hard-to-catch opportunities.

Custom picture settings (A 65, 123)

Select one of the preset color settings or set the

combination of gamma curve, color space and color

matrix that you wish to use. Then, you can adjust a

number of other image-related parameters in detail.

With wide color space options such as BT.2020

Gamut, the Canon Log 3 gamma curve, which

keeps the characteristics of the Canon Log gamma

while expanding the dynamic range, and two HDR

options

(HLG or PQ), you can be sure that the

camcorder covers your creative needs.

For XF-HEVC clips only.

Professional Functions and Flexibility

Network functions

Connect the camcorder to a Wi-Fi or wired

(Ethernet) network to enjoy various network

functions

. You can, for example, use a Wi-Fi

capable mobile device to control the camcorder

remotely with the Browser Remote application

(A 164), stream live transmissions or breaking

images via IP (A 175) and transfer recordings from

an SD card to a remote server using the FTP

protocol (A 178).

Available functions depend on the network connection

used.

Software for aiding production workflow

Canon XF Utility (A 153) lets you copy XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC clips you recorded from an SD card to a

computer, play back the clips and organize them.

You can also use the Canon XF plugins to work with

the clips directly from non-linear editing (NLE)

software made by Avid.

Additionally, MP4 Join Tool (A 153) is a small

application that lets you join MP4 clips that were

split into multiple files.

Pro-level connectivity

The camcorder is equipped with an SDI terminal

compliant with the 12G-SDI standard that provides

a greater bandwith and supports 4K video output at

59.94P or 50.00P frame rate. Meanwhile, the TIME

CODE terminal and G-LOCK/SYNC terminal offer

many synchronization options (A 94), allowing the

camcorder to be part of any multi-camera shooting

setup.

Infrared recording

Record in darkness using infrared recording

(A 117). With the built-in infrared light, you can

record nocturnal animals in their natural environment

or other such scenes.

Enhanced Focusing Options

Dual Pixel CMOS AF

The camcorder features Dual Pixel CMOS AF

technology for improved autofocus functions

(A 76). In addition to continuous AF, AF-boosted

MF lets you focus manually most of the way and let

the camcorder finish focusing automatically. With

AF-boosted MF the camcorder does not perform

unreliable focus adjustments, resulting in a more

stable focusing operation than with continuous AF.

The camcorder can also focus automatically on

people's faces and track moving subjects while

keeping them in focus (A 81).

Dual Pixel Focus Guide (A 77)

The focus guide serves as a visual, intuitive guide

that you can use to check if the image is in focus

and the required adjustment, if it is not. This can be

very helpful to ensure you always get amazingly

sharp 4K video.

Other improved features

• Direct setting mode (A 54)

Change main camcorder functions while checking

the image on the screen using only the joystick.

• Assistance functions

You can use assistance functions such as peaking

and magnification (A 78), onscreen markers

(A 87), zebra patterns (A 88), B&W image

(A 30) and a waveform monitor (A 107) on the

screen and viewfinder. You can also display them

on an external monitor connected to the SDI

terminal or HDMI OUT terminal

Additionally, when using a logarithmic gamma

curve, you can also apply a LUT (A 149) for

easier monitoring.

Available assistance functions depend on the screen/video

output used.

• Customizable onscreen displays (A 44).

• Menu settings file that can be saved in the

camcorder or on an SD card to restore all the

menu settings or replicate them on another XF705

camcorder (A 131).

• Battery packs compatible with Intelligent System

for better remaining usage time information.

• INPUT terminals (XLR) compatible with analog or

digital (AES/EBU) audio and +48 V phantom

power supply (A 100).

• Improved clip name format with more information

for easier identification and organization of clips

(A 48).

• Metadata (A 110) and geotagging (A 112).

• Color bars and test tone output and recording

(A 106).

• Advanced remote operation using the optional

RC-V100 Remote Controller (A 39).

1. Introduction 9

About this Manual 9

Conventions Used in this Manual 9

Supplied Accessories 10

Names of Parts 11

Camcorder 11

WL-D6000 Wireless Controller 18

2. Preparations 19

Preparing the Power Supply 19

Using a Battery Pack 19

Using a Power Outlet 21

Turning the Camcorder On and Off 22

Date, Time and Language Settings 23

Setting the Date and Time 23

Changing the Language 24

Using the Menus 25

Selecting an Option from the Menu 25

Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu) 26

Preparing the Camcorder 28

Attaching the Microphone Holder Unit 28

Attaching the Lens Hood 28

Using the Viewfinder 28

Using the LCD Screen 29

Adjusting the LCD Screen or Viewfinder 30

Adjusting the Grip Belt 31

Attaching the Shoulder Strap 31

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers 31

Removing the Shoulder Pad 32

Using a Tripod 32

Using SD Cards 33

Compatible SD Cards 33

Inserting and Removing an SD Card 34

Initializing an SD Card 35

Switching Between the SD Card Slots 35

Relay Recording and Double Slot Recording 36

Checking the Remaining Recording Time on SD

Cards 36

Recovering Clips 37

Remote Operation of the Camcorder 38

Using the Supplied Wireless Controller 38

Using the Optional RC-V100 Remote

Controller 39

3. Recording 41

Recording Video 41

Preparing to Record 41

Recording 42

Onscreen Displays 44

Setting the Clip File Name for XF-HEVC or XF-AVC

Clips 48

MP4 Clip and Photo Numbering 49

Using the Fan 50

Video Configuration: Video Format, System

Frequency, Frame Rate, Resolution and Bit

Rate 51

Selecting the Recording Format 51

Selecting the System Frequency 51

Selecting the Frame Rate 51

Selecting the Resolution and Color Sampling

Settings 52

Selecting the Bit Rate 52

Changing Main Functions with the FUNC

Button 54

Using the Direct Setting Mode 54

Shutter Speed 55

Changing the Shutter Speed Mode 55

Changing the Shutter Speed Value 57

Flicker Reduction 57

Gain 58

Automatic Gain Control 58

Selecting the Gain Level 59

Changing the Gain Value 59

ND Filter 60

Aperture 61

Automatic Aperture 61

Momentary Automatic Aperture - Push Auto

Iris 62

Manual Aperture 62

Iris Limit 63

Exposure Compensation - AE Shift 63

Light Metering Mode 64

Gamma Curve and Main Color Settings 65

Preset Color Settings 65

Table of Contents

White Balance 67

Auto White Balance (AWB) 68

Color Temperature/Preset White Balance 68

Adjusting White Balance Settings 69

Custom White Balance 69

Zooming 70

Selecting the Zoom Mode 70

Selecting the Zoom Controls 71

Using the Zoom Ring 71

Using the Grip Zoom Rocker 71

Using the Handle Zoom Rocker 73

Using the Supplied Wireless Controller or an

Optional Remote Controller 74

Using Optional Conversion Lenses 75

Adjusting the Focus 76

Manual Focus 76

Push AF 79

AF-Boosted MF 79

Continuous AF 80

Changing the AF Frame Size and Position 81

Face Detection 81

Tracking a Specific Subject 83

Focus Limit and Macro Shooting 84

Image Stabilization 85

Dynamic IS or Standard IS 85

Powered IS 85

Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns 87

Displaying Onscreen Markers 87

Displaying Zebra Patterns 88

Setting the Time Code 90

Selecting the Time Code Mode 90

Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame 91

Putting the Time Code Display on Hold 91

Setting the User Bit 93

Synchronizing with an External Device 94

Connecting an External Device 94

Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock

Synchronization) 94

Time Code Signal Input 95

Reference Video Signal Output 96

Time Code Signal Output 96

Recording Audio 97

Audio Settings and Recorded Audio Channels 97

Connecting an External Microphone or External

Audio Input Source to the Camcorder 99

Selecting the Audio Format of MP4 Clips 100

Setting the Audio Input Type for the INPUT 1/

INPUT 2 Terminals 100

Selecting the Audio Input Source for Audio

Channels 101

Adjusting the Audio Recording Level 101

Advanced Audio Input Settings 103

Monitoring the Audio with Headphones 105

Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal 106

Color Bars 106

Audio Reference Signal 106

Waveform Monitor 107

Displaying the Waveform Monitor 107

Configuring the Waveform Monitor 107

Adding Marks to XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips while

Recording 109

Adding Shot Marks while Recording 109

Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last

XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clip Recorded 109

ing Metadata 110

Sett

ing a User Memo Created with Canon XF

Utility 110

Entering Slate Information About the

Recording 111

Recording GPS Information (Geotagging) 112

Connecting the GPS Receiver 112

Reviewing a Recording 114

Special Recording Modes 115

Slow Motion Recording 115

Pre-recording 116

Infrared Recording 117

4. Customization 119

Assignable Buttons 119

Changing the Assigned Function 119

Assignable functions 120

Custom Picture Settings 123

Selecting Custom Picture Files 123

Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings 123

Resetting Custom Picture Files 124

Renaming Custom Picture Files 124

Protecting Custom Picture Files 124

Copying Custom Picture Files 125

Embedding the Custom Picture File in XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC Clips 125

Available Custom Picture Settings 126

Saving and Loading Camcorder Settings 131

Saving Camcorder Settings 131

Loading Camcorder Settings 131

5. Playback 133

Playback 133

Clip Index Screen 133

Switching Index Screens 135

Playing Back Clips 135

Onscreen Displays 136

Playback Controls 137

Adjusting the Volume 138

Clip Operations 139

Using the Clip Menu 139

Displaying Clip Information 140

Adding $ Marks or % Marks (XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC Clips) 141

Deleting $ Marks or % Marks (XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC Clips) 141

Copying Clips 141

Deleting Clips 142

Deleting the User Memo and GPS Information

(XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips) 143

Adding and Deleting Shot Marks (XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC Clips) 143

6. External Connections 145

Video Output Configuration 145

Recording Video Signal Configuration and Video

Output Configuration by Terminal 145

Connecting to an External Monitor 147

Using the SDI Terminal 147

Using the HDMI OUT Terminal 148

Superimposing Onscreen Displays on Video

Outputs 148

Applying a LUT to Screens/Video Outputs 149

Adjusting the Color Quality for HLG Output 151

Adjusting the Gain Difference between HDR and

SDR 151

Selecting the Output Range 151

Audio Output 152

Working with Clips on a Computer 153

Saving XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips to a

Computer 153

Saving MP4 Clips 153

7. Network Functions 155

About the Network Functions 155

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network 156

Camera Access Point 157

Connecting in Infrastructure Mode 158

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) 158

Searching for Access Points 159

Manual Setup 160

Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network 161

Selecting a Network Connection 162

Checking the Network’s Status 162

Changing Network Settings 163

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from

a Network Device 164

Setting Up Browser Remote 164

Starting Browser Remote 165

Using Browser Remote 166

IP Streaming 175

IP Streaming Settings 175

Streaming Video over IP 176

FTP File Transfer 178

FTP Server and Transfer Settings 178

Transferring Clips (FTP Transfer) 179

8. Photos 181

Taking Photos 181

Playing Back Photos 182

Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen 182

Viewing Photos 182

Deleting Photos 183

Deleting a Single Photo 183

Deleting All the Photos 183

9. Additional Information 185

Menu Options 185

Displaying the Status Screens 197

Troubleshooting 206

List of Messages 211

Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions 215

Maintenance/Others 219

Optional Accessories 220

Specifications 222

Reference Tables 227

Approximate Recording Time on an SD Card 227

Charging Times 227

Approximate Recording Times with a Fully

Charged Battery Pack 228

Index 229

Introduction

About this Manual

Thank you for purchasing the Canon XF705. Please read this manual carefully before you use the camcorder and

retain it for future reference. Should the camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer to Tro ubl eshoo ting (A 206).

Conventions Used in this Manual

• IMPORTANT: Precautions related to the camcorder’s operation.

• NOTES: Additional topics that complement the basic operating procedures.

• A: Reference page number.

• The following terms are used in this manual.

"Screen" refers to the LCD screen and the viewfinder screen.

"Card" refers to an SD, SDHC or SDXC card.

When not specified, "access indicator" refers to either or both of the SD card access indicators (SD CARD2/

SD CARD3).

"Clip" refers to a single movie unit recorded with a single recording operation (for example, from the point when

the REC button is pressed to start recording until it is pressed again to stop).

• Photographs in the manual are simulated pictures taken with a still camera. Some screenshots have been

altered to make them easier to read.

• Operating mode icons: These icons indicate the camcorder's two operating modes (A 22). A shaded icon

(like ) indicates that the function described can be used in the operating mode shown; a non-shaded icon

(like ) indicates that the function cannot be used.

• The following style is used to represent menu selections. For a detailed explanation on how to use the menus,

refer to Using the Menus (A 25). For a summary of all available menu options and settings, refer to Menu

Options (A 185).

Operating modes:

Brackets [ ] indicate text as it appears on the

camcorder's screen (menu options, onscreen

buttons, messages, etc.).

This arrow indicates a deeper

level in the menu hierarchy or

the next step in a procedure.

1 Select [Initialize Media].

> [Æ

Recording/Media Setup] > [Initialize Media]

2 Select [SD Card A] or [SD Card B] and then press SET.

Supplied Accessories

The following accessories are supplied with the camcorder.

Shoulder Pad* Lens Hood with Lens Barrier Microphone Holder CA-CP200 L Compact Power Adapter

(incl. power cord)

CG-A20 Battery Charger BP-A30 Battery Pack

(incl. terminal cover)

Eye Cup Viewfinder Cap

Lens Cap* SS-1200 Shoulder Strap WL-D6000 Wireless Controller

(incl. CR2025 Lithium Battery)

Quick Guide

* Comes pre-attached to the camcorder.

Names of Parts

Camcorder

45 6 78 9 1011121314 15

1 Air intake vent (A 50)

2 Focal plane mark

3 ZOOM SPEED (zoom speed of the handle's zoom

rocker) switch (A 73)

4 Lens hood (A 28)

5 Lens barrier switch (A 41)

6 Focus ring (A 76)

7 Zoom ring (A 71)

8 Iris ring (A 62)

9 SHUTTER (shutter speed mode) switch (A 55)

10 PUSH AUTO IRIS (momentary automatic aperture)

button (A 62)

11 GAIN switch (A 59)

12 WHITE BAL. (white balance) switch (A 67)

13 Å (white balance adjustment) button (A 69)

14 Card slot covers (A 34): SD CARD2 (top) and

SD CARD3 (bottom)

15 Protective cover for audio controls (A 97)

Names of Parts

2345

14 15

16 17 18 19

910 111213

p15

1 ND FILTER +/– buttons (A 60)

2 PUSH AF (momentary autofocus) button (A 79)

3 FOCUS (focus mode) switch (A 76)

4 POWERED IS button (A 85)/

Assignable button Camera 1 (A 119)

5 PEAKING button (A 78)/

Assignable button Camera 2 (A 119)

6 INFRARED switch (A 117)

7FULL AUTO switch (A 43)

8 AWB (auto white balance) switch (A 68)

9 IRIS (aperture mode) switch (A 61)

10 ZOOM (zoom control selection) switch (A 71)

11 WFM (waveform monitor) button (A 107)/

Assignable button Camera 4 (A 119)

12 ZEBRA button (A 88)/

Assignable button Camera 3 (A 119)

13 AGC (automatic gain control) switch (A 58)

14 SLOT SELECT (SD card selection) button

(A 35, 134)

–

(audio level) switches for CH1 (top) and

CH2 (bottom) (A 101)

16 SD card slots (A 34): SD CARD2 (top) and

SD CARD3 (bottom)

In this manual, SD cards in each slot are referred

to as “SD card A” and “SD card B”, respectively.

17 Card access indicators (A 34): SD CARD2 (top)

and SD CARD3 (bottom)

18 AUDIO STATUS (display the [Audio] status

screens) button (A 200)

–

(audio level) dials for CH1 (top) and CH2

(bottom) (A 102)

Names of Parts

8 9 10 11 12

23 4 5 6 7

1 Strap mount (A 31)

2 INPUT 2 (audio input selection) switch (A 100)

3 ANALOG (analog audio source selection) switch

for INPUT 2 (A 100)

4Grip belt (A 31)

5 INPUT 1 (audio input selection) switch (A 100)

6 ANALOG (analog audio source selection) switch

for INPUT 1 (A 100)

7 Screw holes for the microphone holder fixation

bolts (A 28)

8 Exhaust ventilation outlet (A 50)

9 INPUT 1 terminal (XLR) (A 99)

10 MIC (microphone) terminal (A 99)

11 USB terminal (A 112)

12 Lens hood lock screw (A 28)

Names of Parts

123 456

23 24 25

1 Built-in stereo microphone (A 97)

2 Accessory shoe

For attaching accessories such as the optional

VL-10Li II Battery Video Light.

3 Rear tally lamp (A 42)

4 Grip zoom rocker (A 71)

5 MAGN. (magnification) button (A 78)/

Assignable button Camera 6 (A 119)

6 u (review recording) button (A 114)/

Assignable button Camera 5 (A 119)

7 Ø (fast reverse playback) button (A 137)/

Assignable button Camera 8 (A 119)

8 Ú (skip backward) button (A 137)/

Assignable button Camera 11 (A 119)

9 Ñ (stop) button (A 135)/

Assignable button Camera 12 (A 119)

10 INDEX button (A 135)

11 Joystick and SET button (A 25)

12 Handle zoom rocker (A 73)

13 × (fast playback) button (A 137)/

Assignable button Camera 10 (A 119)

14 Ò (play/pause) button (A 135)/

Assignable button Camera 9 (A 119)

15 Ù (skip forward) button (A 137)/

Assignable button Camera 13 (A 119)

16 MENU button (A 25)

17 CANCEL button (A 25)

18 Handle REC button's lock lever (A 42)

19 REC (start/stop recording) button (A 42)

20 MAGN. (magnification) button (A 78)/

Assignable button Camera 7 (A 119)

21 Built-in speaker (A 1

38)

Located on the upper surface of the space where

the LCD panel is stored.

22 Strap mount (A 31)

23 MEDIA (playback mode) button (A 22, 133)

switch (A 22)

25 Accessory socket

For mounting accessories with 1/4"-20 screws

(6.9 mm (0.27 in.) deep).

26 KEY LOCK (camcorder's key lock function) switch

(A 43)

Names of Parts

1 Attachment sockets for the optional TA-100 Tripod

Adapter (A 32)

2 Mounting sockets and screw hole for the shoulder

pad (A 32)

3 Screw hole for 1/4"-20 mounting screws

(8.8 mm (0.35 in.) deep) (A 32)

4 Screw hole for 3/8"-16 mounting screws

(10 mm (0.39 in.) deep) (A 32)

Names of Parts

5 6

1 Microphone lock screw (A 99)

2 Microphone holder (A 99)

3 Microphone cable clamp (A 99)

4 Air intake vent (A 50)

5Front tally lamp (A 42)

6Remote sensor (A 38)/

Infrared light (A 117)

7 MIRROR (invert the displayed image) button

(A 29)

8 Lens barrier (A 41)

9 Assignable button Camera 14 (A 119)

Names of Parts

1 Viewfinder (A 28, 30)

2Eye sensor (A 28)

3Eye cup (A 29)

4 LCD panel with touch screen (A 29, 30)

5 Dioptric adjustment lever (A 28)

6 BATTERY RELEASE button (A 21)

7 MENU button (A 25)

8 FUNC (main functions) button (A 54)

9 CUSTOM PICT. (custom picture) button (A 65,

123)

10 STATUS (display status screen) button (A 197)

11 DISP (display) button (A 44, 136)

12 Battery compartment (A 20)/

Model identification label

13 REC (start/stop recording) button (A 42)

14 Joystick and SET button (A 25)

15 CANCEL button (A 25)

16 INPUT 2 terminal (XLR) (A 99)

17 SDI terminal (A 145, 147)

18 TIME CODE terminal (A 95, 96)

19 G-LOCK/SYNC terminal (A 94, 96)

(headphone) terminal (A 105, 138)

21 REMOTE B terminal

For connecting the optional RC-V100 Remote

Controller (A 39).

22 (Ethernet) indicator (A 161)

23 (Ethernet) terminal (A 161)

24 HDMI OUT terminal (A 145, 148)

25 REMOTE A terminal

For connecting the optional RC-V100 Remote

Controller (A 39) or commercially available

remote controllers.

26 DC IN terminal (A 21)

Names of Parts

WL-D6000 Wireless Controller

1 Record enable button: When you use the START/

STOP button or ZOOM buttons, you must press

this button simultaneously with the desired button.

2 PHOTO button (A 181)

3 SHOT1 (shot mark 1) button (A 109, 143)

4 CANCEL button (A 25)

5 SET button (A 25)

6 INDEX button (A 135)

7 Ò (play/pause) button (A 135)

8 Ñ (stop) button (A 135)

9 START/STOP (start/stop recording) button

(A 42)

10 ZOOM T/W buttons (A 74)

11 á/â/à/ß buttons

12 MENU button (A 25)

13 Ø/× (fast playback reverse/forward) buttons

(A 137)

14 Ô/Ó (frame reverse/advance) buttons

(A 137)

Preparations

Preparing the Power Supply

You can power the camcorder using a battery pack or directly using the compact power adapter. If you connect

the compact power adapter to the camcorder while a battery pack is attached, the camcorder will draw power

from the power outlet.

Using a Battery Pack

You can power the camcorder using the supplied BP-A30 Battery Pack or the optional BP-A60 Battery Pack.

Both battery packs are compatible with Intelligent System so you can check the approximate remaining battery

usage time (in minutes) on the screen. For more accurate readings, when using a battery pack for the first time,

charge it fully and then use the camcorder until the battery pack is completely exhausted.

Charging the Battery Pack

Charge battery packs using the supplied CG-A20 Battery

Charger and CA-CP200 L Compact Power Adapter, or using an

optional CG-A10 Battery Charger. Before charging, remove the

terminal cover of the battery pack.

1 Connect the power cord to the supplied CA-CP200 L

Compact Power Adapter.

2 Plug the compact power adapter's power cord into a power

outlet.

3 Connect the compact power adapter's DC plug to the battery

charger.

4 Attach the battery pack to the battery charger.

• Press lightly and slide the battery pack in the direction of

the arrow until it clicks.

• The CHARGE indicator starts flashing and also indicates

the battery pack’s approximate charge. The indicator will

stay on when charging has completed.

approx. 0% to 49%: Flashes once every 2 seconds

approx. 50% to 74%: Flashes twice every 2 seconds

approx. 75% to 99%: Flashes 3 times every 2 seconds

5 When the battery pack is fully charged, remove it from the battery charger.

6 Disconnect the DC plug from the battery charger.

7 Unplug the power cord from the power outlet and disconnect the power cord from the compact power

adapter.

IMPORTANT

• Do not connect to the battery charger any product that is not expressly recommended for use with this

camcorder.

• When using the battery charger or compact power adapter, do not fix it permanently to one place as this may

cause a malfunction.

햵

햲

햴

햳

CHARGE indicator

Compact power adapter

Preparing the Power Supply

• We recommend charging the battery pack in temperatures between 10 ºC and 30 ºC (50 ºF and 86 ºF).

Outside the temperature range of 0 ºC to 40 ºC (32 ºF to 104 ºF), charging will not start.

• To prevent equipment breakdowns and excessive heating, do not connect the supplied battery charger or

compact power adapter to voltage converters for overseas travels or special power sources such as those on

aircraft and ships, DC-AC inverters, etc.

NOTES

• If there is a malfunction with the battery charger, compact power adapter or battery pack, the charge indicator

will go out and charging will stop.

• For handling precautions regarding the battery pack, refer to Battery Pack (A 216).

• For approximate charging times and recording times with a fully charged battery pack, refer to the Reference

Tables (A 227).

• Charged battery packs continue to discharge naturally. Therefore, charge them on the day of use, or the day

before, to ensure a full charge.

• We recommend that you prepare battery packs to last 2 to 3 times longer than you think you might need.

• Repeatedly charging and discharging the battery pack will eventually shorten its battery life. You can check the

battery life on the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 203). Fully charging the battery pack and then

discharging it completely will give you a more accurate reading.

Attaching the Battery Pack

1 Press and hold the button on the

switch and set

the switch to OFF.

2 Insert the battery pack all the way into the compartment as

shown in the illustration and press it gently down until it

clicks.

햲

햳

Preparing the Power Supply

Removing the Battery Pack

1Set the

switch to OFF.

2 Holding down the BATTERY RELEASE button, slide the

battery pack up and then pull it out.

Checking the Remaining Battery Charge

When the camcorder is turned on, you can check the approximate remaining battery usage time (in minutes) by

looking at any recording/playback screen or the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 203). You can also

check the approximate charge level on the battery pack itself.

Press the CHECK button on the battery pack. An

indicator will light for approximately 3 seconds and show

the approximate remaining battery charge.

0-25%

26-50%

51-75%

76-100%

Using a Power Outlet

You can also power the camcorder directly from a power outlet using the supplied CA-CP200 L Compact Power

Adapter. While the camcorder is powered using a power outlet, you can replace the battery pack even when the

camcorder is turned on.

1 Connect the power cord to the compact power adapter

and plug it into a power outlet.

2 Connect the compact power adapter’s DC plug to the

DC IN terminal on the camcorder.

IMPORTANT

• Make sure to turn off the camcorder before connecting or

disconnecting the compact power adapter.

• When using the compact power adapter, do not fix it

permanently to one place as this may cause a malfunction.

CHECK buttonBattery charge

indicator

햲

햳

DC IN

terminal

Compact power adapter

Preparing the Power Supply

Turning the Camcorder On and Off

The camcorder has two operating modes: CAMERA ( ) mode for making recordings and MEDIA ( )

mode for playing back recordings.

To turn the camcorder on/off

Press and hold the button on the Q switch and set the

switch to ON to turn on the camcorder in mode. Set it

to OFF to turn off the camcorder.

To turn on the camcorder in mode

Press and hold both the MEDIA button and the button on the

Q switch and set the switch to ON to turn on the

camcorder directly in mode.

To change the operating mode

Press the MEDIA button to switch the camcorder back and

forth between mode and mode.

Date, Time and Language Settings

Setting the Date and Time

You will need to set the date and time on the camcorder before you can start using it. When the internal clock is

not set, or if the settings were lost because the built-in backup battery is depleted, the [Date/Time] screen will

appear automatically with the time zone selected when you turn on the camcorder.

1Push the joystick up/down to select the desired time zone and then press SET (press the joystick

itself) to move to the next field.

• To move between fields you can also push the joystick left/right.

• The default time zone is [UTC-05:00] (New York) or [UTC+01:00] (Central Europe), depending on the

country/region of purchase. Time zones are based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC).

2 Change the rest of the fields in the same way.

3 Select [Set] and then press SET to start the clock and close the screen.

NOTES

• You can display the date/time in mode with the > [

¢%

Monitoring Setup] > [Custom

Display 2] > [Date/Time] setting.

• After the initial setup, you can change the time zone, date and time with the > [B ! System Setup]

> [Time Zone] and [Date/Time] settings. You can also change the date format and clock format (12 or 24

hours) with the > [B ! System Setup] > [Date Format] setting.

• When the built-in backup battery is exhausted, the date and time setting may be lost. In such case, recharge

the built-in backup battery (

A 218) and set the time zone, date and time again.

• Using the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver, you can have the camcorder adjust settings automatically according

to the UTC date/time information received from the GPS signal (A 112).

Operating modes:

Date, Time and Language Settings

Changing the Language

The camcorder’s default language is English. You can change it to German, Spanish, French, Italian, Polish,

Portuguese, Russian, Simplified Chinese, Korean or Japanese. Please note that some settings and screens will

be displayed in English, regardless of the language setting.

1Press the MENU button.

2Push the joystick up/down to select [

System Setup] and then press SET.

3 Select [Language

] in a similar fashion and then press SET.

4Push the joystick up/down to select a language.

5Press SET to change the language and then press the MENU button to close the menu.

Operating modes:

Using the Menus

Many of the camcorder’s functions can be adjusted from the menu that opens after pressing the MENU button.

In mode, you can also register frequently used menu settings in a customized submenu (My Menu) for

easy access. For details about the available menu options and settings, refer to Menu Options (A 185).

Selecting an Option from the Menu

The following is a step-by-step explanation of how to select an option from the menu for most menu items. For

some menu items, refer also to the function’s description for additional operations that may be necessary. In the

procedures throughout the rest of this manual, closing the menu is assumed and not included in the procedure.

For brevity's sake, references in the text to settings in the setup menus may be abbreviated as follows:

> [B ! System Setup] > [Language H] > Desired option

1Press the MENU button.

• The menu opens with the orange selection frame indicating the menu item that was selected the previous

time the menu was closed (unless the camcorder was turned off).

2Push the joystick left/right to select the desired setup menu and "page" number.

• When a menu item is selected (highlighted in orange), pushing the joystick left/right will browse through the

pages one at a time. To change setup menus faster, push the joystick up/down or press the CANCEL button

until an icon is selected, and then push the joystick left/right.

Operating modes:

MENU button

Press to open the menu and then press again to close the menu after

adjusting desired settings.

CANCEL button

Press to return to the previous menu/submenu level or to stop some

operations that are in progress.

Joystick

Push the joystick to move the orange selection frame in the menu. Then,

press the joystick itself ("press SET") to select the menu item indicated by

the orange selection frame. Note that although only the button at the

center of one of the joysticks is labeled as SET, in the manual, "press SET"

will be used to mean pressing down the joystick itself.

CANCEL button

MENU button

Joystick and

SET button

Joystick and SET button

MENU button

CANCEL button

Using the Menus

3Push the joystick up/down to select the desired menu item and then press SET.

• Setting options will appear with a Ð mark next to the currently selected option.

• Some menu items may have an additional submenu level. Select the desired submenu and press SET to

display the setting options.

• When a setup menu icon is highlighted in orange, you can also press SET to select the first menu item in the

setup menu page.

4Push the joystick up/down to select the desired setting option and then press SET.

5Press the MENU button to close the menu.

NOTES

• Unavailable items may appear grayed out.

• Pressing the MENU button at any time closes the menu.

• On some screens, the following icons may be displayed as a guide: , , . They refer, respectively,

to pressing the joystick (or SET button), the MENU button and the CANCEL button.

• When using the supplied wireless controller, use the á, â, à, ß and SET buttons in the same way as the

camcorder’s joystick. Similarly, when an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder,

you can use the remote controller’s up/down/left/right/SET buttons. Pressing the SET button is equivalent to

pressing the joystick on the camcorder.

• You can check most of the current settings on the status screens (A 197).

Using the Customized Submenu (My Menu)

You can register up to 6 frequently used menu settings under a My Menu submenu for easy access. You can

save up to 5 separate sets of My Menu settings so you can customize different options for different shooting

situations. Furthermore, if you set an assignable button to [My Menu] (A 119), you can press the button to

access your registered menu settings even faster and more easily.

Selecting a My Menu Set

1 Select the desired [My Menu] screen.

> [¥ My Menu]

2 Push the joystick left/right to select the page corresponding to the desired My Menu set and then press SET.

Adding Menu Settings

1 Select [Register].

> [¥ My Menu]* > [Edit] > [Register]

* Each My Menu set appears on a different page. Select the page that corresponds to the desired set.

• A screen will appear where you can select the menu setting you want to add.

• Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation and return to the regular menu.

2 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to add and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.

• The menu setting you registered will now appear under the currently selected My Menu set.

Using the Menus

Rearranging Menu Settings

1 Select [Move].

> [¥ My Menu]* > [Edit] > [Move]

* Each My Menu set appears on a different page. Select the page that corresponds to the desired set.

2 Push the joystick up/down to select the setting you want to move and then press SET.

•The

]

icon will appear next to the setting you selected to move.

3 Push the joystick up/down to move the setting to the desired position and then press SET.

Removing Menu Settings

1 Select [Delete].

> [¥ My Menu]* > [Edit] > [Delete]

* Each My Menu set appears on a different page. Select the page that corresponds to the desired set.

2 Push the joystick up/down to select the setting you want to remove and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.

Resetting the My Menu Submenu

1 To reset all the menu settings registered to the My Menu set, select [Reset All].

> [¥ My Menu]* > [Edit] > [Reset All]

* Each My Menu set appears on a different page. Select the page that corresponds to the desired set.

2 Select [OK] and then press SET twice.

Renaming the Selected My Menu Set

You can give each of the 5 My Menu sets a more descriptive name to make them easier to identify.

1 Select [Rename].

> [¥ My Menu]* > [Edit] > [Rename]

* Each My Menu set appears on a different page. Select the page that corresponds to the desired set.

2 Enter the desired name (8 characters long) using the keyboard screen.

Using the Virtual Keyboard Screen

The virtual keyboard will appear on the screen. The layout may differ slightly depending on the function.

1Use the joystick to select a character and then press SET to

add it.

• Push the joystick up/down/left/right to select the desired

character and press SET to enter it. Use the arrows (///) to

change the position of the cursor and the backspace character

( ) to delete the last character entered.

• Repeat this step as necessary to enter the desired text.

• Some characters will not be available, depending on the

function.

• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen without entering any text.

2 After entering the desired text, select [OK] and then press SET to close the keyboard screen.

Current character / Character limit

Preparing the Camcorder

This section outlines the basic preparations for the camcorder, such as attaching the microphone holder and

lens hood and adjusting the LCD screen and viewfinder.

Attaching the Microphone Holder Unit

Use the supplied screws to attach the microphone holder unit to the

handle.

Attaching the Lens Hood

Attach the lens hood to protect the lens and reduce the amount of

stray light that may hit the lens. Additionally, keeping the lens barrier

closed can help avoid fingerprints and dirt on the lens.

Always remove the lens hood and attach the lens cap when

carrying the camcorder or storing it after use.

1 Remove the lens cap.

• The lens cap and lens hood cannot be used at the same time.

2 Place the lens hood on the front of the lens with the lock

screw side pointing down

(햲) and turn it 90 degrees

clockwise

(햳).

• Be careful not to deform the lens hood.

• Make sure that the lens hood is aligned with the thread.

3 Tighten the lock screw (햴).

Using the Viewfinder

The camcorder's viewfinder features an OLED screen that turns on automatically when you look through the

viewfinder and turns off shortly after you move your eye away from it.

Adjusting the Viewfinder

1 Adjust the viewfinder’s angle as necessary.

2 Turn on the camcorder and adjust the dioptric

adjustment lever until the viewfinder’s image is

sharp.

NOTES

• You can turn on the viewfinder permanently by

setting > [

" Monitoring Setup] >

[VF Eye Sensor] to [Off].

햲

햳

햴

햲

햳

Dioptric

adjustment lever

Preparing the Camcorder

Attaching and Removing the Eye Cup

Attach the eye cup so that it covers the rubber rim of the viewfinder

unit. To remove the eye cup, pull it gently in a “peeling off” motion

from the bottom up.

• For left eye use, attach the eye cup so that the protruding part

faces the opposite side.

IMPORTANT

• Pointing the viewfinder lens at the sun or other strong light sources

may cause damage to internal components. When you are not using

the viewfinder, make sure to attach the viewfinder cap to the

viewfinder. This will also protect the viewfinder from scratches and

dirt. Attach the viewfinder cap by inserting it into the rubber rim of the

viewfinder unit.

Using the LCD Screen

1 Pull out the LCD panel 90° to the left or right.

2Adjust the LCD panel to the desired angle.

NOTES

• You can invert the image displayed on the screen

according to the LCD panel's position. In mode,

pressing the MIRROR button will switch between the

original image and the image inverted vertically. In

mode, it will switch between the original image and the

image inverted both horizontally and vertically. While the

image is inverted in mode, the camera's onscreen

displays will not appear on the screen.

Eye cup

Viewfinder

unit

Preparing the Camcorder

Adjusting the LCD Screen or Viewfinder

You can adjust the brightness, contrast, color, sharpness, and luminance level of the LCD screen and viewfinder

independently of each other. These adjustments will not affect your recordings.

1 Open the setup menu page for the LCD screen or viewfinder.

> [

! Monitoring Setup] (for the LCD screen) or [

" Monitoring Setup] (for the viewfinder)

2 Select the desired brightness, contrast, color, sharpness or luminance setting and then press SET.

• When the viewfinder is turned off, the menu items on [

" Monitoring Setup] will appear grayed out.

3 Select the desired level and then press SET.

• Repeat steps 2 and 3 to adjust other settings as necessary.

Menu items by setting

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [LCD Setup] or [Viewfinder Setup] (A 119), you can press the button to

open the [

! Monitoring Setup] or [

" Monitoring Setup] menu page, respectively.

• About the LCD and viewfinder screens: The screens are produced using extremely high-precision manufacturing

techniques, with more than 99.99% of the pixels operating to specification. Very rarely, pixels may misfire or

light up permanently. This has no effect on the recorded image and does not constitute a malfunction.

Setting the Screen to Black & White

The LCD screen and viewfinder display in color by default but you can set them to black & white. Even when the

screen is black & white, onscreen text and icons will still be displayed in color.

1 Select the respective [B&W Image] menu setting.

> [

$ Monitoring Setup] > [B&W Image: LCD] or [B&W Image: VF]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

Operating modes:

Setting

Menu item

LCD screen Viewfinder

Brightness [LCD Brightness] [VF Brightness]

Contrast [LCD Contrast] [VF Contrast]

Color [LCD Color] [VF Color]

Sharpness [LCD Sharpness] [VF Sharpness]

Luminance [LCD Luminance] [VF Luminance]

Preparing the Camcorder

Adjusting the Grip Belt

Adjust the grip belt so that you can reach the grip zoom rocker

with your index and middle fingers, and the REC button with

your thumb.

IMPORTANT

• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when adjusting the grip belt.

Attaching the Shoulder Strap

Pass the ends through the strap mounts and

adjust the length of the strap.

IMPORTANT

• Be careful not to drop the camcorder when attaching

or adjusting the shoulder strap.

Removing and Attaching the Terminal Covers

You can remove the covers of all the camcorder's terminals to access them more easily.

Removing the Terminal Covers

1 Open the terminal cover and pull it out.

2 Grasp the strip connecting the terminal cover to the

camcorder and pull.

Attaching the Terminal Covers

Insert the connecting strip into the opening to attach the terminal cover.

NOTES

• If the connecting strip is difficult to grasp, use a pair of tweezers or similar tool.

Preparing the Camcorder

Removing the Shoulder Pad

The shoulder pad comes originally attached to the

camcorder. You can remove it if you prefer a different

configuration.

Use a Phillips head ("crosshead") screwdriver to

remove the screw as shown in the illustration and

remove the shoulder pad.

• Be careful not to lose the shoulder pad or its screw

after removing them.

Using a Tripod

You can mount the camcorder on any tripod with a 0.64 cm (1/4") or 0.95 cm (3/8") mounting screw.

IMPORTANT

• Using tripods with mounting screws longer than the depth of the screw hole used (A 15) may cause damage

to the camcorder.

Screw holes for tripods

Screw holes for the optional

TA-100 Tripod Adapter

Using SD Cards

The camcorder records clips and photos on commercially available Secure Digital (SD) cards*. The camcorder

has two SD card slots and you can use two SD cards to record on both simultaneously or to automatically

switch to the other SD card when the SD card in use is full (A 36).

Initialize SD cards (A 35) when you use them with this camcorder for the first time.

* The SD card is used also to save custom picture files and menu settings files.

Compatible SD Cards

The following types of SD card

can be used with this camcorder. For the latest information about SD cards

tested for use with this camcorder, visit your local Canon Web site.

As of March 2018, the clip recording function has been tested using SD cards made by Panasonic, Toshiba and SanDisk.

UHS and SD Speed Class are standards that indicate the minimum guaranteed data transfer rate of SD cards.

In the following cases, the use of SD cards rated UHS Speed Class U3 is recommended:

- When the resolution is set to 3840x2160.

- When slow motion recording is activated.

IMPORTANT

• After repeatedly recording, deleting and editing clips (if the memory is fragmented), you may notice slower

writing speeds to the card and recording may even stop. In such case, save your recordings and initialize the

card with the camcorder. Be sure to initialize cards especially before shooting important scenes.

• About SDXC cards: You can use SDXC cards with this camcorder but SDXC cards are initialized by the

camcorder using the exFAT file system.

- When using exFAT-formatted cards with other devices (digital recorders, card readers, etc.), make sure that

the external device is compatible with exFAT. For more information on compatibility, contact the computer,

operating system or card manufacturer.

- If you use exFAT-formatted cards with a computer OS that is not exFAT-compatible, you may be prompted

to format the card. In such case, cancel the operation to prevent data loss.

NOTES

• Proper operation cannot be guaranteed for all SD cards.

SD card type:

./ 0

SD cards SDHC cards SDXC cards

SD Speed Class

UHS Speed Class

2, 3

Speed Class U1 Speed Class U3

Using SD Cards

Inserting and Removing an SD Card

1 Open the card slot cover.

2Insert the SD card, with the label facing the

viewfinder, all the way into the card slot until it

clicks.

• To remove the SD card, make sure the access indicator

is off and then push the card once to release it. When

the card springs out, pull it all the way out.

3 Close the card slot cover.

• Do not force the cover closed if the card is not correctly

inserted.

Card access indicators

If you set > [

$ System Setup] > [LED] > [SD Card Access LED] to [Off], the card access

indicators will not illuminate.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while a card access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may

result in permanent data loss.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

- Do not remove the card.

• SD cards have front and back sides that are not interchangeable. Inserting a card facing the wrong direction

can cause a malfunction of the camcorder. Be sure to insert the card as described in step 2.

NOTES

• SD cards have a physical switch to prevent writing on the card so as to avoid the accidental erasure of the

card’s content. To write-protect the SD card, set the switch to the LOCK position.

SD CARD 2/ SD CARD 3

indicator

SD card status

Red Accessing the SD card.

Green

The card slot is currently selected and the camcorder is ready to record/play back (clips on either card, photos on

SD card B only).

Off

An SD card is not inserted, the card is not being accessed, the card is write-protected with the LOCK switch, or

the card slot is not currently selected.

햲

햳

햴

Card access

indicators

Using SD Cards

Initializing an SD Card

Initialize SD cards when you use them with this camcorder for the first time. You can also initialize a card to

permanently delete all the recordings it contains.

1 Select [Initialize Media].

> [Æ

Recording/Media Setup] > [Initialize Media]

2 Select [SD Card A] or [SD Card B] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

IMPORTANT

• Initializing a card will permanently erase all data, including clips with an $ mark, photos and protected custom

picture files. Lost data cannot be recovered. Make sure you save important recordings in advance.

• Depending on the SD card, the initialization may take up to a few minutes.

NOTES

• While recording on an SD card, you can initialize another SD card in the other SD card slot.

• If you set an assignable button to [Initialize Media] (A 119), you can press the button to open the [Initialize

Media] submenu.

Switching Between the SD Card Slots

The camcorder features two SD card slots, SD card slot A and

SD card slot B. If both slots contain a card, you can switch

between them as necessary.

Press the SLOT SELECT button.

• The access indicator of the selected SD card slot will

illuminate in green.

NOTES

• If both SD card slots contain a card and you open the cover of the selected slot, the camcorder will

automatically switch to the other slot.

• You cannot use the SLOT SELECT button to switch between SD card slots while recording.

• You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (

164,

169

Operating modes:

Using SD Cards

Relay Recording and Double Slot Recording

The camcorder features two convenient recording methods that can be used when both SD card slots contain a

card: relay recording and double slot recording.

Relay recording: This function allows you to continue recording on the other card without interruption when the

card you are using becomes full. Relay recording is available from SD card slot A to SD card slot B, and vice

versa.

Double slot recording: This function records the same clip simultaneously to both cards, which is a convenient

way to make a backup copy of your recording while you record.

To u se relay recording

1 Select [Relay Recording].

> [Æ " Recording/Media Setup] > [Relay Recording]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

To u se double slot recording

1 Select [Double Slot Recording].

> [Æ " Recording/Media Setup] > [Double Slot Recording]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

•

appears at the top of the screen.

NOTES

• Relay recording is disabled (the camcorder will not switch to the other card) when slow motion recording is

activated.

• If an SD card becomes full during double slot recording, recording on both cards will stop. On the other hand,

if an error occurs with one of the SD cards, recording will continue on the other card.

• Double slot recording cannot be used together with relay recording or slow motion recording.

• After saving to a computer MP4 relay clips that were originally recorded on different SD cards, you can use

MP4 Join Tool to join the files and save them as a single clip (A 153).

Checking the Remaining Recording Time on SD Cards

In mode, the display on the upper left of the screen shows the SD card icons and the remaining

recording time* (in minutes) on each card (A 45).

On the [Media] status screen (A 201), you can check the total space, used space, approximate remaining

recording time* and speed class of each card. For SD card B only, the approximate remaining number of photos

will be displayed as well.

* Remaining recording times are approximate and calculated based on the current video configuration used.

Operating modes:

Using SD Cards

Recovering Clips

Some actions, such as suddenly turning off the camcorder or removing the SD card while data is being

recorded, can cause data errors in the recorded clip.

1 Open the index screen with the clip you wish to recover (A 133).

2 Select the desired clip (a clip with a yellow icon instead of a thumbnail image) and then press SET

to open the clip menu.

3 Select [Recover Clip] and then press SET.

4 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The camcorder will attempt to recover the corrupted data.

5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

NOTES

• In the index screen, recovered MP4 clips appear with a special playback icon instead of the usual thumbnail.

• This procedure may delete clips shorter than 0.5 seconds in length.

• In some cases, it may not be possible to recover the data. This is more likely when the file system is corrupted

or the card is physically damaged.

• Only clips recorded with this camcorder can be recovered. Photos cannot be recovered.

Operating modes:

Remote Operation of the Camcorder

The camcorder can be operated remotely in a number of different ways with varying degrees of control. First, you

can use the supplied wireless controller as described below. You can also connect an optional RC-V100 Remote

Controller for maximum control of your recordings at a professional level.

Finally, you can connect a network device to the camcorder via Wi-Fi and use the Browser Remote application to

control the camcorder (A 164).

Using the Supplied Wireless Controller

Inserting the Battery

Insert the supplied CR2025 lithium button battery into the wireless

controller before use.

1 Press the tab in the direction of the arrow (햲) and pull out the battery

holder (햳).

2 Place the lithium button battery with the + side facing up (햴).

3 Insert the battery holder (햵).

Activating the Wireless Controller

By default, the wireless controller is activated. If it has been deactivated, follow the procedure below to activate

it.

1 Select [WL-D6000].

> [B $ System Setup] > [WL-D6000]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

Using the Wireless Controller to Operate the

Camcorder

When using the wireless controller, point it at the

camcorder’s remote sensor. When the wireless

controller’s buttons are operated, the camcorder’s tally

lamps will illuminate.

NOTES

• When you use the START/STOP button or ZOOM

buttons on the supplied wireless controller, you must

press the record enable button simultaneously with

the desired button.

• When the camcorder cannot be operated with the supplied wireless controller, or when it can only be operated

at very close range, replace the battery.

• The supplied wireless controller may not work properly when the remote sensor is located under strong light

sources or direct sunlight.

Operating modes:

햲

햳

햵

햴

Using the Optional RC-V100 Remote Controller

You can connect the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller to the camcorder’s REMOTE A terminal or REMOTE

B terminal in order to control the camcorder (including advanced recording functions) from a distance. The

remote controller lets you turn on the camcorder, navigate the menus and change settings, control the aperture

and shutter speed, change some custom picture settings, and more. When you use the REMOTE B terminal to

connect the RC-V100, the camcorder can receive and process multiple simultaneous commands from the

remote controller.

For details on how to connect and use the remote controller, refer to its instruction manual.

1 Turn off the camcorder and connect the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller to the camcorder.

• Make sure that the remote controller’s terminal selection switch is set to match the terminal to be used on

the camcorder.

2 Turn on the camcorder and select [REMOTE Term.].

> [B $ System Setup] > [REMOTE Term.]

3 Select [RC-V100 (REMOTE A)] or [RC-V100 (REMOTE B)] depending on the terminal used and then

press SET.

Options

[RC-V100 (REMOTE A)], [RC-V100 (REMOTE B)]:

Select this option to use the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller connected to the

corresponding REMOTE terminal.

[Standard]: Select this option to use commercially available remote controls.

NOTES

• When the camcorder is set to full auto mode (A 43), settings related to the aperture, gain, shutter speed and

white balance (except for [R Gain] and [B Gain] in the custom picture's [White Balance] settings*) cannot be

changed using the remote controller.

* When infrared recording is activated, even the WHITE BALANCE R and B dials will have no effect on the camcorder.

• Adjusting picture-related settings with the remote controller can be performed only when the detailed settings

were activated ( > [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Activate Other Settings] is set to [On], A 123).

Operating modes:

RR-10 or RR-100 8-pin

Remote Cable (optional)

To the RC-V100’s

REMOTE A terminal

To the RC-V100’s

REMOTE B terminal

Remote cable

(supplied with the RC-V100)

Using the Optional RC-V100 Remote Controller

• The REMOTE A and REMOTE B terminals cannot be used at the same time.

• If you plan on connecting the remote controller to the camcorder using the optional RR-10 or RR-100 8-pin

Remote Cable, check the serial number of the RC-V100. If the serial number starts with “01 xxxx” (where xxxx

represents other digits), you will need to update the remote controller’s firmware. Canon will perform this

feature upgrade, and requires that the remote controller be sent to an accredited Canon Service Center.

Shipping and handling charges may apply. Contact a Canon Customer Support Center for details.

Recording

Recording Video

This section explains the basics of recording clips*. For details on recording audio, refer to Recording Audio

(A 97).

Before making important recordings for the first time, make test recordings using the video configuration(s) you

plan to use to check that the camcorder operates correctly. Should the camcorder fail to operate correctly, refer

to Troubleshooting (A 206).

* “Clip” refers to a single movie unit recorded with a single recording operation. You can also include metadata with the clip.

Preparing to Record

1 Remove the lens cap and attach the lens hood

(

A 28).

2 Attach a charged battery pack to the camcorder

(

A 19, 20).

3Insert SD cards as necessary (

A 33, 34).

• Insert cards into both SD card slots to use relay

recording or double slot recording (A 36).

4 Slide down the lens barrier switch to OPEN to open

the lens barrier.

5Adjust the LCD screen (

A 29) and/or viewfinder

(

A 30).

NOTES

• The camcorder can add a user memo (A 110) to the XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips you record but you must

prepare the user memo file before you start recording. The user memo can be used to store film slate

information such as the clip name, camera operator and filming location.

Operating modes:

햵

햲

햴

햳

햶

Recording Video

Recording

1Press and hold the button on the Q switch and set the switch to ON.

• The camcorder turns on in mode and enters record standby mode.

• The access indicators of card slots with a card inserted will illuminate momentarily in red. Then, the access

indicator of the card selected for recording will change to green.

2Press the REC button to begin recording.

• Recording starts. The tally lamps illuminate and the recording indicator [

REC] appears at the top of the

screen.

• You can use the REC button on the grip or the one on the handle.

• You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (

164,

169).

• When you use the supplied wireless controller, press the START/STOP button and the record enable button

simultaneously.

3Press the REC button to stop recording.

• The clip is recorded and the camcorder enters record standby mode. The tally lamps will also go out.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while an access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in

permanent data loss.

- Do not open the card slot cover of the card being accessed and do not remove the card.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

• Be sure to save your recordings regularly (A 153), especially after making important recordings. Canon shall

not be liable for any loss or corruption of data.

NOTES

• The REC button on the handle has a lock lever to prevent accidental operation. Set the lock lever to C to

prevent a recording from starting/stopping inadvertently or if you do not plan to use this REC button. Return

the lever to its previous position to enable use of the REC button again.

• You can use the review function (A 114) to play back part or all of the last clip recorded without having to

switch to mode.

• If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 119), you can press the button to add

an $ mark or % mark to the last XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip recorded.

Card access indicators

Tally lamps

Recording Video

• Any metadata settings you may have set (A 110) will be recorded with the clips you record. You can also

have the custom picture settings in use saved with the recorded XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips (A 125).

• The maximum continuous recording time of a single clip is 6 hours. After that, a new clip will be created

automatically and recording will continue as a separate clip.

• If the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing, you will not be able to record clips. Change the

position of the LOCK switch in advance.

• A video recording will be saved as separate clips in the following cases:

- When the camcorder switches to the other SD card while recording video due to the relay recording function

(A 36).

- When recording clips on an SDHC card, the video (stream) file in the clip will be split approximately every

4 GB. Playback with the camcorder will be continuous.

After saving separate split MP4 clips to a computer, you can use MP4 Join Tool to join the files and save them

as a single clip (A 153).

• Depending on the clip, the camcorder may adjust some controls internally to display a more suitable image on

the LCD screen and viewfinder.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file is set to a setting other than [Canon Log 3], the

camcorder will produce an image that approximates the look of video displayed on a compatible monitor

correctly configured.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file is set to [Canon Log 3], the camcorder will produce

colors that approximate the look of the BT.709 color space, regardless of the color space used for

recording.

Locking the Camcorder's Controls (Key Lock)

You can set the KEY LOCK switch to C (key lock) to lock

all the physical controls (buttons and switches) on the

camcorder, save for the REC buttons*. This is useful in

preventing settings from being changed due to

inadvertently pressing one of the buttons. Return the KEY

LOCK switch to the position to reactivate the controls.

When the camcorder's controls are locked, you can still

operate the camcorder using the supplied wireless

controller, optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or Browser

Remote application.

* In mode only, you can choose to lock also the REC buttons

with the >[B $ System Setup] > [Key Lock] setting.

Recording in Full Auto Mode

Set the FULL AUTO switch to ON to set the camcorder to full auto

mode. In full auto mode, the camcorder automatically sets the

aperture, gain, shutter speed, and white balance. The camcorder

will continuously adjust the brightness and white balance

automatically*. The focus mode, however, will not be set to

autofocus.

* The light metering mode (A 64) will be set to [Standard], AE shift (A 63) will

be set to [±0] and the AGC limit (A 58) will be set to [Off/33 dB].

Recording Video

Onscreen Displays

Refer to this section for an explanation of the various screen displays that appear in mode. You can use

the custom display function (A 191) to turn off individual onscreen displays if they are not required. The menu

item that controls each display is given in the following table (1: indicates a menu item under >

[¢%Monitoring Setup] > [Custom Display 1] and 2: indicates a menu item under [Custom Display 2]).

AF frames

Depending on the selected AF frame size (A 81) and focus function used, you may see some of the following

AF frames.

Continuous AF frame – always in white (A 80)

AF-boosted MF frame – in yellow: manual adjustment range; in white: automatic adjustment range (A 79)

Face AF:

Main subject (A 81)

Face AF:

Other face detection frames

Tracking: Subject selection (A 83)

Tracking: During tracking

Recording Video

Left side of the screen

Icon/Display Description Custom Display

Key lock (A 43) 1: [Key Lock]



(in red)

0000 min

Remaining battery charge

The icon shows an estimate of the remaining charge. The remaining recording

time is displayed, in minutes, next to the icon.

•When is displayed, replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.

• Depending on the conditions of use, the actual battery charge may not be

indicated accurately.

2: [Remaining Battery]

Card status and estimated remaining recording time 2: [Remaining Rec Time]

6, 7, 0000 min Card status: in green - can record; in yellow - card is almost full; in white - reading

the card. The card selected for recording is indicated with a

mark.

6, 7, END (in red) The card is full.

, (in red) No SD card or cannot record on the card.

Z 00/00

Zoom position (A 70).

• Can be displayed as a zoom bar or a numeric value. Appears only while

zooming.

1: [Zoom Indicator] (type),

[Zoom Position] (display

or not)

000 m or 000 ft, , - Approximate focusing distance (only during manual focus).

: Infinity focus, -: Focus beyond the infinity point.

1: [Object Distance]

@, A Focus mode (A 76) 1: [Focus Mode]

Face AF (A 81)

, , , ,

, , ,

Custom picture gamma settings (A 126) 1: [Custom Picture]

Detailed picture settings of the custom picture file are active (A 127).

¯,°,± (in yellow) Image stabilization (A 85) 1: [Image Stabilizer]

, Light metering mode (A 64) 1: [Light Metering]

Viewing LUT (A 149) 1: [LUT]

^ (in yellow) Magnification (A 78)

•You can press SET to change the magnification ratio.

1: [Magnification]

J, K (in yellow) Peaking (A 78) 1: [Peaking]

Fan operation and temperature warning (A 50)

• When the camcorder’s internal temperature rises above a certain level, b will

appear in yellow. If the temperature rises further, b will appear in red.

•When ` appears in red, this indicates a fan-related warning (A 208).

2: [Temperature/Fan]

Recording Video

Top of t he screen

Right side of the screen

Icon/Display Description Custom Display

Network type, network function and connection status (A 162).

Icons shown in white - function ready to be used; in yellow - connecting to or

disconnecting from a network; in red - an error has occurred.

2: [Network Functions]

Double slot recording (A 36) 2: [Recording Mode]

Recording operation:

STBY,

REC Clip recording: record standby, recording.

SLOW STBY,

SLOW REC

Slow motion recording (A 115): record standby, recording.

PRE REC STBY,

PRE REC

Pre-recording (A 116): record standby, recording.

00.00P, 00.00i, 000/00.00P Frame rate (A 51)

• During slow motion recording, the shooting frame rate is also displayed.

2: [Frame Rate]

REC

, STBY

Output recording command (A 188) 2: [Rec Command]

00:00:00.00, 00:00:00:00

R / P / F / E / H

Time code (A 90) 2: [Time Code]

Icon/Display Description Custom Display

7 0000, (in red) Approximate number of photos that can be recorded on the SD card (A 181)

• When appears in red, no card is inserted in SD card slot B or cannot record on

the card.

2: [Remaining Photos]

U Genlock (A 94) 2: [Genlock]

YCC422 10 bit,

YCC420 8 bit

Color sampling (A 52) 2: [Resolution/

Color Sampling]

0000x0000 Resolution (A 52)

, , ¸ Video format (A 51) 2: [Rec Format]

60(24)fps,

60(30)fps

Video output. (A 119) 2: [Output Terminals

Status]

Q User memo (A 110) 2: [User Memo]

(in red) Output onscreen displays (A 148) 2: [OSD Output]

(in red) Wireless controller disabled (A 38) 2: [WL-D6000]

Audio peak limiter (A 102) 2: [Audio Level Indicator]

Audio level meter (A 101)

, Headphone volume (A 138) –

Date/time – 2: [Date/Time]

CH0/CH0 Audio output channels (A 152) 2: [Monitor Channels]

Recording Video

Bottom of the screen

NOTES

• You can press the DISP button to turn off most icons and displays in the following sequence:

All displays on  Only onscreen markers (when activated, A 87)  Minimal displays (recording operation,

etc.)

Icon/Display Description Custom Display

00 00 00 00 User bit (A 93) 2: [User Bit]

A001C001 to Z999D999 Clip identification. Includes the camera index, reel number and clip number

components of the clip file name (A 48).

2: [Reel/Clip Number]

GPS signal (A 112): continuously on - satellite signal acquired; flashing - satellite

signal not acquired.

•Displayed only when an optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the

camcorder.

2: [GPS]

;

, =

Infrared recording and infrared light (A 117) 1: [IR Rec]

, , Digital tele-converter (A 70) 1: [Tele-converter]

TL-U58, WA-U58 Conversion lens optimization (A 75) 1: [Conversion Lens]

Full automatic mode (A 43) 1: [Full Auto]

, ,

0000 K ±0CC

White balance (A 67) 1: [White Balance]

Zoom pressure level

• Appears only while using the grip zoom rocker when the customized zoom speed is

selected (A 72).

1: [Grip Zoom Speed:

User]

Exposure bar (A 62)

• Only displayed when the gain, iris and shutter are all set to manual adjustment.

1: [Exposure Bar]

AE ±0.00 AE Shift (A 63) 1: [AE Shift]

ND 1/00, , ND filter and ND warning (A 60) 1: [ND Filter]

, F 0.0, closed Aperture value (A 61) 1: [Iris]

, 00.0 dB Gain value (A 58) 1: [Gain]

1/1000, 1/0000,

000.00 Hz, 000.00°

Shutter speed (A 55) 1: [Shutter]

Recording Video

Setting the Clip File Name for XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips

The camcorder allows you to change several settings that determine the file name of recorded XF-HEVC or XF-AVC

clips. Personalize the clip file name according to your preferences or organizational conventions to create files that

are easier to identify and organize.

The basic file name structure of XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips is as follows.

Setting the Components of the Clip File Name

To set the camcorder identifier (camera index)

1 Select [Camera Index].

> [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Camera Index]

2 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired camera index and then press SET twice.

To set the clip numbering method

1 Select [Clip Numbering].

> [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Clip Numbering]

2 Select [Reset] or [Continuous] and then press SET.

Options

[Reset]: The clip number will restart from 001 when you make the first recording after inserting a new

card.

[Continuous]: Clip numbers will start from the initial number set with [Clip Number] (following procedure) and

progress continuously even if you change the card.

Operating modes:

A 001C001HyymmddXX_CA NON_01

1 42 3 5 76 8

1 Camera index: One character (A to Z) that

identifies the camcorder used.

2 Reel number: 3 characters (001 to 999) that

identify the card used. The number is assigned

automatically but you can set the initial number.

After you insert a new card (just purchased or

initialized), the number advances by one when the

first recording is made.

3 Clip number: 4 characters (C001 to D999). The

clip number advances automatically with each

clip recorded (switching to D001 after C999), but

you can set the initial clip number and select the

clip numbering method.

4 Format: "H" for XF-HEVC clips, "_" for XF-AVC

clips.

5 Recording date (set automatically by the

camcorder).

6 Random component: 2 characters (numbers 0 to

9 and capital letters A to Z) that change randomly

with each clip.

7 User defined field: 5 characters (numbers 0 to 9

and capital letters A to Z) for any other

identification purposes.

8 Stream number: When recording on an SD or

SDHC card, a stream number (01 to 99) will be

added automatically. The stream number will

advance every time the video (stream) file within

the clip is split and recording continues on a

separate stream file.

Recording Video

To set the reel number or initial clip number

The initial clip number can only be set when [Clip Numbering] is set to [Continuous].

1 Select [Reel Number] or [Clip Number].

> [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Reel Number] or [Clip Number]

2 Select [Change] and then press SET.

• To reset the reel/clip number to [001], select [Reset] instead.

3 Push the joystick up/down to select the first digit of the reel/clip number and then press SET to move to the

next.

• Change the rest of the digits in the same way.

4 Select [Set] and then press SET.

To set the user-defined field

1 Select [User Defined].

> [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [User Defined]

2 Select [Change] and then press SET.

• To reset the user-defined field to [CANON], select [Reset] instead.

3 Push the joystick up/down to select the first character and then press SET to move to the next.

• Change the rest of the characters in the same way.

4 Select [Set] and then press SET.

MP4 Clip and Photo Numbering

MP4 clips and photos are automatically assigned consecutive numbers and stored on the SD card in folders.

You can select the numbering method to be used.

1 Select [MP4 Clip/Photo Numbering].

> [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [MP4 Clip/Photo Numbering]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Reset]: Recording numbers will restart from 100-0001 every time you insert a new card. If a card already

contains previous recordings, numbers will continue from the number following that of the last

MP4 clip/photo on the card.

[Continuous]: Recording numbers will continue from the number following that of the last MP4 clip/photo

recorded with the camcorder. This setting is the most convenient for managing files on a

computer. We recommend using the [Continuous] setting.

Recording Video

NOTES

• Each folder can contain up to 500 files. When that number is exceeded, a new folder is created automatically.

Using the Fan

The camcorder uses an internal cooling fan to reduce the camcorder’s internal heat. You can change the fan’s

operation mode.

1 Select [Fan].

> [

% System Setup] > [Fan]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Automatic]: The fan runs while the camcorder is not recording and is automatically turned off while the

camcorder is recording. However, if the internal temperature of the camcorder is too high (

appears in red), the fan will be activated automatically (in that case,

will appear next to the

icon). When the camcorder’s temperature has decreased sufficiently, the fan will be turned

off. Use this setting when you do not want the camcorder to pick up the fan’s operating sound.

[Always On]: The fan runs at all times.

IMPORTANT

• While the fan is running, the exhaust vent will emit warm air.

• Be careful not to obstruct in any way the fan’s air vents (A 11, 13, 16).

NOTES

• Depending on the ambient temperature and other shooting conditions, the fan may not turn off even if you set

its operating mode to [Automatic].

• In mode the fan runs at all times.

Operating modes:

Folder names

• An example folder name is “101_1103”. The first 3 digits indicate the folder number (from 100 to 999) and

the last 4 digits indicate the month and day when the folder was created. In the example, the folder

numbered 101 was created on November 3.

Recording numbers and filenames

• An example recording number is “101-0107”. The first 3 digits indicate the folder number where the

recording is stored and the last 4 digits indicate the consecutive number assigned to the MP4 clip/photo

(from 0001 to 9999).

• The recording number also indicates the name and location of the file on the card. For example, an MP4 clip

numbered 101-0107 that was recorded on November 3, is located in the “DCIM\101_1103” folder as the

file “MVI_0107.MP4”. The file that corresponds to a photo with the same number would be

“IMG_0107.jpg”.

Video Configuration: Video Format, System Frequency, Frame Rate, Resolution and Bit Rate

Video Configuration: Video Format, System Frequency, Frame

Rate, Resolution and Bit Rate

With the following procedures you can set the video configuration used when recording clips. Select the video

format, system frequency, frame rate, resolution (frame size) and color sampling settings that best match your

creative needs. Available options for some settings may change depending on previous selections for other

settings. See the tables following the procedures for a summary.

Selecting the Recording Format

1 Select [Rec Format].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Rec Format]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• The icon of the selected format will appear at the top right of the screen.

• Depending on the selected setting, the message [The following settings were changed] will appear. Review

the changes made automatically and press SET.

Selecting the System Frequency

1 Select [System Frequency].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [System Frequency]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• The camcorder will reset and restart in the selected mode.

Selecting the Frame Rate

1 Select [Frame Rate].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Frame Rate]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• The selected frame rate will appear at the top of the screen.

• Depending on the selected setting, the message [The following settings were changed] will appear. Review

the changes made automatically and press SET.

Operating modes:

Video Configuration: Video Format, System Frequency, Frame Rate, Resolution and Bit Rate

Selecting the Resolution and Color Sampling Settings

1 Select [Resolution/Color Sampling].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Resolution/Color Sampling]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• The selected color sampling setting and resolution will appear at the top right of the screen.

• Depending on the selected setting, the message [The following settings were changed] will appear. Review

the changes made automatically and press SET.

Selecting the Bit Rate

For XF-AVC clips, the bit rate is set to 45 Mbps and cannot be changed.

1 Select [Bit Rate].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Bit Rate]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Available video configuration settings (XF-HEVC clips)

Available video configuration settings (XF-AVC clips)

The camcorder uses a variable bit rate (VBR).

Using Long GOP, the image is compressed after analyzing also changes across a group of picture, resulting in better compression

rates (smaller data size).

Operating modes:

Resolution

Color

sampling

Bit rate

and

compression

System frequency/Frame rate

59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz

59.94i 59.94P 29.97P 23.98P 50.00i 50.00P 25.00P

3840x2160

YCbCr 4:2:2,

10 bit

110 Mbps,

160 Mbps

Long GOP

– Ü Ü Ü – Ü Ü

1920x1080

45 Mbps,

60 Mbps

Long GOP

Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü

Resolution

Color

sampling

Bit rate

and

compression

System frequency/Frame rate

59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz

59.94i 59.94P 29.97P 23.98P 50.00i 50.00P 25.00P

3840x2160

YCbCr 4:2:0,

8 bit

160 Mbps

Long GOP

– – Ü Ü – – Ü

1920x1080

45 Mbps

Long GOP

Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü

Video Configuration: Video Format, System Frequency, Frame Rate, Resolution and Bit Rate

Available video configurations (MP4 clips)

The camcorder uses a variable bit rate (VBR).

Using Long GOP, the image is compressed after analyzing also changes across a group of picture, resulting in better compression

rates (smaller data size).

When the camcorder's language is set to simplified Chinese, the resolution is automatically set to 1920x1080 and this setting is

not available. Conversely, when this resolution is selected, [ ] (simplified Chinese) will not appear as one of the camcorder

language options.

NOTES

• For details on the signal output from each terminal, refer to Video Output Configuration (A 145).

Resolution

Color

sampling

Bit rate

and

compression

System frequency/Frame rate

59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz

59.94i 59.94P 29.97P 23.98P 50.00i 50.00P 25.00P

1920x1080

YCbCr 4:2:0,

8 bit

35 Mbps

Long GOP

– Ü Ü Ü – Ü Ü

1280x720

8 Mbps

Long GOP

– Ü – – – – –

Changing Main Functions with the FUNC Button

You can adjust three main functions—shutter speed, white balance and gain—using the FUNC button (direct

setting mode).

This section will explain the basic operation of the direct setting mode. For specific details about the functions

refer to the each function’s section: shutter speed (A 55), white balance (A 67), gain (A 58).

Using the Direct Setting Mode

1Press the FUNC button.

• The onscreen display of the function to be adjusted will be

highlighted in orange.

• Press the FUNC button repeatedly or push the joystick left/

right to select the function you wish to adjust:

- White balance mode

- Color temperature value

- Color compensation (CC) value

-Gain value

- Shutter speed, angle or frequency

2Push the joystick up/down to select the desired value or

white balance mode and then press SET.

• The selected value will be set and the camcorder will exit the direct setting mode.

• The onscreen display of the selected function will return to normal.

• Depending on the function selected, additional adjustment may be possible or necessary before pressing

SET.

NOTES

• The camcorder will automatically end the direct setting mode in the following cases.

- If no operation was performed for more than 6 seconds.

- If the menu or a status screen was opened.

Operating modes:

Shutter Speed

Set the shutter speed based on the recording conditions. For example, you may want to set slower shutter

speeds in darker environments. The camcorder offers the following modes.

OFF: The camcorder uses a standard shutter speed based on

the frame rate. To turn off the shutter adjustment and use the

standard shutter speed, set the SHUTTER switch to OFF.

Automatic: The camcorder automatically adjusts the shutter

speed based on the picture’s brightness.

Speed: Allows you to set the shutter speed (in fractions of a

second). You can select the increment to use when adjusting

the shutter speed between 1/3-stop and 1/4-stop increments.

Angle: You can set the shutter angle to determine the shutter

speed.

Clear Scan: Set the frequency in order to record CRT computer

monitors without displaying black bands or flicker on the

screen.

Slow: You can set slower shutter speeds to obtain brighter recordings in places with insufficient lighting. This

mode is not available when slow motion recording is activated.

Changing the Shutter Speed Mode

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (A 164,

170).

Set the SHUTTER switch to ON and then slide the switch

toward SEL to change the shutter speed mode.

• Repeatedly pushing the switch toward SEL will change the

shutter speed mode in the following order: Automatic 

Speed  Angle  Clear scan  Slow.

Operating modes:

Shutter Speed

Available shutter speeds

The available shutter speeds vary depending on the system frequency and frame rate used.

When slow motion recording is activated, available values will vary depending on the shooting frame rate used.

The shutter increment depends on the menu settings. When > [v ! Camera Setup] > [Shutter Increment] is set to

[Normal], you can adjust the shutter speed in increments of 1/4 stop; when it is set to [Fine], in increments of 1/256 stop.

You can also select angle values equivalent to the following shutter speeds: 1/120, 1/100, 1/60, 1/50, 1/40, 3/100, 1/30 and 1/25.

Available angle values will vary depending on the frame rate used.

Not available when slow motion recording is activated.

NOTES

• You can use the > [

! Camera Setup] > [AE Response] setting to change how quickly the

exposure is adjusted when the shutter speed mode is set to automatic.

Shutter speed mode

System frequency/Frame rate

59.94 Hz 50.00 Hz

59.94i/59.94P 29.97P 23.98P 50.00i/50.00P 25.00P

OFF 1/60 1/30 1/24 1/50 1/25

Automatic

1/60 to 1/2000 1/30 to 1/2000 1/24 to 1/2000 1/50 to 1/2000 1/25 to 1/2000

Speed

1,2

Angle

1, 3

360.00°, 240.00°, 180.00°, 120.00°, 90.00°, 60.00°, 45.00°, 30.00°, 22.50°, 15.00°, 11.25°

Clear Scan

59.94 Hz to 250.38 Hz 29.97 Hz to 250.38 Hz 23.98 Hz to 250.38 Hz 50.00 Hz to 250.40 Hz 25.00 Hz to 250.40 Hz

Slow

1/4, 1/8, 1/15, 1/30 1/4, 1/8, 1/15 1/3, 1/6, 1/12 1/3, 1/6, 1/12, 1/25 1/3, 1/6, 1/12

Using Slow Shutter Mode

When recording in dark surroundings, you can obtain a brighter picture by using slow shutter mode. You can

also use this mode when you wish to add certain effects to your recordings, such as blurring the background

during panning shots or recording a moving subject with an afterimage trail.

• Image quality may not be as good as when using faster shutter speeds in brighter surroundings.

• Autofocus may not work well.

Shutter Speed

Changing the Shutter Speed Value

When the shutter speed mode is set to a mode other than OFF or automatic, you can set the shutter speed

manually as a speed value, angle or clear scan frequency.

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (A 164,

170).

1 To change the shutter speed increment for Speed mode, select [Shutter Increment].

> [

! Camera Setup] > [Shutter Increment]

2 Select [Normal] or [Fine] and then press SET.

• If you select [Fine], you can adjust the shutter speed in increments of 1/256 stop.

3 After closing the menu, select a shutter speed mode other than OFF or Automatic (A 55).

• The camera will enter direct setting mode with the shutter speed value highlighted in orange.

• Alternatively, you can press the FUNC button repeatedly to highlight the current shutter speed value without

changing the current shutter speed mode.

4Adjust the shutter speed, angle value or clear scan frequency using the direct setting mode.

• For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode (A 54).

• The selected shutter speed will appear at the bottom of the screen.

NOTES

• Closing down the aperture when recording under bright conditions may cause the picture to appear soft or out

of focus. To avoid the loss of sharpness due to diffraction, use a denser ND filter (A 60), a faster shutter

speed, or open up the aperture (A 61).

• When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the shutter speed mode is set to a mode other than OFF or

automatic, the exposure bar will appear at the bottom of the screen (A 62).

• When the camcorder is set to full auto mode (A 43) or you activate infrared recording (A 117), the shutter

speed mode will be set to automatic. If you activate both slow motion recording and infrared recording at the

same time, the shutter speed will be set to 1/120 (59.94 Hz recordings) or automatically within the range

1/120 – 1/100 (50.00 Hz recordings).

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can change the shutter

speed mode with the remote controller’s SHUTTER SELECT button and the shutter speed value with the

remote controller’s SHUTTER

buttons, regardless of the position of the camcorder's SHUTTER switch.

• If you set an assignable button to [Shutter] (A 119), you can press the button to enter the direct setting mode

with the shutter speed highlighted.

Flicker Reduction

You can perform the following procedure to have the camcorder automatically detect and reduce flicker.

1 Select [Flicker Reduction].

> [v'Camera Setup] > [Flicker Reduction]

2 Select [Automatic] and then press SET.

NOTES

• When recording under artificial light sources such as fluorescent, mercury or halogen lamps, the screen may

flicker depending on the shutter speed. You may be able to avoid flicker by setting the shutter speed mode to

Speed and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system: 1/50* or 1/100

for 50 Hz systems, 1/60 or 1/120 for 60 Hz systems.

* May not be available depending on the frame rate.

Gain

Depending on the shooting conditions, you may want to adjust the brightness of the image. You can do so by

changing the gain value to adjust the sensitivity of the sensor. The camcorder offers 3 gain levels (L/M/H) that

you can adjust in advance (gain value and increment) and select simply by changing the position of a switch. You

can also select automatic gain control and even set a limit for the maximum gain value used (AGC limit).

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (A 164,

170).

Available gain settings

* > [v"Camera Setup] > [Gain L]/[Gain M]/[Gain H] > [Mode] setting.

**The available range will vary depending on the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 126).

[Wide DR], [Canon Log 3]: 2.5 dB to 33.0 dB

[PQ]: –2.0 dB to 33.0 dB

[HLG]: –2.5 dB to 33.0 dB

Automatic Gain Control

Set the AGC switch to ON.

• The camcorder will adjust the gain automatically to obtain an

appropriate exposure.

• The gain value set automatically by the camcorder will

appear at the bottom of the screen with an icon next to it.

AGC Limit

When the camcorder is set to automatic gain control (AGC),

you can set a limit for the maximum gain value that can be set

automatically. When the camcorder is set to full auto mode

(A 43) or infrared recording is activated (A 117), the AGC

limit will not apply (it will be set to [Off/33 dB]).

1 Select [AGC Limit].

> [v"Camera Setup] > [AGC Limit]

2 Select the desired gain level and then press SET.

NOTES

• You can use the > [

! Camera Setup] > [AE Response] setting to change how quickly the

exposure is adjusted when the camcorder is set to automatic gain control (AGC).

Operating modes:

Gain mode* Available range

[Normal] (3-dB increments)

– 6.0 dB to 33.0 dB**

[Fine] (0.5-dB increments)

Gain

Selecting the Gain Level

You can set beforehand 3 gain levels and then select quickly which one to apply simply by changing the position

of the GAIN switch.

1 Set the AGC switch to OFF.

2 Set the GAIN switch to the position you want to adjust

(L, M or H).

• The gain value currently assigned to that position will

appear at the bottom the screen.

Changing the Gain Value

1 Select the gain level you want to adjust (A 59).

2Adjust the gain value using the direct setting mode.

• Press the FUNC button to enter the direct setting mode and press again as necessary to highlight the gain

value. Select the desired value and then press SET. For details refer to Using the Direct Setting Mode

(A 54).

• The selected gain value will appear at the bottom of the screen.

NOTES

• You can also use the settings under the > [v"Camera Setup] > [Gain L], [Gain M] and [Gain H]

submenus to set in advance the gain increment ([Mode]) and two separate gain values (one used for [Fine]

increment and one for [Normal] increment) for each of the gain level positions.

When you set a gain position's [Mode] setting to [Fine], you will be able to adjust the gain value in 0.5 dB

increments even when using the direct setting mode.

• If you set an assignable button to [Gain] (A 119), you can press the button to enter the direct setting mode

with the gain value highlighted.

• When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the shutter speed mode is set to a mode other than OFF or

automatic, the exposure bar will appear at the bottom of the screen (A 62).

• When high gain levels are set, the picture may flicker slightly. Additionally, uneven color, noise (white dots) and

vertical stripes and other artifacts are more likely to appear.

• When infrared recording is activated (A 117), the gain mode will be set to automatic gain control.

• You can use the > [v"Camera Setup] > [Shockless Gain] setting to make the change in the

image look smoother when you switch gain settings.

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the gain value

corresponding to the current position of the GAIN switch (L, M or H) with the remote controller’s ISO/GAIN

Í/Î buttons.

ND Filter

Using the ND filter allows you to open up the aperture to

obtain a shallower depth of field even when recording in

bright surroundings. You can also use the ND filter to avoid

the soft focus caused by diffraction when using small

apertures. You can select one of 3 density levels.

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser

Remote on a connected network device (A 164, 170).

Press the ND FILTER + or – button to select the desired ND filter setting.

• Repeatedly pressing the ND FILTER + button will change the ND filter setting in the following order: [ND 1/4] 

[ND 1/16]  [ND 1/64]  ND filter off (no onscreen display).

The ND FILTER – button cycles through the settings in reverse order.

• The selected ND filter setting will appear at the bottom of the screen.

NOTES

• About the ND warning:

In the following cases, if the ND filter setting is not appropriate, an ND warning icon will start flashing next to

the ND filter setting*.

- The gain value is too high

- The aperture is too closed

- The shutter speed is too fast

Change the ND filter setting by pressing the ND + button (when is flashing) or ND – button (when is

flashing) until the ND warning icon disappears to mitigate the effect of such conditions.

* When the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, the RC-V100's ND filter indicator will flash as

well.

• If you set an assignable button to [ND +] or [ND –] (A 119), you can press the button to change the ND filter

setting.

• Depending on the scene, the color may change when turning the ND filter on/off. Setting a custom white

balance (A 69) may be effective in such case.

• About changing the ND filter setting using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller:

- When the remote controller is connected to the camcorder, you can use the remote controller’s ND button in

the same way as the camcorder’s ND FILTER + button.

- ND filter indicators 1 to 3 will illuminate in orange when the ND filter is set to 1/4, 1/16 and 1/64, respectively.

Operating modes:

Aperture

You can affect the brightness of your recordings or change the depth of field by adjusting the aperture. For

example, use a small aperture value for a shallow depth of field that isolates the subject in focus and nicely blurs

the background. The camcorder offers 3 ways to adjust the aperture.

Automatic aperture: The camcorder adjusts the aperture automatically.

Push auto iris: Momentary automatic aperture. During manual aperture, press the PUSH AUTO IRIS button or

use Browser Remote (A 164, 170) to temporarily adjust the aperture automatically.

Manual aperture: Adjust the aperture value manually using the iris ring, or remotely, using Browser Remote on a

connected network device (A 164, 170).

Available aperture values

Available values depend on the zoom position (F2.8 to F11 at full wide angle; F4.5 to F11 at full telephoto). Aperture values

displayed on the screen are for reference only.

> [v!Camera Setup] > [Iris Limit].

Available only in manual aperture mode.

Automatic Aperture

Set the IRIS switch to A.

• The camcorder will adjust the aperture automatically to obtain

an appropriate exposure.

• The aperture value set automatically by the camcorder will

appear at the bottom of the screen with an icon next to it.

NOTES

• You can use the > [

! Camera Setup] >

[AE Response] setting to change how quickly the exposure is

adjusted when the camcorder is set to automatic aperture.

• Wen the camcorder is set to full auto mode, the aperture will be

adjusted automatically. When infrared recording is activated, it will be maintained open at the maximum

aperture.

Operating modes:

IRIS switch

(aperture mode)

Aperture value

Only when [Iris Limit]

is set to [Off]

A (automatic) F2.8, F3.2, F3.4, F3.7, F4.0, F4.4, F4.5, F4.8, F5.2, F5.6,

F6.2, F6.7, F7.3, F8.0, F8.7, F.9.5, F10, F11

F12, F14, F15, F16, F17, F19, F21, F22, F25, F27, closed

M (manual)

Aperture

Momentary Automatic Aperture - Push Auto Iris

During manual aperture, you can press the PUSH AUTO IRIS

button to have the camcorder temporarily take control and

automatically adjust the aperture for an appropriate exposure.

1 Set the IRIS switch to M.

2Press and hold the PUSH AUTO IRIS button.

• The camcorder will automatically adjust the aperture to obtain

an appropriate exposure. As long as you hold the button

pressed down,

will appear on the screen next to the

aperture value.

• When you release the button, automatic aperture mode will

end and the

icon will disappear. The selected aperture

value will appear at the bottom of the screen.

Manual Aperture

1 Set the IRIS switch to M.

2 Turn the iris ring to adjust the aperture.

• The aperture value displayed on the screen will change in

1/4-stop increments.

NOTES

• The aperture value set manually will not be saved when you switch to automatic aperture (with the exception

of full auto mode). Instead, the aperture value set automatically by the camcorder will be used when you

switch back to manual aperture control.

• If the ND filter is activated, the picture may become dark when you set a high aperture value. In such case,

press the ND FILTER – button and readjust the aperture.

The Exposure Bar

When the gain and aperture are set to manual and the shutter speed mode is

set to a mode other than OFF or automatic, the exposure bar will appear on the

screen.

The

on top of the exposure bar indicates optimal exposure without any shift

(AE±0); the scale markings indicate the deviation from optimal exposure in

1/2 EV increments. The indicator inside the exposure bar represents the current

exposure. When the difference between current and optimal exposure is larger than ±2 EV, the indicator will

flash at the edge of the exposure bar. Optimal exposure will change depending on the light metering mode

used.

Optimal exposure AE±0

Current exposure

Aperture

• You can use the > [v! Camera Setup] > [Iris Ring Direction] setting to change the direction of

the adjustment when you turn the iris ring.

• You can operate the iris ring even the camcorder's controls are locked (A 43).

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the aperture

with the remote controller’s IRIS dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to open up the aperture and left to

close the aperture.

You can also switch between automatic and manual aperture with the remote controller's AUTO IRIS button.

Iris Limit

By default, the iris limit is set to prevent the aperture from closing below the diffraction limit of the lens (F11).

1 Select [Iris Limit].

> [

! Camera Setup] > [Iris Limit]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[On]: The maximum aperture value is [F11], the diffraction limit of the lens.

[Off]: You can fully close the aperture ([closed]). Aperture values that exceed the diffraction limit will

appear in gray.

NOTES

• Using aperture values that exceed the lens's diffraction limit may affect the recorded image (for example,

causing diffraction blur). Using aperture values within the lens's diffraction limit (iris limit) is recommended.

Exposure Compensation - AE Shift

Use AE shift to darken or lighten the image when you want to compensate the exposure that was set

automatically (shutter, gain or aperture set to automatic mode or after using push auto iris to automatically set

the aperture). AE shift is not available when the camcorder is set to full auto mode (A 43) or you activate

infrared recording (A 117).

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (A 164,

170).

1 Select [AE Shift].

> [

! Camera Setup] > [AE Shift]

2 Select an AE shift level and then press SET.

• You can select one of 17 AE shift levels from –2.0 to +2.0.

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [AE Shift +] or [AE Shift –] (A 119), you can press the button to adjust the

AE shift level.

Aperture

Light Metering Mode

Select the light metering mode to match the recording conditions. Using the appropriate setting will ensure that

the camcorder obtains the most suitable exposure level when the shutter speed, gain and aperture are adjusted

automatically or when using push auto iris.

1 Select [Light Metering].

> [

! Camera Setup] > [Light Metering]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• The icon of the selected mode ( or , no icon for [Standard]) appears on the left of the screen.

Options

[Backlight]: Suitable when recording backlit scenes.

[Standard]:

Averages the light metered from the entire screen, giving more weight to the subject in the center.

[Spotlight]: Use this option when recording a scene in which only a certain part of the picture is lit, for

example, when the subject is lit by a spotlight.

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [Backlight] or [Spotlight] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the

respective light metering mode on and off.

Gamma Curve and Main Color Settings

The basic color management with this camcorder is determined by the main settings of the custom picture file:

gamma curve, color space and color matrix. You can select one of the preset color settings offered by the

camcorder or set each setting individually. For details about the custom picture file and settings, refer to Custom

Picture Settings (A 123).

Preset Color Settings

The camcorder offers the following preset color settings (combinations of gamma curve, color space and color

matrix). Alternatively, you can turn the presets off and set each of the main settings individually. You can even

adjust the detailed custom picture settings as necessary (A 127).

* In the > [/ ! Custom Picture] menu.

NOTES

• About the logarithmic gamma curve (Canon Log 3)

This gamma curve assumes the need for post-production processing. It was designed to make the most of

the imaging sensor characteristics in order to obtain impressive levels of dynamic range.

- In mode, you can apply a LUT to the LCD screen and viewfinder and to video output from the SDI

terminal or HDMI OUT terminal to use gamma curve settings more suitable for viewing on a monitor screen.

- There are also other LUTs available that can be applied for processing in post-production. For the latest

information on available LUTs, please visit your local Canon website.

1 Select [Select].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Select]

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can press the remote

controller’s CUSTOM PICT. button to open the [/ ! Custom Picture] menu.

2 Select the desired file and then press SET.

• Select one of the custom picture files saved in the camcorder (C1 to C20). To use the settings of a custom

picture file saved on a card, copy the file to the camcorder in advance (A 125).

• When you close the menu, the selected custom picture file’s settings will be applied.

• The icon of the [Gamma] setting in effect will appear on the left of the screen. If the detailed settings were

activated ( > [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Activate Other Settings] is set to [On]), will appear on

the left of the screen.

3 Select [Preset].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Preset]

Operating modes:

[Preset]* [Gamma]* [Color Space]* [Color Matrix]* Characteristics

[Normal1 : BT.709]

[Normal 1

(Standard)]

[BT.709 Gamut]

[Video]

These settings produce an image suitable for playback on TV

monitors.

[Normal1 : BT.2020] [BT.2020 Gamut]

[Wide DR : BT.709]

[Wide DR]

[BT.709 Gamut]

These settings produce an image with a wide dynamic range

suitable for playback on TV monitors.

[Wide DR : BT.2020] [BT.2020 Gamut]

[PQ : BT.2020] [PQ]

[BT.2020 Gamut]

These settings use a high dynamic range gamma curve

compliant with the PQ standard defined by ITU-R BT.2100.

[HLG : BT.2020] [HLG]

These settings use a high dynamic range gamma curve

compliant with the HLG standard defined by ITU-R BT.2100.

[Canon Log 3 : BT.2020]

[Canon Log 3]

[BT.2020 Gamut]

[Neutral]

These settings use Canon Log 3 gamma and presume a

workflow that includes post-production processing.

[Canon Log 3 : BT.709] [BT.709 Gamut]

Gamma Curve and Main Color Settings

4 Select the desired setting and then press SET.

• To select the gamma curve, color space or color matrix individually, select [Off] and continue the procedure

with step 5. To use one of the preset settings as is, the rest of the procedure is not necessary.

5 Select [Gamma].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Gamma]

6 Select the desired gamma curve (A 126) and then press SET.

• Repeat steps 5 and 6, selecting [Color Space] to select the color space, and/or [Color Matrix] to select the

color matrix in the same way.

White Balance

The camcorder uses an electronic white balance process to calibrate the picture and produce accurate colors

under different lighting conditions. There are 4 methods of setting the white balance.

You can also perform this function remotely using Browser Remote on a connected network device (A 164,

169).

Auto white balance (AWB): The camcorder automatically adjusts the white balance to the optimal level.

Preset white balance: Set the white balance to

(daylight) or

(tungsten lamp). You can further adjust the

color temperature (K) value and the color compensation (CC) value, which adjusts the color along the green/

magenta gradation.

Color temperature: Allows you to set the color temperature between 2,000 K and 15,000 K, and further adjust

the color compensation (CC) value.

Custom white balance: You can use a gray card or white object with no pattern to establish the white balance

and set it to one of two custom white balance positions,

A or

When recording under fluorescent lights, we recommend using auto white balance or setting a custom white

balance.

Available white balance modes by WHITE BAL. switch position

NOTES

• When the camcorder is set to full auto mode, the white balance will be adjusted automatically (AWB). When

infrared recording is activated, the white balance cannot be adjusted.

• The [White Balance] and [Color Matrix Tuning] settings in the custom picture file (A 129) take precedence

over the white balance set with these procedures.

• You can use the > [

" Camera Setup] > [Shockless WB] setting to make the change in the

image look smoother when you change white balance settings.

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the white

balance with the remote controller’s AWB button, A button, B button, PRESET button and

button.

• The color temperatures displayed on the screen are approximate. Use them only as a reference.

Operating modes:

White balance mode

WHITE BAL. switch position

B A PRESET

Preset white balance – – Ü

Color temperature – – Ü

Custom white balance Ü Ü –

White Balance

Auto White Balance (AWB)

The camcorder constantly adjusts the white balance automatically to achieve an appropriate level. The

camcorder will adjust the white balance if the light source changes.

Set the AWB switch to ON.

• The camcorder will adjust the white balance automatically.

• The color temperature and CC value set automatically by the

camcorder will appear at the bottom of the screen with an

icon next to it.

NOTES

• Custom white balance may provide better results in the

following cases:

- Changing lighting conditions

-Close-ups

- Subjects in a single color (sky, sea or forest)

- Under mercury lamps and certain types of fluorescent and LED lights

• You can use the > [

" Camera Setup] > [AWB Response] setting to change how quickly the

white balance changes in auto white balance (AWB) mode.

• If you set an assignable button to [AWB Lock] (A 119), you can press the button to lock the current white

balance settings set automatically by the camcorder. To cancel the lock, press the button again (resume auto

white balance mode) or select a different white balance setting.

Color Temperature/Preset White Balance

1 Set the AWB switch to OFF and the WHITE BAL. switch

to PRESET.

2Press the FUNC button to enter the direct setting mode

and press again as necessary to highlight the white

balance mode.

3Push the joystick up/down to select the

icon

(preset white balance), or the

icon (color

temperature setting).

• Alternatively, you can also use the >

[v"Camera Setup] > [White Balance: PRESET]

setting to select in advance the white balance mode

assigned to the WHITE BAL. switch's PRESET position.

4Press SET to apply the stored preset white balance/

color temperature settings.

• The selected color temperature and CC value will appear at the bottom of the screen next to the white

balance mode icon.

• If necessary, you can adjust the color temperature and CC value with the following procedure.

White Balance

Adjusting White Balance Settings

When the white balance mode is set to ¼, É (preset white balance) or È (color temperature), you can change

the color temperature and CC value (color compensation along the green/magenta gradation).

1 Select one of the white balance modes that can be adjusted.

Adjustment ranges

2Press the

button.

• The camera will enter direct setting mode with the color temperature highlighted in orange. To adjust the CC

value, push the joystick right.

• Alternatively, you can press the FUNC button repeatedly to select the color temperature or CC value.

3Push the joystick up/down to change the value and then press SET.

Custom White Balance

You can store two custom white balance settings in the

camcorder for recording under more difficult lighting

conditions.

1 Set the AWB switch to OFF and the WHITE BAL.

switch to A or B.

• To apply the stored custom white balance setting as

is, press SET. The rest of the procedure is not

necessary. To set a new custom white balance,

continue the procedure with step 2.

2 Point the camcorder at a gray card or white object

so that it fills the whole screen.

• Use the same lighting conditions you plan to use

when recording.

3Press the

button.

•The

A or

B icon will flash quickly.

• Make sure the gray card or white object fills the screen until the procedure is completed.

• Once the icon stops flashing, the procedure is completed. The setting is retained even if you turn off the

camcorder.

• The color temperature and CC value registered by the camcorder will appear at the bottom of the screen

next to the

A or

B icon.

NOTES

• Readjust the custom white balance if the light source changes.

• Very rarely and depending on the light source,

may keep flashing (it will change to a slow flashing). The

result will still be better than with auto white balance.

• After the camcorder registers a custom white balance, the color temperature or CC value may appear in gray.

This indicates that the value registered exceeds the range of values that can be displayed but the white

balance is correctly calibrated and you can continue shooting.

White balance mode

Adjustment range

Color temperature (K) Color compensation (CC) value

(daylight) 4,300 K to 8,000 K

–5 to +5

(tungsten lamp) 2,700 K to 3,700 K

(color temperature) 2,000 K to 15,000 K –20 to +20

Zooming

You can operate the zoom (optical zoom 15x) using the zoom rocker on the grip or the one on the handle. You

can also use the zoom ring on the lens, the zoom buttons on the supplied wireless controller or Browser Remote

on a connected network device (A 164, 172).

In addition to the optical zoom, you can use the digital zoom* to extend the zoom range to 300x, or digital tele-

converter** function to increase the focal length by a factor of approximately 1.5, 3 or 6.

* In the range beyond the optical zoom (15x to 300x), the image is processed digitally, affecting image quality.

** The image is processed digitally throughout the zoom range, affecting image quality.

Selecting the Zoom Mode

1 Select [Digital Zoom].

> [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Tele-converter 6.0x], [Tele-converter 3.0x], [Tele-converter 1.5x]:

The camcorder processes the image digitally to multiply the focal length by a factor of 6, 3 or

1.5, respectively.

[Digital 300x]: The camcorder uses the optical zoom up to 15x and processes the image digitally after that, up

to a magnification ratio of 300x.

[Advanced 30x]:

The camcorder can zoom up to 30x combining the optical zoom and additional processing.

[Off]: The camcorder uses only the optical zoom up to 15x.

When you operate the zoom, a zoom indicator* will appear on the screen that

shows the approximate zoom position. The white area of the zoom bar indicates

the optical zoom range and the blue area** indicates the digital zoom range.

* You can use the > [¢ % Monitoring Setup] > [Custom Display 1]> [Zoom Indicator]

setting to set the zoom indicator to a numerical display.

** Only when [Digital 300x] is selected.

NOTES

• You can attach the TL-U58 Tele-converter or WA-U58 Wide Attachment (both optional) to the camcorder

(A 75). You can even use the TL-U58 in combination with the digital zoom and digital tele-converter

functions.

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, if [Digital Zoom] is set to one of

the digital tele-converter options, the remote controller’s EXTENDER indicator will light up.

• When > [v'Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to [WA-U58], [Digital 300x] and the

digital tele-converter options are not available.

• [Advanced 30x] is not available in the following cases.

- When slow motion recording is activated.

- When the resolution is set to 3840x2160.

Operating modes:

Zooming

Selecting the Zoom Controls

Set the ZOOM switch to the desired position to select the

physical controls you want to use to operate the zoom.

Options

RING: Turn the zoom ring to zoom.

ROCKER (other controls):

Use the grip zoom rocker, handle zoom rocker,

supplied wireless controller or a remote

controller connected to one of the camcorder's

REMOTE terminals to zoom.

Using the Zoom Ring

The zoom speed depends on how fast you turn the zoom ring.

1 Set the ZOOM switch to RING.

2 Turn the zoom ring to zoom.

• The zoom ratio is determined by the position of the zoom

ring.

NOTES

• When you change the ZOOM switch's position from ROCKER

to RING, the camcorder will zoom automatically to the focal

length indicated by the current position of the zoom ring.

• You can operate the zoom ring even when the camcorder's

controls are locked (A 43).

Using the Grip Zoom Rocker

You can set the zoom speed of the grip zoom rocker using the menu.

With the [User Setting] you can even customize a zoom speed pattern

depending on how much you press on the zoom rocker (A 72).

1 Set the ZOOM switch to ROCKER.

2 Move the zoom rocker toward T to zoom out (wide-angle) and

toward S to zoom in (telephoto).

Zooming

Grip zoom rocker: Approximate zoom speeds (time required to zoom end-to-end)

* When the zoom speed is too fast, it will be more difficult to focus while zooming.

Setting the Zoom Speed

1 To set the overall speed level, select [Zoom Speed Level].

> [v%Camera Setup] > [Zoom Speed Level]

2 Select [Low], [Normal] or [High] and then press SET.

• When [Zoom Speed Level] is set to [High], the camcorder may pick up and record lens operation sounds.

3 Select [Grip Zoom Speed].

> [v&Camera Setup] > [Grip Zoom Speed]

4 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• If you selected [Constant] or [User Setting], select the constant speed or customize the zoom speed pattern

with the following procedures.

Options

[Constant]: Select one of 16 constant zoom speeds.

[Variable]: Variable zoom speed (zoom faster the harder you press).

[User Setting]: You can customize up to 3 zoom speed patterns, setting the desired zoom speed for 5

individual pressure levels. You can, for example, set a pattern where the grip zoom rocker only

starts to react beyond a certain pressure level to avoid accidental zoom operations.

To select the constant speed level

1 Select [Constant Speed].

> [v&Camera Setup] > [Constant Speed]

2 Select the desired speed (1 to 16) and then press SET.

To c u stomize the [User Setting] zoom speed pattern

1 Select [Users Settings].

[v&Camera Setup] > [Users Settings]

2 Push the joystick left/right to select the zoom speed pattern ([User 1] to [User 3]) you want to use.

• To use the preset zoom speed pattern as is, select [OK] and then press SET. The rest of the procedure is not

necessary. Otherwise, continue the procedure to customize the zoom speed pattern.

3 Select [Edit] and then press SET.

4 Push the joystick up/down to select the desired speed (0 = disabled, 1 to 16) and then press SET.

• Change the speed for the rest of the pressure levels in the same way.

5 Select [Set] and then press SET.

• To reset the zoom speed pattern to its preset values, select [Reset] instead.

NOTES

• When > [v%Camera Setup] > [High-Speed Zoom] is set to [On] and the grip rocker's zoom

speed is set to [Variable], when you operate the zoom in record standby mode, the actual zoom speed will be

as if the overall speed level were set to [High]. While recording, the zoom speed level will follow the speed level

set in the menu.

[v&Camera Setup] > [v%Camera Setup] > [Zoom Speed Level]

[Grip Zoom Speed] [Constant Speed] [Low] [Normal] [High]

[Constant]

[1] (slowest) 4 min 38 sec 2 min 1 min

[16] (fastest) 4.2 sec 2.6 sec 0.9 sec*

[Variable] – 4.2 sec – 4 min 38 sec 2.6 sec – 2 min 1 sec* – 1 min

Zooming

Using the Handle Zoom Rocker

You can set the zoom speed of the handle zoom rocker using

the ZOOM SPEED switch and the menu.

1 Set the ZOOM switch to ROCKER.

2 Move the zoom rocker toward

T to zoom out (wide-

angle) and toward

S to zoom in (telephoto).

Handle zoom rocker: Approximate zoom speeds (time required to zoom end-to-end)

* When the zoom speed is too fast, it will be more difficult to focus while zooming.

Setting the Zoom Speed

1 Select the overall speed level (steps 1-2, A 72).

2 Select [Handle Zoom Speed H] or [Handle Zoom Speed L].

> [v%Camera Setup] > [Handle Zoom Speed H] or [Handle Zoom Speed L]

• You can set the zoom speed independently for each of the positions of the ZOOM SPEED switch.

3 Select the desired speed and then press SET.

4 Set the ZOOM SPEED switch to H or L.

• You can set the ZOOM SPEED switch to OFF to disable the zoom rocker on the handle.

[v%Camera Setup] >

[Handle Zoom Speed H] / [Handle Zoom Speed L]

[v%Camera Setup] > [Zoom Speed Level]

[Low] [Normal] [High]

[1] (slowest) 4 min 38 sec 2 min 1 min

[16] (fastest) 4.2 sec 2.6 sec 0.9 sec*

Zooming

Using the Supplied Wireless Controller or an

Optional Remote Controller

Set the ZOOM switch to ROCKER to operate the zoom

remotely. The zoom speeds when using the supplied wireless

controller, the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or a

commercially available remote control connected to the

REMOTE terminal are different. When using the supplied

wireless controller, you must press the record enable button

and T or W button simultaneously to zoom.

Zoom speeds for remote operation

Supplied wireless controller: Approximate zoom speeds

(time required to zoom end-to-end)

* When the zoom speed is too fast, it will be more difficult to focus while zooming.

Setting the Zoom Speed of the Supplied Wireless Controller

1 Select the overall speed level (steps 1-2, A 72).

2 Select [WL-D6000 Zoom Speed].

> [v%Camera Setup] > [WL-D6000 Zoom Speed]

3 Select the desired speed and then press SET.

NOTES

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can zoom with the remote

controller’s ZOOM dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to zoom in (T) and left to zoom out (W).

Accessory Zoom speed

Wireless controller (supplied) Constant zoom speed. See the following table.

RC-V100 Remote Controller (optional)

Variable speed: The greater the angle at which the RC-V100’s ZOOM dial is rotated from the center,

the faster the zoom.

Commercially available remote controls

If the remote control does not support variable zoom: Constant zoom speed.

If the remote control supports variable zoom: Variable zoom according to the remote control's

settings.

Browser Remote (A 172) Fastest constant zoom speed. See the values under [16] in the following table.

[v%Camera Setup] >

[WL-D6000 Zoom Speed]

[v%Camera Setup] > [Zoom Speed Level]

[Low] [Normal] [High]

[1] (slowest) 4 min 38 sec 2 min 1 min

[16] (fastest) 4.2 sec 2.6 sec 0.9 sec*

Using Optional Conversion Lenses

You can use the following optional conversion lenses with this camcorder. Before you attach a conversion lens,

perform the procedure below to optimize the autofocus and minimum object distance for the particular

accessory.

1 Select [Conversion Lens].

> [v'Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens]

2 Select [TL-U58] or [WA-U58] and then press SET.

• The image stabilization method, minimum focusing distance and the approximate distance to the subject

displayed on the screen will change depending on the conversion lens selected.

• Select [Off] if you do not intend to use a conversion lens.

NOTES

• Vignetting may occur when taking wide angle shots with the optional TL-U58 Tele-converter.

Operating modes:

Optional Conversion Lens Focal Length Factor Minimum Focusing Distance

TL-U58 Tele-converter Approx. 1.5x Approx. 130 cm (4.3 ft.) throughout the zoom range

WA-U58 Wide Attachment Approx. 0.8x Approx. 60 cm (2.0 ft.) throughout the zoom range

Adjusting the Focus

The camcorder offers the following ways to focus and incorporates Dual Pixel CMOS AF technology for

advanced autofocus performance. You can also adjust the focus remotely using Browser Remote on a

connected network device (A 164, 171).

Manual focus: Turn the focus ring on the lens to adjust the focus. The camcorder offers several focus assistance

functions (A 77) to help you focus more accurately when using the manual focus.

Push AF: While using manual focus, or autofocus at slower adjustment speeds, you can have the camcorder

focus automatically at the highest possible speed ([AF Speed] and [AF Response] both set to [High]) as long as

you hold the PUSH AF button pressed down.

AF-boosted MF: Focus manually most of the way and let the camcorder finish focusing automatically.

Continuous AF: The camcorder keeps focusing automatically at all times.

Face AF: The camcorder automatically detects a person’s face, focuses on it and can track it if that person

moves.

Tracking: After you select a subject, the camcorder keeps focusing it and tracks the subject if it moves.

Manual Focus

Focus manually using the focus ring on the lens.

1 Set the FOCUS switch to M.

• A appears on the left of the screen.

2 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

• Focusing speed will depend on how fast you turn the ring.

NOTES

• You can use the focus ring to adjust the focus while you are

operating the zoom. If the camcorder was initially in

autofocus mode, it will return to autofocus mode after you

adjust the focus manually.

• You can change the direction of the adjustment and the

sensitivity of the response of the focus ring using the

> [v$Camera Setup] > [Focus Ring Direction] and

[Focus Ring Response] settings.

• If you operate the zoom after focusing, the focus on the subject may be lost.

• If you focus manually and then leave the camcorder with the power turned on, the focus on the subject may

be lost after a while. This possible slight shift in focus is a result of the internal temperature rising in the

camcorder and lens. Check the focus before resuming shooting.

• When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can adjust the focus with

the remote controller’s FOCUS dial. At default settings, turn the dial right to focus farther and left to focus

nearer.

• You can operate the focus ring even when the camcorder's controls are locked (A 43).

Operating modes:

Adjusting the Focus

Using the Focus Assistance Functions

In order to focus more accurately, you can use the following focus assistance functions: Dual Pixel Focus Guide,

an onscreen guide that shows you if the picture is in focus; peaking, which creates a clearer contrast by

emphasizing the outlines of the subject; and magnification, which enlarges the image on the screen. You can use

peaking and the focus guide or peaking and magnification simultaneously for greater effect.

Dual Pixel Focus Guide

The focus guide gives you an intuitive visual indication of the current focus distance and the direction and

amount of adjustment necessary to bring the picture into full focus. When used in combination with face

detection (A 81), the guide will focus on the vicinity of the eyes of the person detected as the main subject.

1 Select [Focus Guide].

> [

! Assistance Functions] > [Focus Guide]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

3 If necessary, move the focus guide frame using the joystick or by touching the point where you want to focus

on the LCD screen.

• Press the CANCEL button to return the focus guide to the center of the screen.

NOTES

• When the focus guide frame turns green, the subject is correctly focused.

• When the aperture is adjusted automatically, it may take a moment until the focus guide frame's response

stabilizes after operating the zoom.

• With subjects or in situations where autofocus may not work well (A 80), the focus guide may not work

correctly.

• The Dual Pixel Focus Guide function cannot be used in the following cases:

- While the focus is being adjusted automatically using AF-boosted MF or continuous AF.

- When you close the aperture beyond F11.

-When > [v'Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to an option other than [Off].

-When > [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Tele-converter 6.0x] or [Tele-converter

3.0x], or to [Digital 300x] and the zoom ratio is in the digital zoom range.

- While the color bars are displayed.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 126) is set to [PQ] or [HLG].

- When infrared recording is activated.

• When the Dual Pixel Focus Guide function is used together with face detection or tracking, the focus guide

may not focus the main subject’s eyes correctly, depending on the direction in which the face is turned.

• If you set an assignable button to [Focus Guide] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the focus guide

function on and off.

In focus

(in green)

Focus farther

(large adjustment)

Focus farther

(small adjustment)

Focus closer

(small adjustment)

Focus closer

(large adjustment)

Cannot determine

adjustment

Adjusting the Focus

Peaking

The camcorder offers two peaking levels.

1 Press the PEAKING button.

•The peaking icon (

) appears on the left of the

screen and the outlines in the image will be emphasized,

depending on the focus.

• Press the button again to turn off peaking.

2 To select the peaking level, select [Peaking].

> [

" Assistance Functions] > [Peaking]

3 Select the desired level and then press SET.

Magnification

1 Press the MAGN. button.

•

appears on the left of the screen and the center of

the screen* is magnified 2 or 4 times.

• The orange frame displayed at the top right of the screen

(magnification frame) shows the approximate part of the

image shown magnified.

• Press SET to switch back and forth between 2x and 4x

magnification.

2 If necessary, use the joystick to move around the

magnification frame and check other parts of the image.

• You can also drag your finger across the screen to move

the frame.

• Press the CANCEL button to return the magnification

frame to the center position.

• Press the MAGN. button again to cancel the magnification.

* If one of the AF frames or a face detection frame is displayed on the screen, the area around the active frame will be magnified

instead.

NOTES

• About Peaking/Magnification:

- You can use the > [

" Assistance Functions] > [Peaking 1] and [Peaking 2] settings to set the

color, gain and frequency of the two peaking levels independently of each other.

- You can use the > [

" Assistance Functions] > [Peaking: LCD], [Peaking: VF], [Peaking: SDI]

and [Peaking: HDMI] settings to turn the peaking function on and off separately on the LCD screen,

viewfinder and external monitors connected to the respective terminals.

Similarly, you can use the > [

! Assistance Functions] > [Magn.: VF+LCD] and [Magn.: SDI/

HDMI] settings to turn the magnification function on and off on both the LCD screen and viewfinder and on

all external monitors, respectively.

- You can also use the > [

" Assistance Functions] > [B&W during Peaking] or >

[

! Assistance Functions] > [B&W during Magn.] setting to switch the camcorder's image to black &

white while using the respective assistance function.

- The assistance functions will not affect your recordings.

Adjusting the Focus

Push AF

Press and hold the PUSH AF button.

The camcorder will focus automatically using the highest AF

speed and AF response as long as you hold the PUSH AF

button pressed down.

NOTES

• The focus will be locked in the following cases.

-When > [

$ Camera Setup] > [Face AF] is

set to [Face Only] and no face is detected.

-When > [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Mode] is

set to [AF-Boosted MF] and the focus is the manual

adjustment range.

• When the AF mode cannot be selected (A 80), Push AF (autofocus at the highest speed) is not available

either.

AF-Boosted MF

In this focus mode, you can focus manually most of the way

and let the camcorder finish focusing automatically. This is very

convenient when you want to make certain that your 4K

recordings are in sharp focus.

Additionally, with this mode, if the camcorder cannot evaluate

how to adjust the focus, it will not perform unreliable focus

adjustments. This results in an overall more stable focusing

operation than with continuous AF.

1 Set the FOCUS switch to A.

• @ appears on the left of the screen.

2 Set [AF Frame] to a setting other than [Automatic]

(steps 1-2, A 81).

3 Select [AF Mode].

> [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Mode]

4 Select [AF-Boosted MF] and then press SET.

• When the focus is in the manual adjustment range, the focus frame will appear in yellow.

5 If necessary, change the size and position of the AF frame (A 81).

6 Turn the focus ring to adjust the focus.

• Focus manually to bring the subject closer into focus. When the focus enters the automatic adjustment

range, the focus frame will turn white and the camcorder will then finish focusing automatically.

• While the focus stays within the automatic adjustment range, the camcorder will keep the subject in focus

automatically.

Adjusting the Focus

Continuous AF

By default, the camcorder will focus automatically on a subject

at the center of the screen. If the AF frame size has been

changed to a setting other than [Automatic] (A 81), the

camcorder will focus automatically on a subject inside the AF

frame that appears on the screen.

1 Set the FOCUS switch to A.

• @ appears on the left of the screen.

•If > [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Frame] is set

to [Automatic], the rest of the procedure is not necessary. If

you wish to display an AF frame to control where to focus,

continue with step 2.

2 Set [AF Frame] to a setting other than [Automatic]

(steps 1-2, A 81).

3 Select [AF Mode].

> [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Mode]

4 Select [Continuous] and then press SET.

• A white AF frame will appear on the screen. If necessary, change the size and position of the AF frame

(A 81).

• When face detection is activated, a white detection frame will appear around the face of the person who has

been determined to be the main subject.

NOTES

About the autofocus (AF) functions:

• The point where the camcorder focuses may change slightly depending on shooting conditions, such as

subject, brightness and zoom position. Check the focus before resuming shooting.

• When you close the aperture beyond F11, the camcorder will focus automatically using continuous AF.

• Autofocus may take longer when the frame rate set in the video configuration is 29.97P, 25.00P or 23.98P.

• You can change some aspects of the autofocus function with the following settings.

- > [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Speed] to set the AF speed (the speed at which the focus is

adjusted).

- > [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Response] to set the responsiveness of the autofocus function.

- When the AF mode cannot be selected (see following point), the [AF Speed] and [AF Response] settings

cannot be selected either.

• The AF mode cannot be selected in the following cases.

- When > [v'Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to a setting other than [Off].

- When > [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Tele-converter 6.0x] or

[Tele-converter 3.0x].

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 126) is set to [PQ] or [HLG].

- When infrared recording is activated.

• Autofocus may not work well on the following subjects or in the following cases. In such case, focus manually.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 126) is set to [Canon Log 3] or [Wide DR].

- When using small apertures.

- When subjects at different distances appear inside the AF frame.

- Reflective surfaces

- Subjects with low contrast or without vertical lines

- Fast moving subjects

- Through dirty or wet windows

-Night scenes

- Subjects with a repetitive pattern

Adjusting the Focus

Changing the AF Frame Size and Position

By default, when autofocus is used, the camcorder focuses on a subject at the center of the screen and no AF

frame is displayed. You can select to display an AF frame and change its size and position to focus on a specific

area or subject.

However, when the face detection or tracking function is activated, the AF frame's size and position will change

automatically according to the subject being tracked.

1 Select [AF Frame].

> [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Frame]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

3If you selected [Large] or [Small], select [AF Frame Position].

> [

# Camera Setup] > [AF Frame Position]

4 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options for [AF Frame]

[Automatic]: No AF frame is displayed. The camcorder focuses automatically on a subject at the center of the

screen.

[Large], [Small]: An AF frame is displayed. You can move the AF frame within 80% of the screen area and select

its size according to the subject you want to focus.

Options for [AF Frame Position]

[Selectable]: You can move the AF frame using the joystick or by touching the LCD screen. Press the

CANCEL button to return the frame to the center of the screen.

[Center Frame]: A fixed AF frame appears at the center of the screen.

NOTES

• In the following cases you will not be able to change the AF frame's size or position.

-When > [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Tele-converter 6.0x] or

[Tele-converter 3.0x].

-When > [v'Camera Setup] > [Conversion Lens] is set to an option other than [Off].

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file (A 126) is set to [PQ] or [HLG].

- While the color bars are displayed.

- When infrared recording is activated.

Face Detection

When the face detection function is activated, the camcorder will detect people’s faces. When there are a

number of people in the picture, one person will be determined to be the main subject but you have the option to

select a different person as the main subject. The camcorder will keep tracking the main subject even when it

moves.

You can use face detection with one of the autofocus functions to let the camcorder focus on the main subject

automatically (Face AF). You can also combine face detection with the Dual Pixel Focus Guide function (A 77)

to help you focus on the main subject manually.

1 Select [Face Det. & Tracking].

> [

$ Camera Setup] > [Face Det. & Tracking]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

3 Select [Face AF].

> [

$ Camera Setup] > [Face AF]

Adjusting the Focus

4 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• (face priority) or (face-only AF) appears on the left of the screen.

5 Point the camcorder at the subject.

• All detected faces will have a face detection frame. The main subject will be indicated with a face detection

frame with small arrows (white in AF mode, gray in MF mode).

• During continuous AF, the camcorder will keep focusing on the main subject’s face.

• If you use face detection together with the tracking function (A 83), the camcorder will be able to track the

selected main subject more reliably.

• Push the joystick left/right to select a different person as the main subject. You can also touch another

person on the LCD screen to use the tracking function (A 83). This is better if you want to track a subject

when it is difficult to keep seeing their face. When you touch a subject on the LCD, the face detection frame

will change to a white double frame £ (tracking frame).

Options

[Face Priority]: When there is no face detected, the camcorder focuses automatically according to the AF mode

currently selected.

[Face Only]: When there is no face detected, the camcorder locks the focus.

Face AF operation by AF mode

NOTES

• In certain cases, faces may not be detected correctly. Typical examples include:

- Faces extremely small, large, dark or bright in relation to the overall picture.

- Faces that are turned to the side, at a diagonal, partially hidden or upside-down.

• Face detection cannot be used in the following cases:

- When the shutter speed used is slower than 1/30 (59.94 Hz recordings)* or 1/25 (50.00 Hz recordings).

* Slower than 1/24 when the frame rate is set to 23.98P.

- When slow motion recording is activated.

- When > [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Digital 300x] and the zoom ratio

exceeds 60x.

- When > [v%Camera Setup] > [Digital Zoom] is set to [Tele-converter 6.0x].

- When infrared recording is activated.

• The camcorder may mistakenly detect the faces of non-human subjects. In such case, turn face detection off.

• If you set an assignable button to [Face Det. and Tracking] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the

function on and off. If you set an assignable button to [Face AF], you can press the button to toggle between

the face detection options.

[

# Camera Setup] >

[AF Mode] and focus operation

[

$ Camera Setup] > [Face AF]

[Face Priority] [Face Only]

Face detected No face detected Face detected No face detected

[Continuous] (autofocus),

[AF-Boosted MF] within the automatic adjustment range

Focus on the

detected face

Focus on the

subject inside

the AF frame

Focus on the

detected face

Manual focus

[AF-Boosted MF] within the manual adjustment range

(yellow AF frame)

Manual focus

Adjusting the Focus

Tracking a Specific Subject

You can have the camcorder track other moving subjects that are not faces and also combine the tracking

function with one of the autofocus functions to let the camcorder focus on the desired subject automatically.

When no AF Frame is Displayed

When [AF Frame] is set to [Automatic] (A 81), you can simply use the touch screen to start tracking a subject.

Touch the desired subject on the LCD screen to start tracking it.

• A white double frame £ (tracking frame) will appear around the selected subject. The camcorder will track the

subject as it moves.

• Press the CANCEL button to remove the frame and cancel the tracking.

When an AF Frame is Displayed

When [AF Frame] is set to [Large] or [Small] (A 81), to use the tracking function, you will need to set an

assignable button to [Tracking] in advance.

1 Set an assignable button to [Tracking] (A 119).

2Press the assignable button.

•If > [v$Camera Setup] > [Face AF] is set to [Face Only], a double frame £ (tracking frame)

will appear around the selected main subject and the camcorder will track it as it moves. The rest of the

procedure is not necessary.

If > [v$Camera Setup] > [Face AF] is set to [Face Priority], the subject selection mark

will

appear on the screen. Continue with step 3.

• Press the assignable button again or the CANCEL button to exit the subject selection screen.

3 Select the subject you want to track.

• Touch the desired subject on the LCD screen to start tracking it. You can also push the joystick up/down/

left/right or touch the desired subject on the LCD screen to place the center of the

mark on the desired

subject and then press SET.

• If the tracking failed, the

mark will turn red momentarily. Select the subject again.

4 The

mark changes to a white double frame £ (tracking frame) and the camcorder will start

tracking the selected subject.

• During continuous AF, the camcorder will keep focusing on the selected subject.

• Press SET or press the assignable button to return to the subject selection screen and select a different

subject, or press the CANCEL button to end the tracking function and return the camcorder to the focus

mode that was used previously.

NOTES

• The camcorder may start tracking the incorrect subject if there is another subject in the picture with similar

color/pattern characteristics. In that case, press SET to return to the selection screen and select the desired

subject again.

• Tracking cannot be used when face detection cannot be used (A 82).

Adjusting the Focus

Focus Limit and Macro Shooting

By default, the camcorder’s focus range allows macro shooting. You can activate the focus limit to restrict the

focus range. The focus range (1 cm (0.39 in.; at full wide-angle) to ) will be limited to 60 cm (2 ft.) to

(throughout the entire zoom range).

1 Select [Focus Limit].

> [v$Camera Setup] > [Focus Limit]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [Focus Limit] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the focus limit on

and off.

Image Stabilization

Use the image stabilizer to compensate for camcorder shake in order to achieve steadier shots. The camcorder

offers the following IS modes. Select the one that best suits your needs.

Dynamic IS Ä: Dynamic IS compensates for a higher degree of camcorder shake, such as when shooting

while walking, and is more effective as the zoom approaches full wide angle.

Standard IS Å: Standard IS compensates for a lower degree of camcorder shake, such as when shooting

while remaining stationary, and is suitable for shooting natural-looking scenes.

Powered IS È: Powered IS is most effective when you are stationary and zooming in on far subjects using

high zoom ratios (the more you approach the telephoto end). This mode is not suitable for tilting and panning

shots.

Dynamic IS or Standard IS

1 Select [IS Mode].

> [v'Camera Setup] > [IS Mode]

2 Select [Standard] or [Dynamic] and then press SET.

• Å (Standard IS) or Ä (Dynamic IS) appears on the left of the screen.

3 Select [Image Stabilizer].

> [v'Camera Setup] > [Image Stabilizer]

4 Select [On] and then press SET.

• Select [Off] instead to turn off the image stabilization, for example, when recording with the camcorder

mounted on a tripod.

Powered IS

Press the POWERED IS button.

• È appears on the left of the screen.

• Press the button again to return the camcorder to the IS

mode set in the menu.

• Alternatively, you can also use the >

[v'Camera Setup] > [Powered IS] setting to turn

Powered IS on and off.

NOTES

• If the degree of camcorder shake is too high, the image stabilizer may not be able to compensate fully.

• When using Dynamic IS, the edges of the picture may be adversely affected (ghosting, artifacts and/or dark

areas may appear) when compensating for a high degree of camcorder shake.

• The screen will turn black momentarily when you switch between Dynamic IS and Standard IS or vice versa.

• You cannot switch between Dynamic IS and Standard IS while recording.

Operating modes:

Image Stabilization

• When using Dynamic IS, the angle of view will be narrower.

• If you set an assignable button to [Image Stabilizer] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the image

stabilizer on and off.

Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns

Using onscreen markers allows you to make sure your subject is correctly framed and is within the appropriate

safe area. The zebra patterns help you identify areas that are overexposed. The onscreen markers and zebra

pattern will not affect your recordings.

Displaying Onscreen Markers

The camcorder offers several onscreen markers. You can display multiple onscreen markers simultaneously.

1 Turn on the display of markers.

> [

% Assistance Functions] > [Markers] > [On]

• If [Markers] is not set to [On], the markers will not be displayed even if you made individual selections.

2 Select a setting menu corresponding to a marker you want to display.

> [

% Assistance Functions] > [Center Marker], [Horizontal Marker], [Grid Marker],

[Aspect Marker]

> [

& Assistance Functions] > [Safe Area Marker]

3 Select the desired marker color and then press SET.

• Select [Off] to turn off the selected marker.

• You can display multiple markers simultaneously. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as necessary.

• If you selected [Aspect Marker] or [Safe Area Marker], select the desired safe area or aspect ratio with the

following procedures (A 88).

Options

[Center Marker]: Displays a small marker that indicates the center of the screen.

[Horizontal Marker]: Displays a horizontal line to help you compose level shots.

[Grid Marker]: Displays a grid that allows you to frame your shots correctly (horizontally and vertically).

[Aspect Marker]: Displays markers that indicate various aspect ratios to help you keep your shot within that

area. Available options for [Marker Aspect Ratio] are [4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [16:9], [1.375:1],

[1.66:1], [1.75:1], [1.85:1], [1.90:1], [2.35:1], [2.39:1] and [Custom], a free aspect ratio set

by the user.

[Safe Area Marker]: Displays indicators that show various safe areas, such as the action safe area and text

safe area. You can select the core area used as the basis for calculating the safe area and

a percentage ([80%], [90%], [92.5%] or [95%]), relative to that core area.

Operating modes:

Aspect guide 4:3

Center marker

Grid

Horizontal

marker

Safe area 80%

out of the whole

picture

Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns

To set the aspect ratio

1 Select [Marker Aspect Ratio].

> [

% Assistance Functions] > [Marker Aspect Ratio]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• If you selected one of the preset aspect ratios, the rest of the procedure is not necessary. If you selected

[Custom], continue the procedure to set the desired aspect ratio.

3 Select [Marker Custom Asp. Ratio].

> [

% Assistance Functions] > [Marker Custom Asp. Ratio]

4 Push the joystick up/down to select the first digit of the aspect ratio and then press SET to move to the next.

• Change the rest of the digits in the same way.

5 Select [Set] and then press SET.

To set the safe area

If an aspect marker is not selected, the safe area will be calculated as a percentage of the whole image ([Whole

Picture]) and you can only select the percentage (step 3). To calculate the safe area as a percentage of an aspect

ratio marker ([Selected Aspect Marker]), select an aspect ratio marker in advance and perform the procedure

from the beginning.

1 Select [Basis for Marker Safe Area].

> [

& Assistance Functions] > [Basis for Marker Safe Area]

2 Select [Whole Picture] or [Selected Aspect Marker] and then press SET.

3 Select [Marker Safe Area %].

> [

& Assistance Functions] > [Marker Safe Area %]

4 Select the desired option and then press SET.

NOTES

• You can turn off all other onscreen displays, leaving only the markers (A 47).

• If you set an assignable button to [Markers] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the markers on and off.

Displaying Zebra Patterns

The camcorder has a zebra pattern function that shows black and white diagonal stripes over

areas that are overexposed. There are two types of zebra patterns and you can display both

simultaneously. Zebra 1 lets you identify areas within a certain range (±5% of a specified level

from 5% to 95%) while zebra 2 lets you identify areas that are over a specified level (from 0%

to 100%).

1 Select [Zebra].

> [

# Assistance Functions] > [Zebra]

2 Select a zebra pattern and then press SET.

3 Select the menu setting corresponding to the zebra

level you selected.

> [

# Assistance Functions] > [Zebra 1 Level]

or [Zebra 2 Level]

4 Select the desired zebra level and then press SET.

5Press the ZEBRA button to activate the selected zebra

pattern.

Zebra 1

Zebra 2

Onscreen Markers and Zebra Patterns

NOTES

• You can use the > [

# Assistance Functions] > [Zebra: LCD], [Zebra: VF], [Zebra: SDI] and

[Zebra: HDMI] settings to turn the zebra pattern on and off separately on the LCD screen, viewfinder and

external monitors connected to the respective terminals.

Setting the Time Code

In mode, the camcorder generates a time code signal and records it with the recorded clips. The time

code signal can be output from the SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and TIME CODE terminal. In mode,

the time code embedded in the clip being played back can be output from the SDI terminal.

Depending on the frame rate used, you may be able to select between a drop frame an non-drop frame time

code signal (A 91). The default mode varies depending on the country/region of purchase and, though the time

code display style is different for DF and NDF, in this section the NDF display style is used for simplicity’s sake.

Selecting the Time Code Mode

You can select the camcorder’s time code mode.

1 Select [Time Code Mode].

> [

# System Setup] > [Time Code Mode]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Preset]: The time code starts from an initial value you can select in advance. The default initial time code

is 00:00:00:00.

See the following procedures to select the time code running mode and set the initial time code.

[Regen.]: The camcorder will read the selected SD card and the time code will continue from the last time

code recorded on the card. The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded

consecutively on the same card will have continuous time codes.

Setting the Time Code Running Mode

If you set the time code mode to [Preset], you can select the time code running mode.

1 Select [Time Code Run].

> [

# System Setup] > [Time Code Run]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Rec Run]: The time code runs only while recording so clips recorded consecutively on the same card will

have continuous time codes.

[Free Run]: The time code starts running the moment you press SET and keeps running regardless of the

camcorder’s operation.

Operating modes:

Setting the Time Code

Setting the Time Code’s Initial Value

If you set the time code mode to [Preset], you can set the initial value of the time code.

1 Select [Set Time Code].

> [

# System Setup] > [Set Time Code]

2 Select [Change] and then press SET.

• The time code setting screen appears with an orange selection frame indicating the hours.

• To reset the time code to [00:00:00:00], select [Reset] instead. If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the

time code will be reset the moment you press SET and keep running continuously from 00:00:00:00.

3 Push the joystick up/down to set the hours and press SET to move to the minutes.

• Change the rest of the fields (minutes, seconds, frame) in the same way.

• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen without setting the time code.

4 Select [Set] and press SET to close the screen.

• If the running mode is set to [Free Run], the time code will start running from the selected time code the

moment you press SET.

Selecting Drop or Non-Drop Frame

When the frame rate is set to 59.94P, 59.94i or 29.97P, you can select between a drop frame (DF) or non-drop

frame (NDF) time code, depending on how you plan to use your recordings.

With all other frame rates, the time code is set to non-drop frame (NDF) and cannot be changed.

1 Select [Time Code DF/NDF].

> [

# System Setup] > [Time Code DF/NDF]

2 Select [DF] or [NDF] and then press SET.

• The time code display will differ depending on the setting. When you select [DF], the time code will appear

as [00:00:00.00]; when you select [NDF], it will appear as [00:00:00:00].

Putting the Time Code Display on Hold

If you set an assignable button to [Time Code Hold] (A 119), you can press the button to freeze the display of

the time code*. While the time code display is put on hold, [H] will appear on the screen next to the time code.

The time code continues to run normally while the time code display is on hold. When you resume the time code

display, the current time code will be displayed.

* The time code signal output from the terminals will not be put on hold. However, the time code displayed on a monitor connected

to the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal will be put on hold.

Operating modes:

Setting the Time Code

About the time code display

An icon may appear next to the time code depending on the operation. Refer to the following table.

NOTES

• The frames value of the time code runs from 0 to 23 (frame rate set to 23.98P), from 0 to 24 (frame rate set to

25.00P, 50.00P or 50.00i), or from 0 to 29 (all other frame rates).

•However, if > [B " System Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Scan Mode] is set to [PsF (Forced 1080i)], even

when the frame rate is set to 23.98P, the frames value of the time code output from the SDI terminal and HDMI

OUT terminal will be converted so it runs from 0 to 29.

• When slow motion recording is activated, you cannot select the [Free Run] running mode. Conversely, when

pre-recording is activated, [Free Run] is set automatically and cannot be changed.

• When slow motion recording is activated, the time code signal will not be output from the SDI terminal, HDMI

OUT terminal or TIME CODE terminal.

• When you mix drop frame and non-drop frame time codes, there might be a discontinuity in the time code at

the point where the recording starts.

• When you are using the [Free Run] running mode, the time code will continue running as long as the built-in

backup battery has some charge left, even if you disconnect all other power sources.

• If you set an assignable button to [Time Code] (A 119), you can press the button to open the

[

# System Setup] menu page.

Icon Description

R The time code mode is set to [Regen.].

P The time code mode is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Rec Run].

F The time code mode is set to [Preset] and the running mode is set to [Free Run].

E Time code signal is coming from an external source.

H Time code display is on hold.

No icon Time code during clip playback.

Setting the User Bit

The user bit display can be selected from the date or the time of recording, or an identification code consisting of

8 characters in the hexadecimal system. There are sixteen possible characters: the numbers 0 to 9 and the

letters A to F.

The user bit is recorded with clips* and can be output from the TIME CODE terminal, SDI terminal or HDMI OUT

terminal. It can be used freely to categorize and manage recordings or to keep additional information about

them.

* XF-HEVC and XF-AVC clips only.

Setting an Hexadecimal Code

1 Open the user bit setting screen.

> [

# System Setup] > [User Bit Type] > [Setting] > [Change]

• The user bit setting screen appears with an orange selection frame on the leftmost character.

• To reset the user bit to [00 00 00 00], select [Reset] instead.

2 Push the joystick up/down to select the first character and press SET to move to the next.

• Change the rest of the characters in the same way.

• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen without setting the user bit.

3 Select [Set] and press SET.

Using the Date or Time

1 Select [User Bit Type].

> [B # System Setup] > [User Bit Type]

2 Select [Date] or [Time] and then press SET.

Operating modes:

Synchronizing with an External Device

Using Genlock synchronization, you can synchronize this camcorder’s video signal to that of an external video

device. Similarly, using an external time code signal, you can synchronize this camcorder’s time code to the

external signal. Using the external time code signal to synchronize multiple cameras/camcorders allows you to

set up a multi-camera recording. You can also output the time code signal from this camcorder to achieve the

same result. If you output the time code from the SDI terminal to an editing device, the editor can create video

with the same time code.

Connecting an External Device

When synchronizing the camcorder to an external signal*, use the G-LOCK/SYNC terminal. When synchronizing

a time code signal, use the TIME CODE terminal. Be sure to set the respective terminal to input or output in

advance.

Connect the external device to the camcorder as shown in the following diagram.

* As reference video signal (input signal) for Genlock synchronization, you can use an analog blackburst or tri-level signal.

Connection diagram

Reference Video Signal Input (Genlock Synchronization)

When a reference sync signal (analog blackburst or tri-level signal) is input through the G-LOCK/SYNC terminal,

the phases of the camcorder’s V and H sync will automatically be synchronized to it. The phase difference

between the external Genlock signal and the camcorder is initially set to 0. The H phase can be adjusted within

the range of approximately ±0.4 H.

1 Select [G-LOCK/SYNC Term.].

> [B " System Setup] > [G-LOCK/SYNC Term.]

2 Select [Genlock Input] and then press SET.

3 Select [Genlock Adjustment].

> [B " System Setup] > [Genlock Adjustment]

4 Select [Change] and then press SET.

• The adjustment value setting screen appears with an orange selection frame on the leftmost digit.

• To reset the adjustment value to [000], select [Reset] instead.

Operating modes:

G-LOCK/SYNC terminal

TIME CODE terminal

BNC cable

(commercially available)

Synchronizing with an External Device

5Push the joystick up/down to select the first digit and press SET to move to the next.

• Change the rest of the digits in the same way to adjust the H phase to the desired level (–1023 to 1023).

• Press the CANCEL button to return to the previous screen without setting the Genlock adjustment value.

6 Select [Set] and then press SET.

NOTES

• When a suitable Genlock signal is input, the Genlock synchronization stabilizes after approximately

10 seconds.

• When a suitable Genlock signal is detected, the U icon will flash at the top right of the screen. When the

camcorder locks on the external Genlock signal, the icon will stay on.

• If the external Genlock signal is incorrect, the synchronization may not be stable. In such case, the recorded

time code may be incorrect.

Time Code Signal Input

An external SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal received from the TIME CODE terminal will be recorded as the

time code. The user bit of the external timing signal can also be recorded with the clips. Before connecting the

device, set the TIME CODE terminal to input. Also, you must set the running mode of the time code to [Free Run]

(A 90).

1 Select [TC In/Out].

> [B # System Setup] > [TC In/Out]

2 Select [In] and then press SET.

Recording the User Bit of an External Signal

The user bit of an external time code signal can also be recorded with clips along with the time code itself.

1 Select [User Bit Recording Mode].

> [B # System Setup] > [User Bit Recording Mode]

2 Select [External] and then press SET.

NOTES

• When the frame rate is set to 23.98P, use a 24-frame time code signal as input signal. When it is set to 25.00P,

50.00i or 50.00P, use a 25-frame time code signal. For other frame rates, use a 30-frame time code signal.

• When a suitable time code signal is received, the camcorder’s own time code will be synchronized to it and the

synchronization will be maintained even if you disconnect the cable from the TIME CODE terminal.

• If the external time code signal is incorrect or there is no input signal, the internal time code (as set with the

menu settings in the [B # System Setup] menu page) will be recorded instead.

• While a time code signal is being received, the external time code’s drop-frame bit will be used.

• Performing any of the following actions while the cable is not connected will cause the synchronization to be

disrupted; the correct time code will be restored once you reconnect the cable.

- Turning the camcorder off/on

- Changing the operating mode to mode

- Changing the video configuration

Operating modes:

Synchronizing with an External Device

Reference Video Signal Output

After changing the G-LOCK/SYNC terminal’s function to [HD Sync Output], you can output the camcorder’s

video signal as a reference sync signal (HD tri-level signal) to synchronize an external device to this camcorder.

The reference video signal output will have the same frequency as the signal output from the SDI terminal.

1 Select [G-LOCK/SYNC Term.].

> [B " System Setup] > [G-LOCK/SYNC Term.]

2 Select [HD Sync Output] and then press SET.

3 If necessary, you can change the scan mode (P or PsF) with the

> [B " System Setup] >

[SYNC Scan Mode] setting.

Available synchronization signals

* Change the scan mode (P or PsF) with the > [B " System Setup] > [SYNC Scan Mode] setting.

Time Code Signal Output

The time code will be output from the TIME CODE terminal as an SMPTE-standard LTC timing signal. Before

connecting the device, set > [B # System Setup] > [TC In/Out] to [Out] to change the TIME CODE

terminal to output (A 95).

The embedded time code will be output also from the SDI terminal. Additionally, you can set >

[3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [HDMI Time Code] to [On], to output the embedded time code also from the

HDMI OUT terminal.

NOTES

• About the user bit output: In mode, the user bit set by the user (A 93) will be output. In mode,

the user bit will be output if it was recorded with the clip being played back. Applies only to XF-HEVC and

XF-AVC clips.

• The time code and user bit will not be output when slow motion recording is activated.

• In mode, the time code and user bit will be output only from the SDI terminal.

Operating modes:

SDI terminal SYNC terminal

2160/59.94P 1080/59.94i

2160/29.97P 1080/29.97 (P/PsF)*

2160/23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF)*

2160/25.00P 1080/25.00 (P/PsF) *

1080/59.94P 1080/59.94i

1080/59.94i 1080/59.94i

1080/29.97P 1080/29.97 (P/PsF) *

1080/23.98P 1080/23.98 (P/PsF) *

1080/50.00P 1080/50.00i

1080/50.00i 1080/50.00i

1080/25.00P 1080/25.00 (P/PsF) *

720/59.94P 1080/59.94i

Operating modes:

Recording Audio

The camcorder features the following audio recording and playback options. You can record audio using the

INPUT terminals (commercially available microphones, analog line-in audio sources, AES/EBU digital audio

sources), the MIC terminal (commercially available microphones) or the built-in microphone.

An audio signal will also be output with the video signal from the SDI terminal and HDMI OUT terminal. You can

record this audio signal on an external recorder.

Available audio formats

Audio Settings and Recorded Audio Channels

Which audio inputs are recorded to which audio channels is determined by a combination of menu settings and

audio-related controls on the camcorder. Refer to the illustration below and the table on the next page.

Operating modes:

Video format Audio format Number of channels Sampling

XF-HEVC,

XF-AVC

Linear PCM (LPCM) 4 channels 24 bit, 48 kHz

MP4

AAC 2 channels

16 bit, 48 kHz

Linear PCM (LPCM) 4 channels

INPUT 1 switch

(audio input selection)

INPUT 1 terminal's

ANALOG switch (analog

audio source selection)

INPUT 2 switch

(audio input

selection)

INPUT 2 terminal's

ANALOG switch (analog

audio source selection)

Recording Audio

* > [

! Audio Setup] > [Select CH1/CH2 Input], [Select CH3/CH4 Input] and [CH2 Input].

NOTES

• You can press the AUDIO STATUS button to display the

[Audio] status screens (only). On the [Audio] status screens

(A 200) you can check the input source selected for each

audio channel and other audio-related settings.

• When you display the [Audio] status screens using the

AUDIO STATUS button, you can press SET to open directly

the [¡!Audio Setup] menu page.

Audio input selection

switches

[Select CH1/

CH2 Input]*

[Select CH3/

CH4 Input]*

[CH2 Input]

Recorded audio channels/audio sources

INPUT 1 INPUT 2 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4

AES/EBU

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[MIC Terminal]

–

INPUT 1 terminal (digital audio) MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

AES/EBU AES/EBU

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

INPUT 1 terminal (digital audio) INPUT 2 terminal (digital audio)

AES/EBU ANALOG

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

INPUT 1 terminal (digital audio)

–

INPUT 2 terminal

AES/EBU

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[Built-in Mic]

–

INPUT 1 terminal (digital audio)

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

ANALOG

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[MIC Terminal] [INPUT 2] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

ANALOG

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[MIC Terminal] [INPUT 1] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 1 terminal MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

ANALOG AES/EBU

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT 1] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal (digital audio)

ANALOG AES/EBU

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT 2] INPUT 1 terminal

–

INPUT 2 terminal (digital audio)

ANALOG ANALOG

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT 2] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal

ANALOG ANALOG

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT

Terminals]

[INPUT 1] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal

ANALOG

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[Built-in Mic] [INPUT 2] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

ANALOG

–

[INPUT

Terminals]

[Built-in Mic] [INPUT 1] INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 1 terminal

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

–

ANALOG [MIC Terminal]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R) INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal

–

AES/EBU [MIC Terminal]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R) INPUT 2 terminal (digital audio)

– –

[MIC Terminal] [MIC Terminal]

–

MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R) MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

– –

[MIC Terminal] [Built-in Mic]

–

MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

–

ANALOG [Built-in Mic]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

INPUT 1 terminal INPUT 2 terminal

–

AES/EBU [Built-in Mic]

[INPUT

Terminals]

–

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

INPUT 2 terminal (digital audio)

– –

[Built-in Mic] [MIC Terminal]

–

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

MIC terminal (L) MIC terminal (R)

– –

[Built-in Mic] [Built-in Mic]

–

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

Built-in microphone

(L)

Built-in microphone

(R)

Recording Audio

Connecting an External Microphone or External Audio Input Source to the Camcorder

To each of the INPUT terminals you can attach commercially available microphones, digital audio sources (AES/

EBU), or analog line in sources with an XLR connector. To the MIC terminal you can attach commercially

available condenser microphones with their own power supply, and a ∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini plug.

Using the supplied microphone holder, you can fix external microphones with a diameter of 19 mm to 20 mm.

Follow the procedure below to attach a microphone (refer also to the following illustration). To connect an

external device to the camcorder, plug the device’s cable into the desired INPUT terminal (햵).

1Loosen the microphone lock screw (햲), open the

microphone holder and insert the microphone (햳).

2 Tighten the lock screw and put the microphone cable through the cable

clamp under the microphone holder (햴).

3 Plug the microphone cable into the desired INPUT terminal (햵) or the MIC terminal (햶).

햲

햳

Microphone lock screw

햴

햵

햶

MIC terminal

Cable clamp

INPUT 1 terminal

INPUT 2 terminal

Recording Audio

100

Selecting the Audio Format of MP4 Clips

When recording MP4 clips, you can set the audio format to AAC (2 channels, 16 bit) or LPCM (linear PCM,

4 channels, 16 bit). When the resolution is set to 1280x720, the audio format is set to AAC and cannot be

changed.

1 Select [Audio Format (MP4)].

> [Æ ! Recording/Media Setup] > [Audio Format (MP4)]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

NOTES

• Select AAC format when versatility (the ability to play back on most devices) is more important. Select LPCM

format when audio quality is the priority.

• When the audio format is set to AAC, the two audio channels are recorded to CH1 and CH2.

Setting the Audio Input Type for the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 Terminals

Using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals, you can record audio independently from a microphone or audio input

source.

On the camcorder, set the audio-related switches for the INPUT

terminal you wish to use according to the type of audio input you

wish to use.

1 Set the audio input selection switch INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 to

AES/EBU (digital audio) or ANALOG (analog audio).

• When the switch is set to AES/EBU, the audio recording level for

that input cannot be adjusted.

2If you selected analog audio, set the corresponding

ANALOG (analog source selection) switch to MIC

(microphone) or LINE (audio device).

• To supply a microphone with phantom power, set the switch to

MIC+48V instead. Make sure to connect the microphone first,

before turning the phantom power on. Keep the microphone

connected when turning off the phantom power.

• When using the INPUT terminals to record to only one channel,

use the INPUT 1 terminal.

IMPORTANT

• When connecting an analog microphone or device that does not

support phantom power, make sure to set the ANALOG switch to

MIC or LINE, respectively. If you set the switch to MIC+48V, the

microphone or device may be damaged.

Operating modes:

INPUT 2 switch

INPUT 1 switch

ANALOG switch for INPUT 2

ANALOG switch

for INPUT 1

101

Recording Audio

Selecting the Audio Input Source for Audio Channels

You can select the audio input source that will be recorded on CH1/CH2 or CH3/CH4, independently for each

pair of audio channels. For details refer to the Audio Settings and Recorded Audio Channels table (A 97).

1 Select the desired pair of audio channels.

> [

! Audio Setup] > [Select CH1/CH2 Input] or [Select CH3/CH4 Input]

2 Select [INPUT Terminals] (external microphone or audio device), [MIC Terminal] (external

microphone) or [Built-in Mic] (built-in microphone) and then press SET.

• If necessary, repeat steps 1 and 2 to select the audio input source for the other pair of audio channels.

Recording a Single Analog Audio Input to Two Audio Channels

By default, when using analog audio sources (line in or microphone) connected to the INPUT terminals, each

audio input is recorded to a separate audio channel (INPUT 1 to CH1 and INPUT 2 to CH2).

If necessary (for example, as an audio backup recording), you can record the same analog audio source

connected to the INPUT 1 terminal to both audio channels, CH1 and CH2. In that case, you can adjust the audio

recording levels of each channel independently of each other.

1 Select [CH2 Input].

> [

! Audio Setup] > [CH2 Input]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[INPUT 2]: Records audio to each channel separately. Audio input into INPUT 1 is recorded to CH1, while

audio input into INPUT 2 is recorded to CH2.

[INPUT 1]: Audio input into INPUT 1 is recorded to both channels. Audio input into INPUT 2 will not be

recorded.

Adjusting the Audio Recording Level

You can adjust the audio recording level of analog audio sources from the INPUT terminals, external

microphones connected to the MIC terminal and the built-in microphone. For the INPUT terminals (analog

sources) and MIC terminal, you can set the audio recording level to automatic or manual adjustment

independently for each channel or for CH1/CH2 and CH3/CH4 as a set*.

The audio recording level of digital audio sources (AES/EBU) from the INPUT terminals cannot be adjusted.

The audio recording level of the built-in microphone can only be adjusted for a pair of channels (CH1/CH2 or

CH3/CH4) as a set.

You can set > [¡% Audio Setup] > [Assign CH2 Switch & Dial] to [CH3] to be able to adjust the

audio levels for channel CH3 using the CH2 audio level switch and dial.

* Requires linking the audio level adjustment (ALC) of CH1/CH2 or CH3/CH4 (A 103).

Operating modes:

Recording Audio

102

Automatic Audio Level Adjustment for

CH1 or CH2

Set the

–

(audio level) switch of the desired

channel to A (automatic) to let the camcorder

automatically adjust that channel’s audio level.

Manual Audio Level Adjustment for

CH1 and/or CH2

You can set the audio level for each channel manually

from – to +18 dB.

1 Set the

–

(audio level) switch of the desired

channel to M (manual).

2 Turn the corresponding

–

dial to adjust the

audio level.

• For reference, the 0 corresponds to – ,

5 corresponds to 0 dB, and 10 corresponds

to +18 dB.

• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so

that the audio level meter on the screen will go to

the right of the –18 dB mark (one mark right of the

–20 dB mark) only occasionally.

• Closing the protective cover will prevent the audio

controls from being changed inadvertently.

Audio Level Adjustment for CH3 and/or CH4

1 Select [Audio Rec Level CH3], [Audio Rec Level CH4] or [Audio Rec Level CH3/CH4].

> [

" Audio Setup] > [Audio Rec Level CH3], [Audio Rec Level CH4] or

[Audio Rec Level CH3/CH4]

2 Select [Automatic] or [Manual] and then press SET.

• If you selected [Automatic], the rest of the procedure is not necessary. If you selected [Manual], continue the

procedure to set the audio recording level.

3 Select [CH3 Level], [CH4 Level] or [CH3/CH4 Level].

> [

" Audio Setup] > [CH3 Level], [CH4 Level] or [CH3/CH4 Level]

4 Push the joystick up/down to set the audio recording level and then press SET.

• For reference, 0 corresponds to – , 50 corresponds to 0 dB, and 100 corresponds to +18 dB.

• As a guideline, adjust the audio recording level so that the audio level meter on the screen will go to the right

of the –18 dB mark (one mark right of the –20 dB mark) only occasionally.

CH1/CH2

–

(audio level) switches

CH1/CH2

–

(audio level) switches

CH1/CH2

–

dials

103

Recording Audio

NOTES

• We recommend using headphones when adjusting the audio level. If the input level is too high, audio may

become distorted even if the audio level indicator shows an appropriate level.

• If you set an assignable button to [Audio Level Indicator] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the

onscreen audio level indicator on and off.

Advanced Audio Input Settings

Low-Cut Filter (Built-in Microphone)

If you selected [Built-in Mic] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), you can activate the built-in

microphone's low-cut filter.

1 Select [Built-in Mic Low Cut].

> [

# Audio Setup] > [Built-in Mic Low Cut]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options

[Off]: For recording audio under usual conditions.

[LC1]: For recording mainly people’s voices.

[LC2]: For reducing the background sound of wind when recording outdoors in windy surroundings (for

example, on a beach or close to buildings). Note that when you use this setting some low-

frequency sounds may be suppressed along with the sound of wind.

Microphone Sensitivity (Built-in Microphone)

If you selected [Built-in Mic] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), you can adjust select the built-in

microphone's sensitivity.

1 Select [Built-in Mic Sensitivity].

> [

# Audio Setup] > [Built-in Mic Sensitivity]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

Linking the audio level adjustment of CH1/CH2 or CH3/CH4

• When both CH1 and CH2, or CH3 and CH4, are set to the INPUT terminals or MIC terminal and to the

same type of analog audio source (external line input or external microphone), you can use the >

[

! Audio Setup] > [CH1/CH2 ALC Link] or [CH3/CH4 ALC Link] setting to link the audio level

adjustment of both channels.

• When CH1 and CH2 are linked, you can use the CH1

–

(audio level) switch and dial to affect both

CH1 and CH2. When CH3 and CH4 are linked, you can use the [Audio Rec Level CH3/CH4] and [CH3/CH4

Level] settings to affect both CH3 and CH4.

Audio peak limiter

• If at least one of the channels is set to the INPUT terminals, an analog audio source and manual audio level

adjustment, you can activate the audio limiter to lessen audio distortions. When activated, the audio limiter

will limit the amplitude of audio input signals when they start to distort. Use the > [

$ Audio

Setup] > [INPUT 1&2 Limiter] setting.

Operating modes:

Recording Audio

104

Options

[Normal]: For recording audio under usual conditions.

[High]: For recording audio at a higher volume (+6 dB).

Microphone Attenuator (Built-in Microphone)

If you selected [Built-in Mic] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), you can activate the built-in

microphone's attenuator (12 dB).

1 Select [Built-in Mic Att.].

> [

# Audio Setup] > [Built-in Mic Att.]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

Microphone Sensitivity (INPUT Terminals)

If you selected [INPUT Terminals] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), one of the INPUT switches is

set to ANALOG, and the corresponding ANALOG switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V, you can select the external

microphone’s sensitivity.

1 Select the menu setting for the INPUT terminal used.

> [

$ Audio Setup] > [INPUT 1 Mic Trimming] or [INPUT 2 Mic Trimming]

2 Select the desired level and then press SET.

• You can select one of 5 sensitivity levels from –12 dB to +12 dB.

Microphone Attenuator (INPUT Terminals)

If you selected [INPUT Terminals] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), one of the INPUT switches is

set to ANALOG, and the corresponding ANALOG switch is set to MIC or MIC+48V, you can activate the external

microphone’s attenuator (20 dB).

1 Select the menu setting for the INPUT terminal used.

> [

$ Audio Setup] > [INPUT 1 Mic Att.] or [INPUT 2 Mic Att.]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

Microphone Attenuator (MIC Terminal)

If you selected [MIC Terminal] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), you can activate the external

microphone's attenuator (20 dB).

1 Select [MIC Att.].

> [

$ Audio Setup] > [MIC Att.]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

Low-Cut Filter (MIC Terminal)

If you selected [MIC Terminal] as the audio input for an audio channel (A 97), you can activate the external

microphone's low-cut filter.

1 Select [MIC Low Cut].

> [

$ Audio Setup] > [MIC Low Cut]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

• When you activate the low-cut filter, some low-frequency sounds may be suppressed along with the sound

of wind.

105

Recording Audio

Monitoring the Audio with Headphones

Connect headphones with a ∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-plug to the

(headphone) terminal to monitor the recorded audio.

NOTES

• You can adjust the headphone volume with the >

[

% Audio Setup]* > [Headphone Volume] setting. If you set

an assignable button to [Headphones +] or [Headphones –]

(A 119), you can press the button to adjust the headphone

volume without using the menu.

* Appears on page ! in mode.

(headphone)

terminal

Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal

106

Colors Bars/Audio Reference Signal

You can have the camcorder generate color bars and a 1 kHz audio reference signal and output them from the

SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and

(headphone) terminal*.

* Audio reference signal only.

Color Bars

The camcorder offers 3 types of color bars (SMPTE, EBU or ARIB).

1 Select [Color Bar Type].

> [

' Camera Setup] > [Color Bar Type]

2 Select the type of color bars and then press SET.

3 To activate the color bars, select [Color Bars].

> [

' Camera Setup] > [Color Bars]

4 Select [On] and then press SET.

• The selected color bars appear on the screen and will be recorded when you press the REC button.

• Turning off the camcorder or changing the operating mode to mode will deactivate the color bars.

NOTES

• You cannot change the type of color bars while recording or when pre-recording is activated.

• You cannot turn the color bars on and off while recording.

• If you set an assignable button to [Color Bars] (A 119), you can press the button to turn the color bars on/off.

Audio Reference Signal

The camcorder can output a 1 kHz audio reference signal with the color bars.

1 Select [1 kHz Tone].

> [

% Audio Setup] > [1 kHz Tone]

2 Select the desired level and then press SET.

• You can select one of three audio levels (–12 dB, –18 dB, –20 dB) or [Off] to turn off the signal.

• The reference signal will be output at the selected level when you display the color bars, and will be recorded

when you press the REC button.

Operating modes:

107

Waveform Monitor

The camcorder can display a simplified waveform monitor on the LCD screen, viewfinder and external monitors

(SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal).

Displaying the Waveform Monitor

Press the WFM button to display the waveform monitor.

• The waveform monitor window will appear at the right of the

screen.

• You can use the > [

* Assistance Functions]

> [WFM: LCD], [WFM: VF], [WFM: SDI] and [WFM: HDMI]

settings to turn the waveform monitor display on and off

separately on the LCD screen, viewfinder and external

monitors connected to the respective terminals.

• You can use the > [

* Assistance Functions]

> [Waveform Settings] > [Position] setting to display the

waveform monitor on the left/right of the screen.

* Appears on page ! in mode.

Configuring the Waveform Monitor

1 Select the waveform monitor's [Type].

> [

* Assistance Functions] > [Waveform Settings] > [Type]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• If you selected [Select Line], continue the procedure to set the Y coordinate of the line you wish to display.

Otherwise, skip to step 6 to change the gain.

3To select the line’s Y coordinate, select [Select Line].

> [

* Assistance Functions] > [Waveform Settings] > [Select Line]

4Push the joystick up/down to select the first digit of the Y coordinate and then press SET to move to

the next.

• Change the rest of the digits in the same way.

• When the number of horizontal lines (vertical component) of the resolution used is 1080, you can select a

value between 0 and 1079 (1-line increments); when the vertical resolution is 2160, you can select a value

between 0 and 2158 (2-line increments).

5 Select [Set] and then press SET.

6 Select [Gain].

> [

* Assistance Functions] > [Waveform Settings] > [Gain]

7 Select the desired amplification ratio ([1x] or [2x]) and then press SET.

• If you selected [1x], the rest of the procedure is not necessary. If you selected [2x], the display range of the

waveform monitor’s Y axis will be reduced by half. Continue the procedure to select the minimum luminance

value (in %) shown on the Y axis.

Operating modes:

Waveform Monitor

108

8 Select [Y Position].

> [

* Assistance Functions] > [Waveform Settings] > [Y Position]

9 Select the desired percentage and then press SET.

* Appears on page ! in mode.

Options for [Type]

[Line]: Sets the waveform monitor to line display mode.

[Line+Spot]: The waveform of the area in the red frame is displayed in red on top of the [Line] mode

waveform.

[Select Line]: The selected horizontal line will be displayed along with its waveform.

[Field]: Sets the waveform monitor to field display mode.

[RGB]: Functions like an RGB parade scope.

[YPbPr]: Functions like a YPbPr parade scope.

NOTES

• The waveform monitor will not be affected even if a LUT is applied to the LCD screen, viewfinder or video

output from the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal.

• The waveform monitor cannot be displayed while the color bars are displayed or magnification is activated.

• If the [Knee] settings in the custom picture file (A 128) were changed, a horizontal line will appear on the

waveform monitor indicating the luminance (Y) level corresponding to the knee point.

109

Adding Marks to XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips while Recording

When recording XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips, you can flag an important shot in a clip by adding a “shot mark” (!).

You can also add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the entire clip to flag clips you want to set apart.

You can also add an delete shot marks (A 143), $ marks and % marks (A 141) in mode.

Adding Shot Marks while Recording

To add a shot mark to a clip while recording, you must first set in advance an assignable button to [Add Shot

Mark].

1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark] (A 119).

2 While you are recording, press the assignable button at the beginning of the shot you wish to mark.

• A message indicating the shot mark will appear and the selected shot mark will be added to the current

frame of the clip.

NOTES

• You can also press the SHOT1 button on the wireless controller to add a shot mark.

• Up to 100 shot marks can be added to a single clip.

• There may be up to a 1 second delay from when you press the button to when the camcorder adds the shot

mark.

• When a clip contains a shot mark, ! will appear next to the clip’s thumbnail in the playback index screen.

• A shot mark cannot be added while pre-recording (before you press the REC button to start recording).

Adding an $ Mark or % Mark to the Last XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clip Recorded

After recording an important XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip, you can add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to the

clip to set it apart. $ marks can also be used to protect important clips, as clips with an $ mark cannot be

deleted with the camcorder.

To add an $ mark or % mark to the last clip recorded in mode, you must first set in advance an

assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark].

1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 119).

• To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another

assignable button to [Add % Mark].

2 After recording a clip, press the assignable button.

• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.

NOTES

• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and a % mark at the same time.

• When a clip has an $ mark or % mark, the respective icon will appear next to the clip's thumbnail in the

playback index screen.

Operating modes:

Using Metadata

110

Using Metadata

The camcorder automatically adds metadata to recorded XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips. You can use Canon XF

Utility to check and search for specific metadata. You can also create and transfer a user memo remotely using

the Browser Remote application (A 164, 172).

Metadata components

Only when an optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder. While recording, GPS information is recorded

automatically by the camcorder (A 112).

GPS information can only be added to clips already recorded.

Recording data is logged automatically by the camcorder.

Setting a User Memo Created with Canon XF Utility

Before you can add a user memo, you must first install Canon XF Utility (A 153). Next, create the user memo

and save it to an SD card. Once you insert the card in the camcorder and select the user memo, it will be added

to clips you record after that.

1Use Canon XF Utility to save a user memo to an SD card.

• For details, refer to Managing User Memo Profiles in the Canon XF Utility Instruction Manual.

2Insert the card into the camcorder’s SD card slot 3.

3 Select the user memo [Setting].

> [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting]

4 Select [SD Card] and then press SET.

5 Select [User Memo].

> [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [User Memo]

6 Select the file name of the desired user memo and then press SET.

•The Q icon appears on the right of the screen.

• Select [Off] to record clips without a user memo.

NOTES

• After you set a user memo, do not remove the SD card while you are recording. If the card is removed, the

user memo will not be added to clips.

• You must set the user memo before you start recording for it to be added to the clips. You cannot change the user

memo already added to a clip using the camcorder but you can do so with Canon XF Utility.

• When the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder, the user memo information will not be

recorded, even if you have selected a user memo file from the SD card.

Metadata

Entering content Checking content

Camcorder Canon XF Utility Browser Remote Canon XF Utility

User memo: clip title, creator, location and description. – Ü Ü Ü

GPS information: altitude, latitude and longitude. Ü

Ü Ü

Recording data: Shutter speed, gain value, etc. –

– – Ü

Unique Material Identifiers (UMID): country, organization

and user codes based on the SMPTE standard.

Ü – – –

Operating modes:

111

Using Metadata

Entering Slate Information About the Recording

You can enter scene and take information to help identify the recording later on.

1 Select [Scene] or [Take].

> [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Scene] or [Take]

2 Select [Change] and then press SET.

• Enter the desired information (scene, up to 16 characters; take, up to 8 characters) using the keyboard

screen (A 27).

• To clear the scene/take information, select [Reset] instead.

Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)

112

Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)

When the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder’s USB terminal, the camcorder will

automatically record the GPS information (longitude, latitude and altitude) to every recording you make (clips and

photos). For photos only, the UTC (coordinated universal time) date and time will be recorded as well. You can

later use this GPS information to organize and search clips using Canon XF Utility (A 153). In mode,

you can check if a clip contains GPS information on the [Clip Info] screen (A 140).

For details about attaching and configuring the receiver, refer to the GP-E2’s instruction manual.

Connecting the GPS Receiver

Turn off the camcorder and the receiver. Connect the receiver to the camcorder’s USB terminal using the USB

cable*. While recording, place the receiver in the carrying case* and attach it to the camcorder’s grip belt or carry

it on your person.

* Supplied with the receiver.

IMPORTANT

• In certain countries/regions, the use of GPS may be restricted. Be sure to use the GPS receiver in accordance

with local laws and regulations of the country/region where the receiver is used. Be particularly careful when

traveling outside of your home country.

• Be careful about using the GPS receiver in places where the use of electronic devices is restricted.

• The GPS information recorded with clips and photos may contain data that can lead others to locate or

identify you. Be careful when sharing geotagged recordings with others or when uploading them to the Web.

• Do not leave the GPS receiver near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors.

NOTES

• On the [GPS Information Display] status screen (A 205), you can check the current GPS information and

satellite signal strength.

• You can use the > [

% Monitoring Setup] > [Displayed Units] setting to change the units shown

on the screen between meters and feet.

• Initial GPS signal reception will take longer after replacing the battery pack or when first turning on the

camcorder after a period of having been turned off.

To a d just the date and time automatically according to the GPS data

You can set > [

! System Setup] > [GPS Auto Time] to [On], to have the camcorder

automatically adjust its date and time settings according to the information received from the GPS signal. The

date and time will be updated automatically the first time a correct GPS signal is acquired after turning on the

camcorder.

• While the automatic date/time adjustment is activated, the > [

! System Setup] > [Time

Zone] and [Date/Time] settings will not be available.

USB terminal

113

Recording GPS Information (Geotagging)

• Do not place cables connected to the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal near the GPS receiver as doing so

may interfere with the GPS signal.

• The GPS information recorded with clips corresponds to the location at the start of the recording.

• The camcorder is not compatible with the GPS receiver’s digital compass and positioning interval functions.

Also, the [Set now] option is not available for the [GPS Auto Time] setting.

Reviewing a Recording

114

Reviewing a Recording

If you set an assignable button to [Review Recording] in advance, you can review all or part of the last clip

recorded even with the camcorder set to mode.

1 Set an assignable button to [Review Recording] in advance (A 119).

2To set the review length, select [Review Recording].

> [

% System Setup] > [Review Recording]

3 Select the desired option and then press SET.

4 After you finish recording a clip, press the assignable button.

• The last clip that was recorded is played back for the selected duration. [

REVIEW] appears at the top of

the screen.

• While the clip is reviewed, there will be no sound from the built-in speaker but the audio will be output from

the × (headphone) terminal, HDMI OUT terminal and SDI terminal.

• You can use the joystick to jump back/forward within the clip (A 137).

• Press the CANCEL button to stop reviewing the clip and return the camcorder to record standby mode.

• After the clip finishes playing back, the camcorder returns to record standby mode.

Options

[Entire Clip]: Allows you to review the entire clip.

[Last 4 sec]: Allows you to review just the last 4 seconds of the clip.

NOTES

• If the camcorder switched SD cards during a recording, the camcorder will play back the clip on the card most

recently recorded on.

Operating modes:

115

Special Recording Modes

The camcorder features the following special recording modes.

Slow motion recording: This mode allows you to change the shooting frame rate to achieve a slow motion effect

during playback.

Pre-recording: The camcorder will start recording a few seconds before you press the REC button. This is

especially useful when it is difficult to predict when to start recording.

Slow Motion Recording

When slow motion recording is activated, the camcorder records using a progressive frame rate (shooting frame

rate) that is different from the playback frame rate. Recording a clip at a higher frame rate than the [Frame Rate]

setting will result in a slow motion effect during playback (up to 1/5 of the original speed).

Sound is not recorded when slow motion recording is activated. Also, the maximum recording time of a single

clip is the equivalent of approximately 6 hours of playback time.

Slow motion recording is available only for XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips.

Available shooting frame rates and maximum recording time

* For clips recorded with the frame rate set to 23.98P, the playback bit rate will be 35 Mbps; for clips recorded with other frame

rates, it will be 45 Mbps.

1 Select [Recording Mode].

[

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Recording Mode]

2 Select [Slow Motion Recording] and then press SET.

• The message [The following settings were changed] will appear. Review the changes made automatically

and press SET.

• [SLOW STBY] appears at the top of the screen.

• The shooting frame rate appears next to the frame rate setting (the playback frame rate).

• When the shooting frame rate is set to 119.88P, it will appear as "120".

3Press the REC button to begin recording.

• The tally lamps illuminate.

• [SLOW STBY] changes to [

SLOW REC] while recording.

Operating modes:

Video configuration

Shooting frame rate Approx. maximum recording time for a single clip

Frame rate* Resolution/Color sampling

59.94P

1920x1080, YCbCr 4:2:2, 10 bit

119.88P

3 hr.

29.97P 1 hr. 30 min.

23.98P 1 hr. 12 min.

50.00P

100.00P

3 hr.

25.00P 1 hr. 30 min.

Shooting frame rate (fps)

[Frame Rate] setting (playback frame rate)

Special Recording Modes

116

4Press the REC button again to stop recording.

• The clip is recorded at the selected frame rate.

• The tally lamps go out and [SLOW STBY] appears at the top of the screen.

5 When you have finished recording, turn off the special recording mode.

• Repeat steps 1 and 2 selecting [Normal Recording] instead.

NOTES

• Slow motion recording cannot be used together with pre-recording.

• The shooting frame rate cannot be changed while recording.

• The time code signal will not be output from the SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal or TIME CODE terminal.

• If the video format or system frequency is changed, slow motion recording will be canceled and the shooting

frame rate will be reset to its default value.

• About the time code when slow motion recording is activated:

- The time code mode can be set to [Regen.], or to [Preset] with [Rec Run] running mode.

- If the time code running mode was set to [Free Run], the time code running mode will be changed

automatically to [Rec Run] when slow motion recording is activated.

- When the special recording mode is turned off, the time code running mode will return to its previous setting.

Pre-recording

When pre-recording is activated, the camcorder starts recording continuously into a temporary memory (approx.

3 seconds) so when you press the REC button, the clip will contain also a few seconds of video and audio

recorded before you pressed the button.

1 Select [Recording Mode].

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Recording Mode]

2 Select [Pre-Recording] and then press SET.

• [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.

3Press the REC button to begin recording.

• The tally lamps illuminate.

• [PRE REC STBY] changes to [

PRE REC] while recording.

4Press the REC button again to stop recording.

• The clip is recorded. The recorded clip will include a few seconds of video and audio recorded before the

REC button was pressed.

• The tally lamps go out and [PRE REC STBY] appears at the top of the screen.

5 When you have finished recording, turn off the special recording mode.

• Repeat steps 1 and 2 selecting [Normal Recording] instead.

NOTES

• Pre-recording cannot be used together with slow motion recording.

• If the video format or system frequency is changed, pre-recording will be canceled.

• About the time code when pre-recording is activated:

- The time code of the clip will start a few seconds before the REC button was pressed.

- The time code will be recorded with the running mode set to [Free Run].

- If the time code mode was set to [Regen.], or to [Preset] with [Rec Run] running mode, the time code

running mode will be changed automatically to [Free Run] when pre-recording is activated.

- When the special recording mode is turned off, the time code running mode will return to its previous

setting.

117

Infrared Recording

You can use the infrared mode to record in very dark situations using available infrared light. You can also use the

camcorder's infrared light to make the recordings even brighter, and select the color for the brighter areas in the

picture (white or green).

1 Set the INFRARED switch to ON.

• ; and = appear at the bottom left of the screen.

2 To change the color of highlights in the infrared picture,

select [IR Rec Color].

> [v(Camera Setup] > [IR Rec Color]

3 Select [White] or [Green] and then press SET.

4 To turn on the infrared light, select [IR Light].

>[v(Camera Setup] > [IR Light]

5 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• When the infrared light is on, = changes to .

Options

[Toggle]: Allows you to turn the infrared light on and off using an assignable button. Set an assignable

button (A 119) to [IR Light] in advance and press the assignable button to turn the infrared light

on/off.

[Always On]: The infrared light is always on while the camcorder is in infrared mode.

[Always Off]: The infrared light is always off.

NOTES

• When infrared recording is activated, the following changes take place.

- The camcorder switches to automatic gain and shutter speed adjustment, the aperture is fixed at maximum

aperture, and the ND filter is retracted and cannot be used.

- The AGC limit, light metering, AE shift and white balance settings cannot be used.

- When the camcorder switches to infrared mode, the autofocus may be activated momentarily and the focus

point may change. Check that the focus is correct.

• Depending on the light source, autofocus may not work well while zooming.

• In infrared mode the camcorder's sensor is considerably more sensitive to near-infrared light. Do not point the

lens at strong light or heat sources when infrared recording is activated. If there are such light/heat sources in

the picture, we recommend shielding the lens before switching the camcorder to infrared mode.

• If you set an assignable button to [IR Rec Color] (A 119), you can press the button to change the color of the

highlights in the infrared picture.

Operating modes:

Infrared Recording

118

119

Customization

Assignable Buttons

The camcorder offers a number of buttons to which you can assign various functions (assignable buttons).

Assign often-used functions to the buttons you find most convenient, to personalize the camcorder to your

needs and preferences.

You can find 14 assignable buttons on the camcorder’s body. The optional RC-V100 Remote Controller offers 4

additional assignable buttons that can be used when it is connected to the camcorder. The button names

printed on the camcorder next to assignable buttons 1 to 7 also indicate their default settings.

Changing the Assigned Function

1Press the MENU button and, while holding it pressed down, press the assignable button whose

function you wish to change.

• A list of available functions appears, with the current function assigned to the button highlighted.

• You can also select the menu settings in the > [ Assignable Buttons] menu (pages ! and " for

assignable buttons 1 to 14 on the camcorder; page # for the assignable buttons on the RC-V100).

• Assignable buttons 8 to 13 are not available in mode.

Operating modes:

Assignable Buttons

120

2Push the joystick up/down to select the desired function and then press SET.

• The selected function will be assigned to the selected button.

• If you selected one of the preset functions, the rest of the procedure is not necessary. If you selected [User

Setting], continue the procedure to register a menu setting.

3 Navigate the menus to find the menu setting you want to register and then press SET.

• The selected menu setting will be assigned to the selected button. User-selected settings will be indicated

with a icon in the [ Assignable Buttons] menu.

4Press the assignable button to use the assigned function as described in the following table.

NOTES

• You can check the [Assignable Buttons] status screens (A 199) to see what functions are currently assigned

to each button.

• You can reset only the functions assigned to the assignable buttons, without affecting other camcorder

settings, with the > [

! System Setup] > [Reset] > [Assignable Buttons] function. All the

assignable buttons will return to their default function.

Assignable functions

Functions can be set separately in mode and mode. Refer to the following table for assignable

functions and available modes.

Function name Description A

[(NONE)] No function assigned – the button is disabled. Ü Ü –

[Image Stabilizer] Turns image stabilization on/off. Ü –

[Powered IS] Turns the Powered IS image stabilizer on/off. Ü –

[Face AF] Toggles the [Face AF] setting between [Face Priority] and [Face Only]. Ü –

[Face Det. & Tracking] Turns the face detection and tracking function on/off. Ü –

[Tracking] Turns the tracking function on/off. Ü – 83

[Focus Limit] Applies/removes the focus limit set in the menu. Ü – 84

[Focus Guide] Turns the Dual Pixel Focus Guide function on/off. Ü – 77

[Peaking: All] Turns peaking on/off. Ü –

[Peaking: LCD],

[Peaking: VF],

[Peaking: SDI],

[Peaking: HDMI]

Turns peaking on/off on the LCD screen, viewfinder, and video output from the

SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

Ü –

[Magn.: All] Turns magnification on/off. Ü –

[Magn.: VF+LCD],

[Magn.: SDI/HDMI]

Turns magnification on/off on the LCD screen and viewfinder (together) and on

video output from either the SDI or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

Ü –

[Digital Zoom] Turns the 300x digital zoom on/off. Ü –

[Tele-converter]

Cycles through the digital tele-converter options in the following order:

6.0x  3.0x  1.5x  Off.

Ü –

[Push Auto Iris]

The camcorder adjusts the aperture automatically only while the button is held

pressed down.

Ü – 62

[ND +], [ND –]

Cycles through ND filter settings in increasing (higher density) or decreasing

(lower density) order, respectively.

Ü – 60

[AE Shift +], [AE Shift –]

Adjusts the target set for automatic exposure adjustment making it brighter or

darker, respectively.

Ü – 63

[Backlight], [Spotlight] Turns the respective light metering option on/off. Ü – 64

121

Assignable Buttons

[IR Rec Color]

Changes the color of bright areas in the infrared picture between white and

green.

Ü –

117

[IR Light]

Only when > [v(Camera Setup] > [IR Light] is set to [Toggle],

turns the camcorder's infrared light on/off.

Ü –

[Zebra: All] Turns zebra patterns on/off. Ü –

[Zebra: LCD], [Zebra: VF],

[Zebra: SDI],

[Zebra: HDMI]

Turns zebra patters on/off on the LCD screen, viewfinder, and video output from

the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

Ü –

[WFM: All] Turns the waveform monitor on/off. Ü Ü

107

[WFM: LCD], [WFM: VF],

[WFM: SDI], [WFM: HDMI]

Turns the waveform monitor on/off on the LCD screen, viewfinder, and video

output from the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

Ü Ü

[LUT: All] Turns on/off the application of the selected LUT. Ü –

149

[LUT: LCD], [LUT: VF],

[LUT: SDI], [LUT: HDMI]

Turns on/off the application of the selected LUT on the LCD screen, viewfinder,

and video output from the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

Ü –

[Set White Balance] Starts the white balance calibration for a custom white balance setting. Ü – 69

[AWB Lock] While using auto white balance (AWB), locks the current white balance settings. Ü – 68

[¼ Daylight],

[É Tungsten],

[

Kelvin]

Changes the white balance mode to the respective option. Ü – 68

[LCD Setup] Opens the [

! Monitoring Setup] menu. Ü Ü

[Viewfinder Setup] Opens the [

" Monitoring Setup] menu. Ü Ü

[OSD Output: SDI/HDMI] Turns on/off the camcorder's onscreen displays on all video outputs at once.

Ü Ü 148

[OSD Output: SDI],

[OSD Output: HDMI]

Turns on/off the camcorder's onscreen displays on video output from the SDI

terminal or HDMI OUT terminal, respectively.

[Display] Changes the onscreen display level. Ü Ü 47

[TL-U58], [WA-U58] Toggles the [Conversion Lens] setting between the respective option and [Off]. Ü – 75

[Markers] Turns onscreen markers on/off. Ü – 87

[Color Bars] Turns color bars on/off. Ü – 106

[Photo]* Records a photo. Ü – 181

[Review Recording] Plays back the last clip recorded in mode. Ü – 114

[Time Code] Opens the [

# System Setup] menu. Ü – 90

[Time Code Hold]* Puts the time code display on hold or resumes it. Ü Ü 91

[Add Shot Mark] Adds a shot mark to the clip. Ü Ü 109

[Add $ Mark] Adds an $ mark to the clip. Ü Ü

141

[Add % Mark] Adds a % mark to the clip. Ü Ü

[Headphones +],

[Headphones –]

Increases/reduces the headphone volume, respectively. Ü Ü 138

[Monitor Channels]

Switches the audio channels output from the × (headphone) terminal and the

built-in speaker.

Ü Ü 152

[Audio Level Indicator] Turns the audio level meter on/off. Ü Ü 101

[FUNC]

Enters the direct setting mode, replicating the function of the camcorder’s FUNC

button.

Ü – 54

[Slow Motion Recording] Turns slow motion recording on/off. Ü – 115

[Output: 60



60 (24) fps]

When the frame rate is 59.94P or 59.94i, toggles the frame rate of video output

terminals and the LCD screen between said frame rates and 24 fps or 30 fps,

respectively.

Ü –

–

[Output: 60



60 (30) fps]

Ü –

[Shutter]

Enters the direct setting mode with the shutter speed highlighted and ready to be

adjusted.

Ü – 57

Function name Description A

Assignable Buttons

122

* Function can be used only by assigning it to a button.

[Gain]

Enters the direct setting mode with the gain value highlighted and ready to be

adjusted.

Ü – 59

[White Balance]

Enters the direct setting mode with the white balance mode highlighted and

ready to be adjusted.

Ü – 67

[Status] Displays the status screens. Ü Ü 197

[Audio Status] Displays the [Audio] status screens. Ü Ü 200

[Custom Picture] Opens the most recently opened [/ ! Custom Picture] submenu. Ü – 123

[My Menu] Opens the [¥!My Menu] customized menu. Ü – 26

[Initialize Media] Opens the [Initialize Media] submenu. Ü Ü 35

[User Setting]*

Customizable slot. Assign to the button any menu setting you would like to

Ü Ü –

Function name Description A

123

Custom Picture Settings

The camcorder lets you change many settings (A 126) that control various aspects of the image produced. As

a set, all these settings are treated as a single custom picture file. After adjusting the desired settings to your

preference, you can save up to 20 custom picture files (in the camcorder or on an SD card), and load them later

to apply exactly the same settings (A 125). Only SD card B can be used to save and load custom picture files.

NOTES

• Custom picture files are exclusively compatible for use only with XF705 camcorders.

Selecting Custom Picture Files

Select a custom picture file to apply its settings to your recordings or to edit, rename, protect, or transfer it.

1 Select [Select].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Select]

2 Select the desired file and then press SET.

• Select one of the custom picture files saved in the camcorder (C1 to C20). To use the settings of a custom

picture file saved on a card, copy the file to the camcorder in advance (A 125).

• When you close the menu, the selected custom picture file’s settings will be applied.

• The icon of the [Gamma] setting in effect will appear on the left of the screen. If the detailed settings were

activated ( > [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Activate Other Settings] is set to [On]), will appear on

the left of the screen.

NOTES

• About changing custom picture related settings using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller

- When an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the camcorder, you can press the remote

controller’s CUSTOM PICT. button to open the [/ ! Custom Picture] menu.

- If a protected custom picture file is selected on the camcorder, custom picture related settings cannot be

changed using the remote controller.

- Adjusting custom picture related settings using the remote controller will change the settings registered

under the currently selected custom picture file. If you want to keep an important custom picture file, copy it

in advance to an SD card or select in advance a custom picture file you do not mind changing.

Editing a Custom Picture File’s Settings

1 Select a custom picture file (A 123).

2 Turn off the preset color settings.

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Preset] > [Off]

3 If necessary, change the gamma curve, color space and/or color matrix (A 126).

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Gamma], [Color Space], [Color Matrix]

4 Select the desired setting and then press SET.

5 To change the custom picture’s detailed settings, activate the custom picture’s detailed settings.

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Activate Other Settings] > [On]

Operating modes:

Custom Picture Settings

124

6 Open the [Other Settings] submenu.

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [Other Settings]

7 Select a custom picture setting and then press SET.

8 Change the setting to the desired level and then press SET.

• Refer to Available Custom Picture Settings (A 127) for details on the various settings.

• Repeat steps 7 and 8 for other settings, as necessary.

• When you close the menu, the new custom picture settings will be applied.

Resetting Custom Picture Files

1 Select a custom picture file (A 123).

2 Select [Reset].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Reset]

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

Renaming Custom Picture Files

1 Select a custom picture file (A 123).

Select

[Rename].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Rename]

3 Select [Input] and then press SET.

• Enter the desired file name (up to 8 characters) using the keyboard screen (A 27).

Protecting Custom Picture Files

Protecting a custom picture file prevents its settings from being accidentally changed.

1 Select a custom picture file (A 123).

2 Select [Protect].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Protect]

3 Select [Protect] and then press SET.

• In the custom picture file selection screen,

will appear next to the file name.

• To remove protection settings, select [Unprotect] instead.

125

Custom Picture Settings

Copying Custom Picture Files

You can transfer custom picture files between the camcorder and SD card B.

Copying a File from the Camcorder to SD Card B

1 Insert a card into the camcorder’s SD card slot B.

2 Select a custom picture file (A 123).

3 Select [Copy to SD Card B].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Copy to SD Card B]

4 Select the destination file and then press SET.

• Select an existing custom picture file to overwrite it or [New File] to save the settings as a new custom

picture file on the card.

5 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The file on SD card B will be overwritten or a new file will be created on the card.

6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Replacing a File in the Camcorder with a File on SD Card B

1 Insert the card with the desired custom picture file into the camcorder’s SD card slot B.

2 Select an unprotected custom picture file that you wish to replace (A 123).

3 Select [Load from SD Card B].

> [/ ! Custom Picture] > [File] > [Load from SD Card B]

4 Select the file with the settings that you want to replicate and then press SET.

5 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The file in the camcorder will be overwritten by the one on SD card B.

6 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Embedding the Custom Picture File in XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips

After adjusting the various settings, you can record the custom picture file in use together with the metadata of

XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips. When an XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip has an embedded custom picture file, you can

check the settings used to record the clip on the [Clip Info] screen (A 140).

1 Select [Add / File].

> [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Add / File]

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

• When [Off] is selected, the custom picture file is not recorded with the clips.

Custom Picture Settings

126

Available Custom Picture Settings

[/ ! Custom Picture] Menu

Menu items Setting options and additional information

[Preset] For XF-HEVC clips:

[Normal1 : BT.709], [Normal1 : BT.2020], [Wide DR : BT.709], [Wide DR : BT.2020],

[PQ : BT.2020], [HLG : BT.2020], [Canon Log 3 : BT.2020], [Canon Log 3 : BT.709], [Off]

For XF-AVC and MP4 clips:

[Normal1 : BT.709], [Wide DR : BT.709], [Canon Log 3 : BT.709], [Off]

The camcorder offers a number of preset color settings (combinations of color space, gamma curve

and color matrix). For details, refer to

Preset Color Settings (

65).

[Off]: Select this setting when you want to set a different combination of custom picture settings with

the individual custom picture settings described below.

[Gamma] [Normal 1 (Standard)], [Normal 2 (x4.0)], [Normal 3 (BT.709)], [Normal 4 (x5.0)], [Wide DR], [PQ]*,

[HLG]*, [Canon Log 3]

* Available only for XF-HEVC clips.

Changes the overall look of the image.

[Normal 1 (Standard)]: Standard picture for playback on TV monitors.

[Normal 2 (x4.0)]: Setting suitable for playback on TV monitors. Produces brighter highlights (bright

areas of the image) than with the [Normal 1 (Standard)] setting.

[Normal 3 (BT.709)]: Setting suitable for playback on TV monitors. Produces a more faithful black

gradation in the shadows (dark areas of the image) than with the [Normal 2 (x4.0)] setting.

[Normal 4 (x5.0)]: Setting suitable for playback on TV monitors. Produces even better black gradation

in the shadows (dark areas of the image) than with the [Normal 3 (BT.709)] setting.

[Wide DR]: Gamma curve with a very wide dynamic range. Optimized for playback on TV monitors.

[PQ]: HDR (high dynamic range) gamma curve compliant with the PQ standard defined by ITU-R

BT.2100.

[HLG]: HDR (high dynamic range) gamma curve compliant with the HLG standard defined by ITU-R

BT.2100.

[Canon Log 3]: Logarithmic gamma curve that requires image processing in post-production.

[Color Space] [BT.2020 Gamut], [BT.709 Gamut]

Determines the color space of the image for XF-HEVC clips only.

[BT.2020 Gamut]: Color space that meets ITU-R BT.2020 standards, which defines parameters for

ultra-high-definition television (4K/8K).

[BT.709 Gamut]: Standard color space that is compatible with sRGB specifications.

[Color Matrix] [Video], [Neutral]

The color matrix affects the overall color tonality of the image.

[Video]: Reproduces the colors of an EOS C300/EOS C500 camera with no custom picture settings

applied.

[Neutral]: Reproduces neutral colors.

Normal 4

Normal 2/3/4

Normal 3

Normal 1/2

Normal 1

Input

Output

Normal1

Wide DR

Canon Log 3

Input

Output

HLG

WideDR

Normal1

Input

Output

127

Custom Picture Settings

[/ ! Custom Picture] > [Other Settings] Submenu (Detailed Settings)

[HLG Color] [BT.2100], [Vivid]

Changes the quality of color reproduction when using the hybrid log gamma (HLG). This setting is

only available when [Gamma] is set to [HLG].

[BT.2100]: Color reproduction according to ITU-R BT.2100 specifications.

[Vivid]: More saturated color reproduction according to the 'Traditional Colour' approach in ITU-R

BT.2390.

[Activate Other Settings] [On], [Off]

Set this setting to [On] to enable the editing of the custom picture’s detailed settings explained in the

following table.

Menu items Setting options and additional information

[Black]*

[Master Pedestal] –50 to 50 (±0)

Increases or decreases the black level. Higher settings will make dark areas brighter but decrease

contrast. When [Gamma] is set to [Canon Log 3], this setting is not available.

[Master Black Red],

[Master Black Blue]

–50 to 50 (±0)

These settings correct the color cast in blacks. When [Gamma] is set to [Canon Log 3], these settings

are not available.

[Black Gamma]*

[Level] –50 to 50 (±0)

[Range], [Point] –20 to 50 (±0)

These settings control the lower part of the gamma curve (dark areas of the image). When [Gamma]

is set to [Wide DR], [PQ], [HLG] or [Canon Log 3], these settings are not available.

[Level]: Raises or lowers the lower part of the gamma curve.

[Range]: Selects the adjustment range from the selected [Point].

[Point]: Determines the shape of the lower part of the gamma curve.

[Low Key Satur.]*

[Activate] [On], [Off]

Set this setting to [On] to enable the adjustment of color saturation in dark areas with the [Level]

setting.

[Level] –50 to 50 (±0)

Specifies how saturated colors are in dark areas.

Menu items Setting options and additional information

Input

Output

[Point]

[Range]

[Level]

Custom Picture Settings

128

[Knee]*

[Activate] [On], [Off]

Set this setting to [On] to enable the adjustment of the knee point with the following settings. When

[Gamma] is set to [Wide DR], [PQ], [HLG] or [Canon Log 3], the [Knee] settings are not available.

[Automatic] [On], [Off]

Set this setting to [On] to enable the automatic adjustment of the [Knee] settings.

[Slope] –35 to 50 (±0)

[Point] 50 to 109 (95)

[Saturation] –10 to 10 (±0)

These settings control the upper part of the gamma curve (highlights of the image). By compressing

the highlights, you can prevent parts of the image from being overexposed.

[Slope]: Determines the slope of the gamma curve above the knee point.

[Point]: Sets the knee point of the gamma curve.

[Saturation]: Adjusts the color saturation in the highlights.

[Sharpness]*

[Level] –10 to 50 (±0)

Sets the sharpness level of the video output signal and the recorded signal.

[Detail Frequency] –8 to 8 (±0)

Sets the center frequency of horizontal sharpness. Setting higher values increases the frequency,

which, in turn, increases the sharpness.

[Coring Level] –30 to 50 (±0)

Sets the level of correction of artifacts caused by high sharpness levels (coring). Higher values

prevent sharpness from being applied to minute details, resulting in less noise.

[HV Detail Bal.] –8 to 8 (±0)

Adjusts the ratio between horizontal and vertical detail. Higher values emphasize vertical detail while

lower values emphasize horizontal detail.

[Limit] –50 to 50 (±0)

Restricts how much sharpness is applied.

Menu items Setting options and additional information

Input

OutputOutput

Input

[Slope]

[Point]

129

Custom Picture Settings

[Noise Reduction]*

[Level] [Automatic],1 (lowest level) to 12 (highest level), [Off]

Reduces the amount of noise that appears in the image.

[Skin Detail]*

[Effect Level] [High], [Middle], [Low], [Off]

[Hue] –16 to 16 (±0)

[Chroma], [Area], [Y Level] 0 to 31 (16)

The camcorder applies a softening filter to areas in the picture with skin tones to give a more

pleasant appearance. By changing these settings, you can determine what areas will be detected as

skin tones. A zebra pattern will appear on the screen over areas of the image that are detected as

having skin tones.

[Effect Level]: Adjusts the level of the filter.

[Hue]: Adjusts the hue for detection of skin tones.

[Chroma]: Adjusts the color saturation for detection of skin tones.

[Area]: Adjusts the color range for detection of skin tones.

[Y Level]: Adjusts the brightness for detection of skin tones.

[White Balance]*

[R Gain], [B Gain] –50 to 50 (±0)

These settings adjust the amount of white balance throughout the whole image by changing the

intensity of red tones ([R gain]) and blue tones ([B Gain]).

[Color Matrix Tuning]*

[Gain] –50 to 50 (±0)

[Phase] –18 to 18 (±0)

These settings adjust the color intensity ([Gain]) and color phase ([Phase]) of the color matrix,

affecting the color tones of the whole image.

[R-G], [R-B], [G-R], [G-B],

[B-R], [B-G]

–50 to 50 (±0)

Each matrix changes the tint of the picture along the color gradations detailed below, affecting the

color tones of the whole image.

[R-G]: cyan/green and red/magenta; [R-B]: cyan/blue and red/yellow;

[G-R]: magenta/red and green/cyan; [G-B]: magenta/blue and green/yellow;

[B-R]: yellow/red and blue/cyan; [B-G]: yellow/green and blue/magenta.

[Color Correction]*

[Select Area] [Area A&B], [Area B], [Area A], [Off]

The camcorder detects areas with certain color characteristics (color phase, chroma, area and Y

level) and corrects them when recording. You can set the color correction for up to two different areas

(A and B) and apply the color correction to either one ([Area A] or [Area B]) or both of them ([Area

A&B]). While color correction is activated, a zebra pattern will appear on the screen over areas of the

image detected as having the characteristics specified for area A or area B.

[Area A Setting Phase],

[Area B Setting Phase]

0 to 31 (0)

These settings determine the color phase of the area to be corrected (A or B, respectively).

[Area A Setting Chroma],

[Area A Setting Area],

[Area A Setting Y Level],

[Area B Setting Chroma],

[Area B Setting Area],

[Area B Setting Y Level]

0 to 31 (16)

These settings determine the following color characteristics of the area to be corrected (A or B,

respectively).

[Area A Setting Chroma], [Area B Setting Chroma]: Color saturation.

[Area A Setting Area], [Area B Setting Area]: Color range.

[Area A Setting Y Level], [Area B Setting Y Level]: Brightness.

[Area A Revision Level],

[Area B Revision Level]

–50 to 50 (±0)

These settings adjust the amount of correction applied to the color saturation in the corrected area

(A or B, respectively).

Menu items Setting options and additional information

Custom Picture Settings

130

* Settings not available when infrared recording is activated.

NOTES

• If editing of the custom picture file's detailed settings is enabled ( > [/ ! Custom Picture] >

[Activate Other Settings] is set to [On]), when an optional RC-V100 Remote Controller is connected to the

camcorder, the following custom picture settings can be changed using the buttons and dials on the remote

controller.

- [Other Settings] > [Black] > [Master Pedestal], [Master Black Red], [Master Black Blue]

- [Other Settings] > [Black Gamma] > [Level]

- [Other Settings] > [Knee] > [Automatic], [Slope], [Point] (only when [Knee] > [Activate] is set to [On])

- [Other Settings] > [Sharpness] > [Level]

- [Other Settings] > [White Balance] > [R Gain], [B Gain]

[Area A Revision Phase],

[Area B Revision Phase]

–18 to 18 (±0)

These settings adjust the amount of correction applied to the color phase in the corrected area

(A or B, respectively).

[Other Functions]*

[Over 100%] [Through], [Press], [Clip]

Determines how the camcorder handles video signals exceeding 100%. When [Gamma] is set to

[PQ], [HLG] or [Canon Log 3], this setting is not available.

[Through]: Leave the signal unchanged.

[Clip]: Clip the signal at 100%.

[Press]: Compress a signal of up to 108% down to 100% levels.

Menu items Setting options and additional information

131

Saving and Loading Camcorder Settings

After you adjust settings in the various menus, you can save those settings in the camcorder or on an SD card.

Only SD card B can be used to save and load camcorder settings files. You can load those settings at a later

date or on another XF705 camcorder so that you can use that camcorder in the same way.

Saving Camcorder Settings

1To save the camcorder’s settings on an SD card, insert a card into the camcorder’s SD card slot B.

2 Select [Save].

[

! System Setup] > [Transfer Menu/

] > [Save]

3 Select [To Camera] or [To SD Card B] and then press SET.

4 Select [OK] and press SET.

• The camcorder’s menu settings will be saved to the selected destination. If menu settings were previously

saved, the old file will be overwritten by the current menu settings.

5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Loading Camcorder Settings

1 To load menu settings from a card, insert the card with the desired camcorder settings file into the

camcorder’s SD card slot B.

2 Select [Load].

[

! System Setup] > [Transfer Menu/

] > [Load]

3 Select [From Camera] or [From SD Card B] and then press SET.

4 Select [OK] and press SET.

• The camcorder’s menu settings will be replaced by the settings saved on the selected source. Then, the

screen will turn black momentarily and the camcorder will restart.

NOTES

• The following menu settings and any passwords that were set by the user are not saved with this operation.

- >[v ' Camera Setup] > [Color Bars]

- >[3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [User Memo]

- >[A ! Assistance Functions] > [Magn.: VF+LCD] and [Magn.: SDI/HDMI]

- >[

! Network Settings] > [Network Functions]

- Encryption keys/passwords under >[

! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

- Browser Remote passwords under >[

! Network Settings] > [Browser Remote Settings] >

[Full: Password], [Camera: Password] and [Meta: Password]

- The password under >[

! Network Settings] > [FTP Transfer Settings] > [FTP: Password]

• When menu settings are loaded with this operation, even protected custom picture files in the camcorder will

be replaced.

• Camcorder settings files are exclusively compatible for use only with XF705 camcorders.

Operating modes:

Saving and Loading Camcorder Settings

132

133

Playback

This section explains how to play back recordings with the camcorder. For details on playing back recordings

using an external monitor, refer to Connecting to an External Monitor (A 147).

Clip Index Screen

When you set the camcorder to mode, an index screen

will appear. From the index screen you can access the various

playback functions.

If the selected SD card contains clips recorded at a system

frequency other than the one currently used by the camcorder,

you will not be able to play back the clips. In such case, change

the camcorder's system frequency (A 51) to match the

recordings on the card.

Set the camcorder to mode (A 22).

• The clip index screen appears. The index screen that appears depends on the currently selected recording

format but you can change the index screen (A 135).

Operating modes:

Playback

134

XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips only.

For XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips recorded using slow motion recording, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both

be displayed.

Switching SD Cards

If both card slots contain a card, press the SLOT SELECT

button to play back recordings from the other card.

8 109

1716 18

1Key lock (A 43)

2 Shot mark

(A 109, 143)

3 $ mark

/% mark

(A 109, 141)

4 Orange selection frame

5 Custom picture file embedded

(A 125)

6 XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips: Clip identification

(camera index, reel number and clip number)

(A 48)

MP4 clips or photos: Recording number (A 49)

7 Recording date and time

8 Clip thumbnail

9 SD card (the one currently selected appears in

white)

10 Index screen currently displayed (A 135)

11 Network connection (A 162) /

FTP transfer (A 179)

12 Clip number / Total number of clips

13 Recording date (month and day only) and time

14 Clip’s start time code

15 Clip duration

16 Slow motion recording

(A 115)

17 Color sampling and resolution (A 52)

18 Frame rate

(A 51)

135

Playback

Switching Index Screens

The index screen that appears when you switch to mode

depends on the current recording settings. Change the index screen to

play back clips recorded in a different format or photos.

[XF-HEVC Index]:

Index screen of XF-HEVC clips recorded on the selected card.

[XF-AVC Index]:

Index screen of XF-AVC clips recorded on the selected card.

[MP4 Index]: Index screen of MP4 clips recorded on the selected card.

[Photo Index]:Index screen of photos recorded on SD card B (only).

1 Press the INDEX button.

• The index screen selection menu will appear.

2 Select the desired index screen and then press SET.

• The selected index screen appears.

• Select [Cancel] instead to cancel the operation.

Playing Back Clips

After you select a clip to play back from the index screen, you can

control the playback with the buttons on the camcorder or with the

joystick and onscreen joystick guide (A 137). You can also use the

supplied wireless controller.

1 Move the orange selection frame to the clip you want to play

back.

2Press the

button to start playback.

• Playback will start.

• Press the

button again or press SET to pause/resume

the playback.

• When the selected clip ends, playback will continue

automatically to the next clip. When the last clip in the index

screen ends, playback will be paused.

• Press the

button to stop the playback and return to the index screen.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while an access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in

permanent data loss.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

- Do not open the card slot cover of the card being accessed and do not remove the card.

NOTES

• You may notice brief stops in video or audio playback between clips.

Playback

136

• Depending on the clip, the camcorder may adjust some controls internally to display a more suitable image on

the LCD screen and viewfinder.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file is set to a setting other than [Canon Log 3], the

camcorder will produce an image that approximates the look of video displayed on a compatible monitor

correctly configured.

- When the [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file is set to [Canon Log 3], the camcorder will produce

colors that approximate the look of the BT.709 color space, regardless of the color space used for

recording.

Onscreen Displays

For XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips recorded using slow motion recording, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both

be displayed.

XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips only.

Only when > [¢ $ Monitoring Setup] > [Custom Display] > [Audio Level Indicator] is set to [On].

Only XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips when > [¢ $ Monitoring Setup] > [Custom Display] > [Camera Data] is set to

[On].

Only when > [¢ $ Monitoring Setup] > [Custom Display] > [Date/Time] is set to [On].

65 7 8

252322 24 26

12119 10

1Key lock (A 43)

2 Fan operation (A 50) and temperature warning

(A 208)

3 Joystick guide (A 137)

4 Jump interval setting (A 137)

5 Remaining battery charge (A 45)

6 Network connection (A 162) /

FTP transfer (A 179)

7SD card

8 Playback operation

9 Frame rate

(A 51)

10 Custom picture file embedded

(A 125)

11 $ mark

/% mark

(A 109, 141)

12 Time code (A 90)

13 Clip number / Total number of clips

14 Color sampling (A 52)

15 Resolution (A 52)

16 Video format (A 51)

17 Output onscreen displays (A 148)

18 Wireless controller disabled (A 38)

19 Audio level meter

20 Audio output channels (A 152)

21 Headphone volume (A 138)

22 Shutter speed

(A 55)

23 Gain

(A 58)

24 Aperture value

(A 61)

25 User bit (A 93)

26 XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips: Recording date and

time

, MP4 clips: Recording date

PLAY Playback

PAUSE Playback pause

Frame reverse/Frame advance

F FWD x5

Fast playback

F REV x5 Fast reverse playback

30s

10%

Jump forward 30 seconds or

10% of the clip

10s,

10%

Jump back 10 seconds or 10%

of the clip

137

Playback

Playback Controls

When you play back a clip, operate the buttons on the camcorder,

the joystick and joystick guide or the supplied wireless controller.

You can press the DISP button to show/hide the joystick guide.

Refer to the following table.

Available playback types

NOTES

• There is no audio during any of the playback types listed in the previous table.

• You can press the Ò button during fast playback to return to playback at normal speed.

• During some playback modes, you may notice some anomalies (blocky video artifacts, banding, etc.) in the

playback picture.

• The speed indicated on the screen is approximate.

• The amount of time equivalent to moving one frame forward is longer than moving one frame back and

depends on the video format used: approx. 0.5 seconds for XF-AVC and MP4 clips and 1 second for

XF-HEVC clips.

Playback type Operation

Fast playback

Playback at approximately 5x

the normal speed.

Buttons: Press the Ø or × button.

Wireless controller: Press the Ø or × button.

Frame advance/reverse

Joystick: During playback pause, push the joystick up or down.

Wireless controller: During playback pause, press the Ô or Ó button.

Jump back/forward within the

clip

Joystick: During playback, push the joystick up or down.

You can press the FUNC button to change the jump interval between [sec] to jump 30 seconds forward/

10 seconds back, and [%] to jump 10% of the clip.

Skip to the beginning of the

next clip

Buttons: Press the Ù button.

Joystick: Push the joystick right.

Wireless controller: Press the ß button.

Skip to the beginning of the

current clip

Buttons: Press the Ú button.

Joystick: Push the joystick left.

Wireless controller: Press the à button.

Skip to the previous clip

Buttons: Press the Ú button twice.

Joystick: Push the joystick left twice.

Wireless controller: Press the à button twice.

Return to normal playback

mode

Buttons: Press the Ò button.

Joystick: Press the joystick itself (SET button).

Wireless controller: Press the Ò button.

Playback

138

Adjusting the Volume

You can use headphones or the built-in speaker to listen to the

audio during normal playback. When you connect headphones to

the × (headphone) terminal, the speaker will be muted. The audio

signal will also be output from the SDI terminal and HDMI OUT

terminal.

Adjust the volume with the > [

! Audio Setup] >

[Headphone Volume] or [Speaker Volume]* setting.

The audio signal will also be output from the SDI terminal and HDMI

OUT terminal.

* Available only in mode.

NOTES

• For details on changing the audio channel, refer to Audio Output

(A 152).

• If you set an assignable button to [Headphones +] or

[Headphones –] (A 119), you can press the button to adjust the headphone volume without using the menu.

(headphone)

terminal

Built-in speaker

139

Clip Operations

Besides playing back a clip, you can perform other operations from the clip menu, such as deleting a clip or

displaying clip information. Refer to the following table for available functions and refer to the following pages for

more details of the functions.

Clip menu functions

* If the clip already contains an $ or % mark, the [Delete] option will appear in the clip menu.

** Appears only when a clip requires recovery. In such case, only [Cancel], [Recover Clip] and [Delete Clip] will appear in the clip

menu.

Using the Clip Menu

1 Select a clip and then press SET.

• The clip menu appears. Available functions depend on the index screen and which functions are enabled.

2 Select the desired function and then press SET.

• The function is enabled. For some functions, further action may be required. Follow the onscreen directions.

• Press the CANCEL button instead to return to the clip index screen.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while an access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in

permanent data loss.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

- Do not open the card slot cover of the card being accessed and do not remove the card.

NOTES

• Make sure the LOCK switch on the SD card is not set to prevent writing.

Operating modes:

Menu item Description

Index screen

[XF-HEVC],

[XF-AVC]

[MP4]

[Cancel] Closes the clip menu. Ü Ü –

[Display Clip Info] Displays the clip information screen. Ü Ü 140

[Add $ Mark]/[Delete $ Mark]* Adds or deletes an $ mark. Ü – 141

[Add % Mark]/[Delete % Mark]* Adds or deletes a % mark. Ü – 141

[Del. All Shot Marks] Deletes all the shot marks from a clip. Ü – 143

[Copy Clip] Copies a clip from the selected SD card to the other. Ü Ü 141

[Recover Clip]** Recovers a clip. Ü Ü 37

[Delete Clip] Deletes a clip. Ü Ü 142

[Delete User Memo] Deletes the user memo and GPS information of a clip. Ü – 143

[FTP Transfer] Transfers a clip using the FTP protocol. Ü Ü 179

Clip Operations

140

Displaying Clip Information

Select [Display Clip Info] in the clip menu to display the selected clip’s information screen ([Clip Info] screen).

Push the joystick left/right to switch to the previous/next clip. When you have finished, press the CANCEL button

to return to the clip index screen.

XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips only.

For XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips recorded using slow motion recording, the shooting frame rate and playback frame rate will both

be displayed.

Displaying the User Memo (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

From the [Clip Info] screen, push the joystick up to display the [Q] screen. In this screen you can check details

about the embedded user memo. Push the joystick down to return to the [Clip Info] screen.

Displaying Custom Picture Settings (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

When an XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip contains an embedded custom picture file (A 125), you can check the

custom picture settings used when the clip was recorded. From the [Clip Info] screen, push the joystick down to

display the first of four screens with the clip’s custom picture settings. Repeatedly push down the joystick to

check the information screens in the following order:

[/ Data 1/4] to [/ Data 4/4] screens  [Q] screen  [Clip Info] screen.

546

1 Thumbnail of the selected clip

2 Thumbnail of the next clip

3 Thumbnail of the previous clip

4 SD card (the one currently selected appears in

white)

5 Clip geotagged with GPS information (A 112)

6 Slow motion recording

(A 115)

7 Clip number / Total number of clips

8 Recording date and time

9 XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips: Clip file name (A 48)

MP4 clips: Recording number (A 49)

10 Compression, bit rate and resolution (A 51)

11 Frame rate

(A 51)

12 Shot mark

(A 109, 143) and $ mark

% mark

(A 109, 141)

13 Custom picture file embedded

(A 125)

14 Color sampling (A 52)

15 Clip’s start time code

16 Clip’s end time code

17 Clip duration

141

Clip Operations

Adding $ Marks or % Marks (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

You can add an OK mark ($) or check mark (%) to an XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip during playback or from the

index screen.

Adding an $ Mark or % Mark during Playback

To add an $ mark or % mark to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an assignable

button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] in advance.

1 Set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 119).

• To add both types of clip marks (to different clips), set one assignable button to [Add $ Mark] and another

assignable button to [Add % Mark].

2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button to add the clip mark.

• A message indicating the clip mark will appear and the selected clip mark will be added to the clip.

• Adding a clip mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.

•An

mark or % mark appears at the top right of the playback screen.

Adding an $ Mark or % Mark from the Index Screen

1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

•An $ mark or % appears next to the selected clip’s thumbnail.

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [Add $ Mark] or [Add % Mark] (A 119), you can add an $ mark or %

mark to clips also from the index screen.

• A clip cannot have both an $ mark and % mark at the same time. When you add a % mark to a clip with an

$ mark, the $ mark will be deleted. Similarly, when you add an $ mark to a clip with a % mark, the %

mark will be deleted.

Deleting $ Marks or % Marks (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

1 Select the desired XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip from the index screen and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Delete $ Mark] or [Delete % Mark] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The selected mark is deleted.

Copying Clips

You can copy clips from one card to the other.

Copying a Single Clip

1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Copy Clip] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The clip is copied to the other SD card. While the clip is being copied, you can press SET to cancel.

Clip Operations

142

4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Copying All the Clips

1 Select [Copy All Clips].

> [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [Clips] > [Copy All Clips]

2 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The clips are copied to the other SD card. While clips are being copied, you can press SET to interrupt the

operation.

3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

NOTES

• In the following cases, you will not be able to copy recordings:

- If the card compartment cover is open.

- If the LOCK switch on the destination card is set to prevent writing.

- For MP4 clips: If a file number (A 188) cannot be created because the number of folders and files on the

destination card has reached its maximum.

• Video stream files over 4 GB in size cannot be copied onto SDHC cards.

• If the destination card already contains an XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip with the same clip number, the clip being

copied will be renamed to the number following the largest clip number in the card.

Deleting Clips

You can delete clips as long as they don't have an $ mark. To delete such clips, delete the $ mark

beforehand.

Deleting a Single Clip

1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Delete Clip] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• While the clip is being deleted, the operation cannot be canceled.

4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Deleting All the Clips

1 Select [Delete All Clips].

> [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [Clips] > [Delete All Clips]

2 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• While clips are being deleted, you can press SET to interrupt the operation. Clips deleted before you press

SET will be deleted permanently.

3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

143

Clip Operations

Deleting the User Memo and GPS Information (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

1 Select the desired XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Delete User Memo] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The user memo and GPS information are deleted from the clip.

Adding and Deleting Shot Marks (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips)

You can add shot marks to shots in an XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip you want to set apart.

Adding Shot Marks during Playback

To add a shot mark to a clip during playback or playback pause, you must first set an assignable button to [Add

Shot Mark] in advance.

1 Set an assignable button to [Add Shot Mark] (A 119).

2 During playback or playback pause, press the assignable button at the point in the clip where you want to add

the shot mark.

• A message indicating the shot mark appears on the screen and the shot mark is added to the clip.

• Adding a shot mark to a clip during playback will pause the playback.

• When a clip contains a shot mark, a ! mark appears in the index screen next to the clip's thumbnail.

Deleting All the Shot Marks from a Clip

1 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

2 Select [Del. All Shot Marks] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• All the shot marks will be deleted from the clip.

Clip Operations

144

145

External Connections

Video Output Configuration

The video signal output from the SDI terminal and HDMI

OUT terminal, depends on the clip’s video

configuration and on various menu settings.

Recording Video Signal Configuration and Video Output Configuration by Terminal

Refer to the following table for the video output configuration from each terminal, depending on the recording

video configuration used.

Operating modes:

Recording video configuration Menu settings Video output configuration

Video format

Resolution/

Color sampling

Frame rate Scan mode

Maximum

resolution

SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal

XF-HEVC

3840x2160

YCbCr 4:2:2

10 bit

59.94P

50.00P

3840x2160 3840x2160 (59.94P/50.00P)

1920x1080 1920x1080 (59.94P/50.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

29.97P

25.00P

3840x2160 3840x2160 (29.97P/25.00P)

1920x1080 1920x1080 (29.97P/25.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF —

1920x1080

(29.97PsF/25.00PsF)

1920x1080

(59.94i/50.00i)

23.98P

3840x2160 3840x2160 (23.98P)

1920x1080 1920x1080 (23.98P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i)

1920x1080

YCbCr 4:2:2

10 bit

59.94P

50.00P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (59.94P/50.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

59.94i

50.00i

—

1920x1080 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

29.97P

25.00P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (29.97P/25.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF —

1920x1080

(29.97PsF/25.00PsF)

1920x1080

(59.94i/50.00i)

23.98P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (23.98P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i)

Video Output Configuration

146

> [

! Recording/Media Setup] > [Rec Format].

> [

" System Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Scan Mode].

> [

" System Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Max Res.].

When > [B " System Setup] > [SDI Output] is set to [Off], the output signal will change automatically depending on

the capabilities of the external monitor.

XF-AVC

3840x2160

YCbCr 4:2:0

8 bit

29.97P

25.00P

3840x2160 3840x2160 (29.97P/25.00P)

1920x1080 1920x1080 (29.97P/25.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF —

1920x1080

(29.97PsF/25.00PsF)

1920x1080

(59.94i/50.00i)

23.98P

3840x2160 3840x2160 (23.98P)

1920x1080 1920x1080 (23.98P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i)

1920x1080

YCbCr 4:2:0

8bit

59.94P

50.00P

1920x1080

(59.94P/50.00P)

1920x1080

(59.94P/50.00P)

720x480 (59.94P)

720x576 (50.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

59.94i

50.00i

1920x1080 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i/50.00i)

29.97P

25.00P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (29.97P/25.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF —

1920x1080

(29.97PsF/25.00PsF)

1920x1080

(59.94i/50.00i)

23.98P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (23.98P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i)

MP4

1920x1080

YCbCr 4:2:0

8 bit

59.94P

50.00P

1920x1080

(59.94P/50.00P)

1920x1080

(59.94P/50.00P)

720x480 (59.94P)

720x576 (50.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (54.94i/50.00i)

29.97P

25.00P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (29.97P/25.00P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P/50.00P)

PsF —

1920x1080

(29.97PsF/25.00PsF)

1920x1080

(59.94i/50.00i)

23.98P

1920x1080 1920x1080 (23.98P)

1280x720 1280x720 (59.94P)

PsF — 1920x1080 (59.94i)

1280x720

YCbCr 4:2:0

8 bit

59.94P — — 1280x720 (59.94P)

Recording video configuration Menu settings Video output configuration

Video format

Resolution/

Color sampling

Frame rate Scan mode

Maximum

resolution

SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal

147

Connecting to an External Monitor

When you connect the camcorder to an external monitor (to monitor the recording or for playback), use the

terminal on the camcorder that matches the one you wish to use on the monitor. Then, select the video signal

output configuration (A 145).

Connection diagram

We recommend that you power the camcorder from a power outlet using the compact power adapter.

Using the SDI Terminal

The digital signal that is output from the SDI terminal includes the video signal, audio signal (up to 4 channels),

time code signal and the recording command signal.

When using the SDI terminal, you can output various assistance displays (onscreen displays, markers, etc.) in

order to check them also on an external monitor.

1 Select [SDI/HDMI Max Res.].

> [

" System Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Max Res.]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

3 Select [SDI Output].

> [

" System Setup] > [SDI Output]

4 Select [On] and then press SET.

5 Select [3G-SDI Mapping].

> [

" System Setup] > [3G-SDI Mapping]

6 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• You can select a video output signal compliant with Level A or Level B of the SMPTE ST 425-1 standard.

Operating modes:

HDMI OUT terminal

HDMI cable

(commercially available)

BNC cable

(commercially available)

SDI inputs

External monitor

HDMI inputs

SDI terminal

Connecting to an External Monitor

148

Using the HDMI OUT Terminal

The digital signal that is output from the HDMI OUT terminal includes the video signal and audio signal. You can

output also the time code signal and some assistance displays (onscreen displays, markers, etc.) in order to

check them also on an external monitor.

The audio output signal will be 2-channel linear PCM audio (16-bit, 48 kHz sampling). You can select which

audio channels to output (A 152).

1 Select [SDI/HDMI Max Res.].

> [

" System Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Max Res.]

2 Select the desired option and then press SET.

3 mode only: To output the time code signal, select [HDMI Time Code].

> [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [HDMI Time Code]

4 Select [On] and then press SET.

NOTES

• The HDMI OUT terminal is for output only. Do not connect the camcorder to another device’s output terminal

using the HDMI OUT terminal as this will cause a malfunction.

• Correct operation cannot be guaranteed when connecting the camcorder to DVI monitors.

• Video may not be output correctly depending on the monitor. In such case, use another terminal.

• You can set both > [

" Recording/Media Setup] > [Rec Command] and [HDMI Time Code] to

[On] to use the camcorder’s REC button to control also the recording operation of an external recorder

connected to the HDMI OUT terminal. The camcorder’s time code signal will be output as well.

Superimposing Onscreen Displays on Video Outputs

You can choose to output the camcorder's onscreen displays along with the video output from the SDI terminal

or HDMI OUT terminal to check the onscreen displays on an external monitor. This setting will not affect your

recordings.

1 Select the menu setting corresponding to the desired terminal.

> [

%* Monitoring Setup] > [OSD Output: SDI] or [OSD Output: HDMI]

* Appears on page $ in mode.

2 Select [On] and then press SET.

•In mode,

appears on the right of the screen (only if [

% Monitoring Setup] > [Custom

Display 2] > [OSD Output] is set to [On]). In mode, the icon appears on the right of the screen in the

playback screen.

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [OSD Output: SDI/HDMI] (A 119), you can press the button to turn on and

off the superimposing of onscreen displays on all video outputs.

• When the HDMI OUT terminal's output resolution is 720x480 or 720x576, the camcorder's onscreen displays

will not be output.

149

Applying a LUT to Screens/Video Outputs

While recording using special gamma curves, you can apply a LUT to the image displayed on the LCD screen,

viewfinder and external monitors (SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal). When a LUT is applied, the displayed

image will look as if a standard gamma curve were used, making it easier to check the image on the display

device used. To check the image on an external monitor, you will need a monitor that is compatible with the

video’s color space.

1 Select the menu setting corresponding to the desired screen or output terminal.

> [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [LUT: LCD] (LCD screen), [LUT: VF] (viewfinder), [LUT: SDI] or

[LUT: HDMI] (respective terminal)

2 Select the desired LUT and then press SET.

• The gamma curve and color space of the video output will change.

• If a LUT is not needed, select [Off].

• Repeat the procedure as necessary to apply a LUT to a different screen/output terminal.

Options

* Available only for video output from the SDI terminal and HDMI OUT terminal.

** Available only for the LCD screen and viewfinder.

Operating modes:

Applied LUT

Output Settings with LUT applied

Description

Gamma curve Color space

[Normal1 : BT.709]

[Normal2 : BT.709]

[Normal3 : BT.709]

[Normal4 : BT.709]

Normal 1

Normal 2

Normal 3

Normal 4

BT.709

LUT for viewing on the camcorder's screen or external monitors

compatible with BT.709 specifications. The available LUT depends on the

[Gamma] setting in the custom picture file.

[Wide DR : BT.709] Normal 1 BT.709

[Wide DR : BT.2020]* Wide DR BT.2020

LUT for viewing on external monitors compatible with ITU-R BT.2020

standards, which define parameters for ultra-high-definition television

(4K/8K).

[PQ : BT.2020]* PQ BT.2020

LUT for viewing HDR (high dynamic range) images on external monitors

compatible with the PQ standard defined by ITU-R BT.2100. The signal

output will use narrow range (video range) coding.

[HLG : BT.2020]* HLG BT.2020

LUT for viewing HDR (high dynamic range) images on external monitors

compatible with the HLG standard defined by ITU-R BT.2100. The signal

output will use narrow range (video range) coding.

[HDR Assist. (800%)]**

[HDR Assist. (400%)]**

Original gamma

curve

BT.709

LUT for viewing HDR (high dynamic range) images on the camcorder’s

screens (LCD/viewfinder). The LUT follows the BT.2100 transfer function

to convert a brightness range of 800% or 400% respectively into an

image that looks the same as video displayed on an HDR-compatible

display.

[Off] – – No LUT applied.

Applying a LUT to Screens/Video Outputs

150

Available LUT options by gamma curve and color space

Available LUTs depend on the combination of gamma curve and color space used, whether it was set through

one of the preset color settings or through the individual main settings in the custom picture file (A 126).

You can change the color quality to [BT.2100] or [Vivid] with the > [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [HLG Color] setting.

Available only for the LCD screen and viewfinder.

Available only for the video output from the SDI terminal and HDMI OUT terminal.

You can adjust the gain level with the > [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [Gain for HDRSDR Conv.] setting.

Custom picture Available LUTs

[Gamma] [Color Space] [Normal1 : BT.709] [Normal2 : BT.709] [Normal3 : BT.709] [Normal4 : BT.709]

[Normal 1 (Standard)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] Ü – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[Normal 2 (x4.0)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – Ü – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[Normal 3 (BT.709)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – Ü –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[Normal 4 (x5.0)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – Ü

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[Wide DR]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[PQ]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[HLG]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

[Canon Log 3]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – –

Custom picture Available LUTs

[Gamma] [Color Space]

[Wide DR :

BT.709]

[Wide DR :

BT.2020]

[PQ : BT.2020]

[HLG :

BT.2020]

[HDR Assist.]

(800%/400%)

[Normal 1 (Standard)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – – –

[Normal 2 (x4.0)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – – –

[Normal 3 (BT.709)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – – –

[Normal 4 (x5.0)]

[BT.2020 Gamut] – – – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – – –

[Wide DR]

[BT.2020 Gamut] Ü

– – – –

[BT.709 Gamut] – – – – –

[PQ]

[BT.2020 Gamut] Ü

– – –

[BT.709 Gamut] Ü

– – – –

[HLG]

[BT.2020 Gamut] Ü

– – –

[BT.709 Gamut] Ü

– – – –

[Canon Log 3]

[BT.2020 Gamut] Ü Ü Ü Ü Ü

[BT.709 Gamut] Ü – – – –

151

Applying a LUT to Screens/Video Outputs

Adjusting the Color Quality for HLG Output

You can change the quality of the color reproduction when the [HLG : BT.2020] LUT is used.

1 Select [HLG Color].

> [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [HLG Color]

2 Select the desired setting and then press SET.

Options

[BT.2100]: Color reproduction according to ITU-R BT.2100 specifications.

[Vivid]: More saturated color reproduction according to the 'Traditional Colour' approach in ITU-R

BT.2390.

Adjusting the Gain Difference between HDR and SDR

When a LUT that allows gain adjustment is selected, you can adjust the difference in gain between the SDR

output relative to the HDR image.

1 Select [Gain for HDRSDR Conv.].

> [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [Gain for HDRSDR Conv.]

2 Select the desired setting and then press SET.

Selecting the Output Range

You can select the output range for video output from the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal.

1 Select the range setting according to the terminal you want to use.

> [¢#Monitoring Setup] > [Range: SDI] (SDI terminal) or [Range: HDMI] (HDMI OUT terminal)

2 Select [During Canon Log 3 Output] or [During HDR Output] and then press SET.

3 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• Repeat the procedure as necessary to select the output range for other terminals/video outputs.

Options

[Full Range]: Video output in full range. Available only for the SDI terminal.

[Full Range Priority]:

Priority will be given to output video in full range whenever possible. Available only for the HDMI

OUT terminal.

[Narrow Range]:

Video output in narrow range (video range).

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [LUT] (A 119), you can press the button to turn on and off the LUTs applied

to all screens/output terminals at once.

• If you change the [Preset] or [Gamma] setting in the custom picture file, the LUTs applied to all screens/output

terminals will be reset to [Off].

Audio Output

152

Audio Output

The camcorder can output audio from the SDI terminal, HDMI OUT terminal,

(headphone) terminal or

speaker*. You can select which two channels of the 4 audio channels recorded with the clip will be output from

the HDMI OUT terminal, headphones and speaker.

* Only monaural output is available for the speaker.

Audio output configuration

You can select the two channels to be output with the procedure below.

To select the audio channels for the headphone or speaker output

Select > [

% Audio Setup] > [Monitor Channels] > Desired audio output option (L/R).

• Options like [CH1+2] indicate that two audio channels (CH1 and CH2 in this example) are mixed and output

from the same side.

To select the audio channels for HDMI output

Select > [

% Audio Setup] > [HDMI OUT Channels] > [CH1/CH2] or [CH3/CH4].

NOTES

• If you set an assignable button to [Monitor Channels] (A 119), you can press the button to toggle between

the audio channel output options.

Recorded audio configuration Audio output during recording/playback

Audio format Audio bit depth SDI terminal HDMI OUT terminal

4-channel

linear PCM

16 bit / 24 bit

4-channel

linear PCM

24 bit

2-channel

linear PCM

16 bit

2ch AAC 16 bit

Operating modes:

153

Working with Clips on a Computer

Saving XF-HEVC or XF-AVC Clips to a Computer

Use Canon XF Utility to save and organize XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips on a computer. You can use the Canon XF

plugins to easily use clips directly from non-linear editing (NLE) software made by Avid. To be able to use

XF-HEVC clips in Canon XF Utility or the Canon XF plugins, you will need to download and install also the Canon

XF-HEVC Decoder. The software, plugins and decoder are available as free downloads from your local Canon

Web site. Check the download page for the system requirements and latest information.

You will find detailed instructions about installing and uninstalling the software in the "Read This First" file

(Install-XF Utility.pdf) included in the compressed file you will download from the Web site. For details about using

the software, refer to the instruction manual (PDF file) that is installed with the software.

Canon XF Utility (for Windows/macOS): Software application that allows you to save clips on a computer,

check, play back and organize clips and grab still frames from clips.

Canon XF Plugin for Avid Media Access (for Windows/macOS): Plugin that allows you to easily import clips

from an SD card or a local folder in the computer to the compatible version of Avid Media Composer (an NLE

application compatible with Avid Media Access), directly from within the application.

Canon XF-HEVC Decoder (for Windows/macOS): Decoder that allows you to play back XF-HEVC clips using

Canon XF Utility or the Canon XF plugins. The decoder is required to use XF-HEVC clips on a computer.

Saving MP4 Clips

Make sure to save clips recorded with this camcorder to a computer. To do so, you will need a card reader

connected to a computer or a computer with an SD card slot. For details on transferring files from the SD card,

refer to the computer's instruction manual or OS's help modules.

Under certain circumstances, clips may be split and recorded as separate files. Using MP4 Join Tool you can join

the split files of and save them as a single seamless clip.

Transferring Files to a Computer

1 Insert an SD card with the desired clips into the SD card slot of the computer or card reader connected to the

computer.

2 Follow the OS's onscreen instructions.

3 Copy the clips on the SD card to the computer.

• Recordings on the SD card are located in folders named "XXX_mmdd" under the "DCIM" folder, where XXX

is the folder number (100 to 999) and mmdd stands for the recording date (A 49).

Joining Clips Split by the Camcorder

Use MP4 Join Tool to join MP4 clips split by the camcorder in the following cases.

• When the camcorder switches to the other SD card while recording video due to the relay recording function

(A 36).

• The video (stream) file in the clip will be split approximately every 4 GB.

MP4 Join Tool is available as a free download (for Windows or macOS) from your local Canon website. Check

the download page for the system requirements and latest information.

You will find detailed instructions about installing and uninstalling the software in the "Read This First" file (Install-

MP4 Join Tool.pdf) included in the compressed file you download. For details about using the software, refer to

the instruction manual (PDF file) that is installed with the software.

Working with Clips on a Computer

154

155

Network Functions

About the Network Functions

You can connect the camcorder to a wireless network or a compatible network device using Wi-Fi (A 156) or to

a wired network using an Ethernet cable (A 161).

Network functions and connection types

Connection to a Wi-Fi network via an external access point (wireless router, etc.)

Direct connection to one Wi-Fi-enabled device where the camcorder serves as the Wi-Fi access point.

Before using the network functions

• The instructions in this chapter assume you already have a correctly configured and working network, network

device(s) and/or Wi-Fi access point. If necessary, refer to the documentation provided with the network

devices you plan to use.

• Configuring the network settings requires adequate knowledge about configuring and using wired (Ethernet)

and/or wireless (Wi-Fi) networks. Canon cannot provide support regarding network configurations.

IMPORTANT

• Data transmitted over networks is not encrypted.

• Canon shall not be liable for any loss of data or damage resulting from incorrect network configuration or

settings. Additionally, Canon shall not be liable for any loss or damage caused by the use of network functions.

• Using an unprotected Wi-Fi network can expose your data to monitoring by unauthorized third parties. Also,

the camcorder is shipped with default passwords so you can test the network functions as soon as possible.

Changing the initial settings is recommended. Be aware of any data security risks involved.

NOTES

• About the Wi-Fi antenna: When using the camcorder’s Wi-Fi functions, do not

cover the Wi-Fi antenna with your hand or other object. Covering it may

interfere with wireless signals.

• Do not open the card slot covers while using network functions.

• Do not place cables connected to the SDI terminal or HDMI OUT terminal near

the Wi-Fi antenna. Doing so may negatively affect the wireless communication

over Wi-Fi.

Network function Description

Wired

network

Wi-Fi

Infrastructure

Camera Access

Point

Browser Remote

Control the camcorder remotely from the Web

browser of a connected device.

Ü – Ü 164

IP Streaming

Stream the camcorder’s live video and audio

over IP to a compatible IP video decoder

connected to network.

Ü – – 175

FTP File Transfer

Transfer clips recorded with the camcorder to

another device connected to the network using

the FTP protocol.

Ü Ü – 178

Wi-Fi antenna

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

156

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

The camcorder is Wi-Fi certified and can connect to access points (wireless router, etc.) and

network devices compliant with the 802.11a/b/g/n protocol and that are Wi-Fi certified (bear the

logo shown on the right). The Wi-Fi connection's functionality and applicable restrictions may vary

depending on the Wi-Fi network used. Note that using an unprotected Wi-Fi connection can

expose your data to monitoring by unauthorized third parties. Be aware of the risks involved.

You can connect the camcorder to a Wi-Fi network in Infrastructure mode (using an access point), or directly to

one network device in Camera Access Point mode. The type of connection you can use depends on the

network function you wish to use (A 155). For an Infrastructure connection, the camcorder offers 4 ways to

configure an access point and the method you use will depend on the type and specifications of the access

point and network you plan to use.

Camera Access Point: When shooting in a location where there are no access points available, the camcorder

can serve as a wireless access point*. Wi-Fi enabled devices will be able to connect to the camcorder directly.

* Limited only to the connection between the camcorder and supported Wi-Fi enabled devices. The functionality is not the same

as that of commercially available access points.

Infrastructure connection:

WPS (button): If your wireless router supports Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), setup will be

easy and require minimal configuring and no passwords. To check if your wireless router

has a WPS button and for details about how to activate the Wi-Fi protected setup, refer to

the instruction manual of your wireless router.

WPS (PIN code): Even if your wireless router does not have a dedicated WPS button, it may support WPS using

a PIN code instead. For setup using a PIN code, you will need to know in advance how to activate the wireless

router’s WPS function. For details refer to the instruction manual of your wireless router.

Searching for Access Points: If your access point does not support the WPS function or you cannot activate it,

you can have the camcorder search for access points in the area.

Manual Setup: If the access point you want to use has stealth mode activated and it cannot be automatically

detected by the camcorder, you can enter all the necessary settings manually. This requires more advanced

knowledge of Wi-Fi and network settings.

IMPORTANT

• Depending on the country/region of use, some restrictions on outdoor use or Camera Access Point

connections may apply when operating the IEEE802.11a/n wireless standard in the 5 GHz band. For details

about areas of use and restrictions, refer to the Specifications (A 223).

157

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

Camera Access Point

In this mode the camcorder itself serves as a wireless access point to which other Wi-Fi-enabled devices can

connect. Initially, basic settings for a Camera Access Point connection (network name (SSID):

[XF705-xxxx_Canon0C], password: [12345678]) are already saved under network configuration profile [1:]. You

can use the default settings to connect immediately to the camcorder or follow the procedure below if you wish

to change the settings.

1 Select [Connection Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

2 Select the desired network configuration profile and then select [Camera Access Point].

Network configuration profile ([1:] to [4:]) > [Edit] > [Camera Access Point]

• You can save up to 4 network configuration profiles in the camcorder. Push the joystick up/down to select

the desired profile.

3 Enter the SSID (network name) the camcorder will use as a Wi-Fi access point.

[Input] > Enter the desired network name using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

4 Select the frequency band for the Wi-Fi connection ([5 GHz] or [2.4 GHz]) and then press SET.

• For users of model ID0118 PAL (A 17): Because only the 2.4 GHz frequency band is available for Camera

Access Point mode, skip to step 5.

5 Select the channel and then press SET.

• Available channels will differ depending on the selected frequency band. (Not applicable depending on the

model.)

6 Select the encryption method and then press SET.

• If you selected [Open/No encryption], skip to step 8.

7 Enter the encryption key (password).

[Input] > Enter the desired password using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

• This password is needed to connect the network device to the camcorder. If necessary, write it down.

8 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

Configuring the IP Address Settings

At this point you need to configure the TCP/IP settings. If you need to configure the TCP/IP settings manually,

consult the network administrator to obtain the relevant information.

1 Select the method for assigning the IP address ([Automatic] or [Manual]) and then press SET.

• If you selected [Automatic], the IP address will be assigned automatically. Continue with the procedure to

review and save the configuration (A 158).

2 Enter the IP address.

• Push the joystick up/down to select a value for the first field and then press SET to move to the next field. After

completing the four fields of the address, select [Set] and then press SET.

3 Enter the rest of the necessary TCP/IP settings in the same way.

• Camera Access Point connections: Enter the [Subnet Mask].

• Infrastructure/Ethernet connections: Enter the [Subnet Mask], [Default Gateway], [Primary DNS Server] and

[Secndry DNS Server]. If necessary, touch [Í]/[Î] to scroll up/down.

4 After completing the necessary settings, continue with the procedure to review and save the configuration

(A 158).

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

158

Saving the Configuration

1 Review the access point’s configuration and then press SET.

• Push the joystick left/right to review all the information before pressing SET.

2 Enter a name for the new network configuration profile.

[Input] > Enter the desired name using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

• If you wish, you can give the network configuration profile a more descriptive name to make it easier to

identify.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET to save the network configuration.

4 When the confirmation screen appears, press SET.

Connecting in Infrastructure Mode

1 Select [Connection Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

2 Select the desired network configuration profile and then select [Infrastructure].

Network configuration profile ([1:] to [4:]) > [Edit] > [Infrastructure]

• You can save up to 4 network configuration profiles in the camcorder. Push the joystick up/down to select

the desired profile.

3 Select the desired network setup method and then press SET.

• Continue the setup with the procedure corresponding to the method you wish to use (see the reference

pages below).

[WPS: Button] (A 158)

[WPS: PIN Code] (A 159)

[Search for Access Points] (A 159)

[Manual] (A 160)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS)

Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) is the easiest way to set up a Wi-Fi access point. You can do simply by pushing a

button (if the access point (wireless router) you want to connect to has a WPS button) or using a PIN code

issued by the camcorder.

Wireless Routers with a WPS Button

1 Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.

• The length of time required to hold down the WPS button depends on the wireless router. Refer to the

instruction manual of your wireless router and make sure the wireless router’s WPS function is activated.

2 Within 2 minutes, press SET.

• While [Connecting] appears on the screen, you can press SET to cancel the operation.

3 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

NOTES

• The [WPS: Button] method may not work correctly if there are several active access points in the area. In such

case try using [WPS: PIN Code] or [Search for Access Points] (A 159) instead.

159

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

WPS using a PIN code

1 After you select [WPS: PIN Code], the camcorder will generate and display an 8-digit PIN code on the screen.

2 Enter the PIN code into the wireless router’s WPS (PIN code) setup screen.

• For most wireless routers, you must use a Web browser to access the setup screen.

• For details about how to access your wireless router’s settings and activate the Wi-Fi Protected Setup

(WPS) using a PIN code, refer to the instruction manual of your wireless router.

3 Within 2 minutes, press SET.

• While [Connecting] appears on the screen, you can press SET to cancel the operation.

4 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

Searching for Access Points

The camcorder will automatically detect access points in the vicinity. After you select the desired access point,

you only need to enter the selected network’s password to connect the camcorder. For details about the access

point’s network name (SSID) and password refer to the wireless router’s instruction manual or consult the

network administrator in charge of the access point.

1 After you select [Search for Access Points], the camcorder will search for active access points in the

vicinity and display a list of available options on the screen.

2Push the joystick up/down to select the desired access point and then press SET.

• Only ASCII characters in the network name (SSID) are displayed. If the access point's SSID contains special

characters or characters in other languages, they will appear as blank spaces.

• If the access point is not encrypted, skip to step 5.

3 If necessary, select the WEP index key.

• This step is only necessary if the Wi-Fi network’s authentication method is set to [Shared Key] or if the

encryption method is set to [WEP].

4 Enter the encryption key (password).

[Input] > Enter the password using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

5 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

Network name

(SSID, only ASCII characters)

Current access point/Total number

of active access points detected

Encrypted access point

Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network

160

Manual Setup

If you prefer, you can enter manually the details of the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. Follow the

instructions on the screen to complete the procedure.

1 Enter the access point's SSID (network name).

[Input] > Enter the network name using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

2 Select the authentication method and then press SET.

• If you selected [Open], select [WEP], press SET and continue the procedure, or select [No Encryption], press

SET and continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

3 Select the WEP index or encryption method, depending on the selected authentication mode.

• [Shared Key]/[WEP]: Select the WEP index and then press SET.

• [WPA-PSK]/[WPA2-PSK]: Select [TKIP] or [AES] and then press SET.

4 Enter the encryption key (password).

[Input] > Enter the password using the keyboard screen (A 27) > [OK]

5 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

NOTES

Valid passwords vary depending on the encryption method.

64-bit WEP encryption: 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters.

128-bit WEP encryption: 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters.

AES / TKIP encryption: 8 to 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters.

* Note: ASCII characters include the numbers 0 to 9, the letters a to z and A to Z and some punctuation marks and special

symbols. Hexadecimal characters comprise the numbers 0 to 9 and the letters a to f and A to F.

161

Connecting to a Wired (Ethernet) Network

Connect the camcorder to a router or other device connected to a wired (Ethernet) network using a

commercially available Ethernet cable. Use Category 5e or better, shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet cables

compatible with Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T) and with good shielding capability.

1 Connect a commercially available Ethernet cable to the (Ethernet) terminal on the camcorder and

an Ethernet port on a network device.

2 Select [Connection Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

3 Select the desired network configuration profile and then select [Ethernet].

Network configuration profile ([1:] to [4:]) > [Edit] > [Ethernet]

• You can save up to 4 network configuration profiles in the camcorder. Push the joystick up/down to select

the desired profile.

4 Continue with the procedure to configure the IP address assignment (A 157).

(Ethernet) access indicator

Ethernet cable

(commercially available)

Ethernet port on a

network device

Selecting a Network Connection

162

Selecting a Network Connection

You can save up to 4 network configuration profiles. If you just saved a new network configuration, it will already

be automatically selected so follow this procedure to select a different configuration profile.

1 Select [Connection Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

2 Select the desired configuration number and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

Checking the Network’s Status

After activating a network function, the camcorder will connect to the network that was configured in advance.

The icons displayed on the screen will indicate the type of network selected and the connection status.

Wi-Fi (Infrastructure):

In yellow – the camcorder is connecting to or disconnecting from the network. In white – the

network function can be used.

Wi-Fi (Camera Access Point):

In yellow – starting the camcorder’s access point. In white – the camcorder’s access point is

ready. Connect the Wi-Fi enabled device to the camcorder.

Ethernet: In yellow – the camcorder is connecting to or disconnecting from the network. In white – the

network function can be used.

The (Ethernet) indicator next to the terminal will flash or illuminate as follows*: Flashing in

green – connecting to the network or streaming video (IP streaming only); illuminated in green –

FTP transfer active; flashing in red – network error.

: Browser Remote (A 164)

:IP streaming (A 175)

: FTP transfer (A 178)

* You can also set > [B $ System Setup] > [LED] > [ (Ethernet)] to [Off] to disable the indicator.

163

Changing Network Settings

You can check and, if necessary, edit the settings of the currently selected network configuration profile even

after the initial setup. Changing settings manually requires more advanced knowledge of Wi-Fi and network

settings.

1 Select [Connection Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Connection Settings]

2 Select the network configuration profile you want to check and then press SET.

3 To change the network settings, select [Edit] and then press SET.

4 Select [Infrastructure], [Camera Access Point] or [Ethernet].

• Change the network settings as described in the previous sections.

- Infrastrucure connections (A 158, from step 3)

- Camera Access Point connections (A 157, from step 3)

- Ethernet connections: Connect the network device (step 1, A 161) and change the IP settings (A 157).

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

164

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network

Device

After connecting a network device to the camcorder via Wi-Fi, you can operate the camcorder remotely using

Browser Remote, a Web browser application that can be accessed using the Web browser on network devices*.

Using Browser Remote, you can check the camcorder’s live view image and control various recording settings.

On the Browser Remote screen, you can also check the remaining recording time on the card, remaining battery

charge and the camcorder’s time code.

* For details about compatible devices, operating systems, Web browsers, etc., please visit your local Canon website.

Setting Up Browser Remote

You can set a unique camcorder identification code and designate the port that the Browser Remote application

should use when accessing the camcorder through the network. The port number (HTTP protocol) used by

Browser Remote is usually set to port 80, but you can change it if necessary. The camcorder ID will appear on

the Browser Remote screen, making it easy to identify which camcorder the application is controlling in case of a

multi-camera shooting setup.

Camcorder Settings

1 Select [Browser Remote Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Browser Remote Settings]

2 To change the port number, select [Port No.].

• To enter the port number, push the joystick left/right to select the digit to change and then up/down to select

a value for the selected digit. After completing the five digits of the port number, select [Set] and then press

SET.

3 To change the camcorder ID, select [Camera ID].

• Enter the desired camcorder ID using the keyboard screen (A 27).

User Settings

A user name and password are required to log in to the Browser Remote application. You can set up to three

different users and select whether you want to allow single-user operation (full control) or two-user operation

(one controlling camcorder functions and another in charge of metadata input for clips).

[Full] Can access all 3 Browser Remote screens: [

] (main recording screen), [ ] (metadata screen)

and [ ] (basic screen).

[Camera] Can access only the [

] (main recording) screen. This would be the main operator controlling

the camcorder.

[Meta] Can access only the [ ] (metadata) screen. This would be the person in charge of keeping the

clip information up to date.

1 Select [Browser Remote Settings]

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Browser Remote Settings]

2 To select the number of Browser Remote users, select [Users Settings].

3 Select the desired option and then press SET.

• If you selected [One User (Full)], perform steps 4-5 to enter the user name and password for the [Full] user. If

you selected [Two Users (Camera/Meta)], perform steps 4-5 twice, once for the [Camera] user and again for

the [Meta] user.

Operating modes:

165

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

4 Select [Full: User Name], [Camera: User Name] or [Meta: User Name].

• Enter the desired user name using the keyboard screen (A 27).

5 Select [Full: Password], [Camera: Password] or [Meta: Password].

• Enter the desired password using the keyboard screen (A 27).

Starting Browser Remote

After completing the network connection, you can start the Browser Remote application on the Web browser* of

any network device** connected to the same network. You can check the Browser Remote settings on the

status screen (A 204).

* A Web browser that supports JavaScript and is enabled to accept cookies is required.

** For details about compatible devices, operating systems, Web browsers, etc., please visit your local Canon website.

Preparations on the Camcorder

1 Activate Browser Remote on the camcorder.

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Network Functions] > [Browser Remote]

• The camcorder will start functioning as a wireless access point.

• The network type icon and will appear at the top of the screen. When the icons turn white, the

camcorder is ready to accept commands from the Browser Remote application.

2 If necessary, you can check the network settings while Browser Remote is activated.

• Press the STATUS button and display the following status screens to check the relevant information. Press

the STATUS button to close the status screen.

- [Network 1/6] status screen: SSID for Camera Access Point connections

- [Network 4/6] status screen: URL for Browser Remote

- [Network 5/6] status screen: Browser Remote user names and passwords*

* Only default passwords will be shown.

On the Network Device

1 Connect the network device to the camcorder.

• Select the camcorder’s SSID (network name) in the device's Wi-Fi settings.

2 Start the Web browser on the network device.

3 Enter the camcorder’s URL exactly as shown on the status screen.

4 Enter the user name and password.

• Be sure to log in with the user name and password of one of the

users that were set on the camcorder (A 164). If necessary,

consult the administrator who configured the camcorder’s settings.

• The Browser Remote screen will appear. The screen displayed may

be different depending on the user information used to log in.

• While Browser Remote is correctly connected to the camcorder, the

network connection indicator’s will keep turning on and off

in a loop.

• If the camcorder's ID was set, it will appear on the Browser Remote

screen while live view is not activated.

Operating modes:

Example of the login screen. The screen may

differ depending on the Web browser and

version used.

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

166

5 Select the language for Browser Remote.

•Touch [H] and select the desired language from the list. The language selected applies

mainly to the metadata screen and to messages displayed in the application. The

application's buttons are displayed in English only, regardless of the language selected.

6 Use the Browser Remote controls to operate the camcorder.

• Descriptions of the controls are given in the following pages. Detailed operation is given

in each function’s reference page.

7 When you have finished using Browser Remote, turn it off on the camcorder

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Network Functions] > [Off]

• The network icons will turn yellow and then disappear from the screen and the

connection with the application will be terminated.

NOTES

• Depending on the network used and the strength of the Wi-Fi signal, you may notice delays in the refreshing of

the live view image and other settings.

• If Browser Remote is set to a language other than the language set on network device, the application may not

be displayed correctly.

Using Browser Remote

The Browser Remote application has 3 screens: [

] the main screen for controlling the camcorder remotely in

recording mode, [ ] the metadata screen, and [ ] a basic screen that allows users only to start/stop recording

using a smartphone or other device with a small screen. The screen displayed will differ depending on the user

information used to log in.

The following sections explain how to use the Browser Remote controls. For detailed information and applicable

restrictions about the functions themselves, please refer to each function’s explanation.

NOTES

• Browser Remote does not support multi-touch gestures.

Language selection

Camcorder ID

Network connection

indicator

167

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

The Main Remote Recording Screen [

] ([Full]/[Camera] user only)

When using a computer, tablet and other devices with larger screens, this screen offers all the controls available

for operating the camcorder remotely via Browser Remote.

* Onscreen display/indication only. The content or value cannot be changed using Browser Remote.

8769

1311 14 1815 1610 17

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

168

1 Live view screen

Shows the camcorder’s live view image. When the live view image is not turned on, the camcorder ID will

appear here.

2 Status indicators

3 [LIVE VIEW] button

Touch the button to display the camcorder’s live view image on the Browser Remote screen.

4[Shot Mark] button

While recording XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips, touch the button to add a shot mark to the clip. When the [Shot

Mark] message appears, touch [ ].

5 Clip marks buttons

When recording XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips, you can tag important clips by adding clip marks (A 109).

To add a clip mark

: After recording a clip, touch [ Mark] to add an

mark to the clip, or [ Mark] to add

mark to the clip. When the [OK Mark] or [CHECK Mark] message appears, touch .

6Browser Remote screen selection ([Full] user only)

Tou c h [

] to open the main remote recording screen, [ ] to open the metadata screen (A 172), or [ ] to

open the basic screen for devices with a small screen (A 174).

7 [FULL AUTO] button

To set the camcorder to full auto mode (A 43), touch [Off], select [On] and then touch [ ].

8 Language selection

Changes the language used for controls in the [ ] (metadata input) screen and for error messages. Still,

most of the application’s controls emulate physical buttons on the camcorder and appear in English only,

regardless of the language selected.

9Key lock button

Touch the icon to lock the Browser Remote screens in order to prevent settings from being changed

inadvertently.

10 [

Touch Focus] button

Touch the button to unlock (enable) the touch focus mode.

NOTES

• The live view image will not be displayed in Browser Remote in the following cases.

- While the color bars are displayed.

- When the resolution is 2340x2160, the frame rate is 59.94P or 50.00P and > [B " System

Setup] > [SDI/HDMI Max Res.] is set to [3840x2160].

: Wi-Fi connection indicator. While Browser Remote is correctly connected to the camcorder, the

dots will keep turning on and off in a loop.

STBY, etc. : Recording operation (same as on the camcorder, A 46).

STBY

, REC

: Output recording command (A 188).

: Appears during double slot recording (A 36).

: Infrared recording (A 117)

, etc. : Remaining battery charge (A 45)

NOTES

• Depending on the Wi-Fi connection’s strength, there may be delay of 0.5 seconds or more between the

frame shown when you touch the button and the frame to which the camcorder adds the shot mark.

169

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

11 [REC] button

Touch the button to start recording. While recording, the center of the button turns red.

Touch the button again to stop recording.

12 Card selection and approximate remaining recording time

The currently selected SD card is indicated with a

mark next to the icon.

Remaining recording times are approximate and calculated based on the current video configuration used.

13 [SLOT SELECT] button

Touch the button to select the other SD card when both card slots contain a card.

14 Current camcorder settings

This panel displays an overview of the camcorder settings currently used. You can change camcorder

settings with the controls in the detailed camcorder settings panel (18) on the right.

15 Full auto mode indicator (A 43)

16 Video format (A 51)

17 Time code (same as on the camcorder)

18 Detailed camcorder settings panel (A 169)

Touch one of the tabs at the bottom to select the camcorder settings you wish to adjust:

The Main Remote Recording Screen: Detailed Camcorder Settings

The following sections explain how to use the controls in the detailed camcorder settings panel. For detailed

information and applicable restrictions about the functions themselves, please refer to each function’s

explanation.

To change the white balance

Touch the [White Balance] tab in the detailed camcorder settings panel.

1 Auto white balance button

Touch [ ] to set the camcorder to auto white balance (AWB) mode.

2Custom white balance buttons

Touch [

A] or [

B].

To register a custom white balance

: Point the camcorder at a gray card

or white object with no pattern so it fills the center of the monitoring/live

view screen and touch [

]. Use the same lighting conditions you plan

to use when recording.

During the procedure, the icon in the button will flash quickly. When it

stops flashing, the procedure is completed and the custom white

balance will be applied.

3Preset white balance (¼/É) / Color temperature (È)

Touch a button to apply the corresponding white balance settings as shown in the button.

[ND]: ND filter [WB]: White balance

[Shutter]: Shutter speed [Iris]: Aperture value

[AE]: AE shift [Gain]: Gain value

[White Balance]: White balance mode and related settings.

[Exposure]: Exposure related settings—aperture, shutter speed and gain.

[Focus]: Focus related settings.

[Zoom]: Zoom operation.

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

170

4[AWB Lock] button

When auto white balance is activated, touch the button to lock the current white balance settings and keep

them when you change the subject.

To a d just the color temperature or color compensation (CC) value

1 Select a white balance setting other than [ ], [

A] or [

B].

2 Touch the right part of the white balance button (current color temperature and CC value).

3 Touch the [K] tab (color temperature) or [CC] tab (color compensation value), select the desired value from the

list and then touch [ ].

• If necessary, repeat this step to adjust the other setting.

To change exposure related settings

Touch the [Exposure] tab in the detailed camcorder settings panel.

1 ND Filter buttons

• Touch [–] or [+] to change the density of the ND filter. You can also touch

the current ND filter setting, select the desired setting from the list (or touch

[–]/[+]) and then touch [ ].

2 Aperture related buttons

• To let the camcorder adjust the aperture automatically, touch [Manual],

select [Automatic] and then touch [ ]. No further settings are necessary.

To adjust the aperture manually, select [Manual] and use the aperture

controls as described below.

• Touch [–] or [+] to change the aperture value (displayed above the buttons).

You can also touch the current aperture value, select the desired value

from the list (or touch [–]/[+]) and then touch [ ].

3 Shutter speed related buttons

• To change the shutter speed mode, touch [Speed] and select the desired shutter speed mode ([Speed]

(standard shutter speed), [Angle], [Clear Scan], [Slow] (slow shutter speeds), [Auto] or [Off]).

• To change the adjustment increment if you selected [Speed], touch [Normal], select the desired shutter

increment and then touch [ ].

• Touch [–] or [+] to change the shutter speed (displayed above the buttons). You can also touch the current

shutter speed value, select the desired value from the list (or touch [–]/[+]) and then touch [ ].

4 Gain related buttons

• To let the camcorder adjust the gain automatically, touch [Manual], select [Automatic] and then touch [ ].

No further settings are necessary. To adjust the gain manually, select [Manual] and use the gain controls as

described below.

• To change the adjustment increment, touch [Normal], select the desired gain increment and then touch

[].

• Touch [–] or [+] to change the gain value (displayed above the buttons). You can also touch the current gain

value, select the desired value from the list (or touch [–]/[+]) and then touch [ ].

5AE shift buttons

Touch [–] or [+] to change the AE shift level.

NOTES

• During manual aperture adjustment, you can also touch [PUSH AUTO IRIS] to have the camcorder adjust

the aperture automatically once. (The manual aperture buttons will not be available at this time.)

171

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

To ad j u st the focus and use focus related functions

Touch the [Focus] tab in the detailed camcorder settings panel.

1 Focus mode button

2 [Face Det. & Tracking] button

3[Focus Guide] (Dual Pixel Focus Guide function) button

4Tracking buttons

5 Manual focus buttons

Manual focus

1Touch [AF].

2 Touch [MF] and then touch [ ].

3 Touch one of the manual focus buttons on the [Near] side to focus closer or

one of the controls on the [Far] side to focus farther away. There are three levels

of adjustment - [ ]/[ ] is the smallest and [ ]/[ ] the largest.

Focus guide

1 Touch the [Focus Guide] button.

2 Touch [On] to display the focus guide (A 77) and then touch [ ].

Touch focus

In autofocus mode, you can touch on a subject that appears in the Browser Remote’s live view screen in order to

select it for focusing.

1 Make sure the touch focus function has been unlocked and the

icon appears in the button (A 168).

2 Touch the desired subject in the live view screen.

• Depending on the focus mode used, an AF frame may appear on the selected subject.

Face AF

1 Touch [Face Det. & Tracking].

2 Touch [On] and then touch [ ].

• A face detection frame will appear on the live view screen around all detected faces. The main subject is

indicated with arrows (

) on the sides. The camcorder will track the main subject as it moves.

• Touch on the face of a different subject to select it as the main subject.

3 Focus manually or let the camcorder focus automatically on the main subject's face.

Tracking other subjects

1 Touch [Tracking].

• This step is not necessary when [v#Camera Setup] > [AF Frame] is set to [Automatic] (A 81).

2 Touch the live view screen to select the subject you wish to track.

• A tracking frame will appear on the live view screen and the camcorder will track the subject as it moves.

• Touch [Cancel Tracking] to select a different subject.

3 Focus manually or let the camcorder focus automatically on the subject.

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

172

To a d just the zoom

1 Touch the [Zoom] tab in the detailed camcorder settings panel.

2 Touch one of the fixed zoom position buttons on the [Tele] side to zoom

in or one of the buttons on the [Wide] side to zoom out.

• You can also touch the manual zoom buttons [ ]/[ ].

NOTES

• When using a slow zoom speed, it may take some time until the lens

starts moving.

The Metadata Screen

[] ([Full]/[Meta] user only)

Using Browser Remote you can create, edit and transfer to the camcorder metadata information that can be

used to record XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips. This includes the user memo information (clip title, creator, location

and description), as well as GPS information. For details, refer to Using Metadata (A 110).

To open the metadata input screen, touch the [ ] icon at the top of the Browser Remote screen.

• This step is not necessary when logging in with the user name and password of the [Meta] user.

1 Clip title

Touch inside the text box and enter the desired text. To delete the text, touch [Clear All].

Manual

zoom

buttons

Fixed zoom

positions

8 11910

173

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

2 GPS information

To enter the altitude

: Touch inside the [Altitude] text box and enter the desired value.

To enter the latitude

: Touch inside one of the text boxes under [Latitude] and enter (from left to right) the

degrees, minutes and seconds values. To select a southern latitude, touch [North] and select [South] instead.

To enter the longitude

: Touch inside one of the text boxes under [Longitude] and enter (from left to right) the

degrees, minutes and seconds values. To select a western longitude, touch [East] and select [West] instead.

• Touch [Clear All] to delete all the GPS-related fields at once.

3 Live view screen

Shows the camcorder’s live view image. When the live view image is not turned on, the camcorder ID will

appear here.

4 [LIVE VIEW] button

Touch the button to display the camcorder’s live view image on the Browser Remote screen.

5 Clip’s creator

6 Recording location

7Description of the clip

Touch inside the corresponding text box and enter the desired text. To delete the text, touch [Clear All].

8 Status indicators

See the descriptions in the section about the [

] screen (A 168).

9 [ Activate] button

Touch the button to give priority to the metadata entered in this screen when recording clips. This overrides

the metadata read from a file saved on SD card B.

10 [Overwrite Previous] button/[Overwrite] button (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips)

While recording a clip

: Touch [Overwrite] to send the metadata entered in this screen to the camcorder,

replacing any metadata that the clip being recorded might have. When the confirmation message appears,

touch .

After recording a clip

: Touch [Overwrite Previous] to send the metadata entered in this screen to the

camcorder, replacing any metadata embedded in the last clip recorded. When the confirmation message

appears, touch .

11 [Apply from Next] button (XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips)

Touch the button to send the metadata entered in this screen to the camcorder so it is embedded only with

clips that are recorded after the transfer. When the confimation message appears, touch .

This option does not overwrite the metadata of clips already recorded or being recorded.

NOTES

• The metadata sent to the camcorder from Browser Remote will be lost in the following cases.

- The camcorder is turned off.

-The > [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting] setting was changed.

• Using Browser Remote ([ Activate] button) you can give priority to metadata sent from the application.

However, you cannot return the priority back to the SD card. To use a user memo file saved on a card you will

need to set > [3 " Recording/Media Setup] > [Metadata] > [Setting] to [SD Card] on the

camcorder itself.

• If you use Browser Remote to transfer user memo information to a relay clip after the switch, the user memo

will not be saved to the clip recorded before the camcorder switched cards.

Browser Remote: Controlling the Camcorder from a Network Device

174

The Basic Screen [ ] ([Full] user only)

When using a smartphone or other device with a smaller screen, this screen offers

only a small live image screen for final confirmation, zoom controls and the [REC]

button to start and stop recording.

To open the basic screen, touch the [ ] icon at the top of the Browser Remote

screen.

175

IP Streaming

After connecting the camcorder to a network, you can stream the camcorder’s live video and audio* over IP to a

compatible IP video decoder** connected to the network. You can use IP streaming for live broadcasts or to

send a news flash report from a location with poor network connectivity.

While IP streaming is activated, internal recording to an SD card in the camcorder is disabled but recording to an

external device is possible.

* Only 2 channels. During 4-channel audio recording, you can select which two channels to stream over IP.

**This can be a dedicated video transfer device or decoder software on a computer. For details about compatible decoders,

please visit your local Canon Web site.

Configuration of video streamed over IP

* > [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [Rec Format] setting. Available streaming signal options will vary depending on

the recording video configuration used.

IP Streaming Settings

Before you can stream video over IP, you need to configure settings related to the transfer like the protocol and

port number to use. You can also select the configuration of the streamed video.

Camcorder Settings

1 Configure an Ethernet network connection (A 161).

2 Select [IP Streaming Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [IP Streaming Settings]

3To select the video streaming configuration, select [Streaming Output Signal].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

4To select the audio streaming channels, select [Audio Out Channels].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

5 Select [Protocol].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

• If you selected [RTP+FEC], complete the error correction settings (A 176).

Options

[UDP]: This protocol prioritizes transfer speeds but does not guarantee the reliability/integrity of the data. Lost or

delayed IP packets are ignored.

[RTP]: Standard protocol for video/audio broadcasts over the Internet. Lost or delayed IP packets are ignored.

[RTP+FEC]: This setting uses the RTP protocol and adds a layer of FEC error correction so the receiving side* can

recover lost or delayed IP packets.

* A decoder compatible with FEC error correction is required.

Video format*

(compression)

Streaming configuration

Video

Audio

Bit rate Resolution Frame rate

XF-HEVC

(H.265/HEVC compression)

16 Mbps, 9 Mbps 3840x2160

59.94P, 29.97P, 50.00P,

25.00P

MPEG-2 AAC,

256 Kbps, 2 channels

9 Mbps, 4 Mbps 1920x1080

XF-AVC, MP4

(MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 compression)

9 Mbps, 4 Mbps 1920x1080 59.94i, 50.00i

Operating modes:

IP Streaming

176

Receiver Settings

1 Select [IP Streaming Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [IP Streaming Settings]

2 Select [Dest. IP Address] and enter the IP address assigned to the decoder.

• Push the joystick up/down to select a value for the first field of the address and then press SET to move to

the next field. After completing the four fields of the address, select [Set] and then press SET.

3 To change the port number, select [Dest. Port No.].

• To enter the port number, push the joystick left/right to select the digit to change and then up/down to select

a value for the selected digit. After completing the five digits of the port number, select [Set] and then press

SET.

• Using the default port number is recommended.

FEC Error Correction Settings

1 Select [IP Streaming Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [IP Streaming Settings]

2 To enter the port number used for FEC packets, select [FEC Port No.].

• To enter the port number, push the joystick left/right to select the digit to change and then up/down to select

a value for the selected digit. After completing the five digits of the port number, select [Set] and then press

SET.

• Using the default port number is recommended.

3 To change the interval for FEC packets, select [FEC Interval].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

Streaming Video over IP

1 Connect the decoder to the network and complete any necessary configurations on the receiving

side so the decoder is ready to receive video over IP.

• For details refer to the instruction manual of the decoder device or software you will use.

2 Select the desired network (A 162).

• Use an Ethernet connection (A 161) and connect the camcorder to the desired network using an Ethernet

cable.

3 Activate IP streaming on the camcorder.

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Network Functions] > [IP Streaming]

4 When the confirmation message appears, select [OK] and then press SET.

• and will appear at the top of the screen. When the icons turn white, the camcorder will start

streaming video over the selected network.

5 When you have finished streaming the desired video, turn off the network functions.

> [ ! Network Settings] > [Network Functions] > [Off]

• The network icons will turn yellow and then disappear from the screen.

NOTES

• While IP streaming is activated, the camcorder will continue to broadcast video and audio data over the IP

network, regardless of the status of the receiver. The streamed data is not encoded. Be careful to set up the

correct IP address and test in advance that the receiving decoder can indeed receive the signals.

• Depending on the network used and the connection conditions, you may experience lost or delayed IP

packets.

177

IP Streaming

• After streaming video continuously for 24 hours, the camcorder will stop the IP streaming momentarily and

then restart it automatically.

FTP File Transfer

178

FTP File Transfer

You can transfer clips from the camcorder to another device connected to the network, using the FTP protocol.

The following explanations assume that the FTP server is on, ready and correctly configured.

FTP Server and Transfer Settings

Before you can transfer clips to a connected device, you need to configure the FTP server settings and other

settings related to the handling of folders and files. If necessary, consult the network administrator in charge of

the FTP server.

1 Select [FTP Transfer Settings].

> [ ! Network Settings] > [FTP Transfer Settings]

2 To enter the destination FTP server, select [FTP Server] and then press SET.

• Enter the FTP server’s IP address or host name using the keyboard screen (A 27).

3 Enter the [FTP: User Name], [FTP: Password], and [Destination Folder] in the same way.

4 To change the port number, select [Port No.] and then press SET.

• To enter the port number, push the joystick left/right to select the digit to change and then up/down to select

a value for the selected digit. After completing the five digits of the port number, select [Set] and then press

SET.

5 To activate the passive mode, select [Passive Mode].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

• [Off] is the standard setting for most cases. [On] (passive mode) is more appropriate for FTP transfers from

behind a firewall.

6To select whether to create a new folder for every transfer date, select [New Folder by Date].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

7To select how to handle file transfers when a file with the same name already exists, selects [Same

Named Files].

• Select the desired option and then press SET.

Options for [New Folder by Date]

[On]: A new subfolder under the transfer destination folder “YYYYMMDD\HHMMSS” will be created

for every transfer operation.

[Off]: All the files will be transferred to the folder set as [Destination Folder] in the FTP server settings.

Options for [Same Named Files]

[Skip]: If a file with the same name already exists in the destination folder, the file will not be transferred.

[Overwrite]: Even if a file with the same name already exists in the destination folder, the file will be

transferred, overwriting any file with the same name in the destination folder.

NOTES

• You can check the current FTP settings on the [Network 4/6] to [Network 6/6] status screens.

Operating modes:

179

FTP File Transfer

Transferring Clips (FTP Transfer)

Transferring a Single Clip

1 Select the desired network (A 162).

• Use an Infrastructure connection (A 156) or Ethernet connection (A 161).

• With Ethernet connections, connect the camcorder to the desired network using an Ethernet cable.

2 Select the desired clip and then press SET to open the clip menu.

3 Select [FTP Transfer] and then press SET.

4 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The camcorder will connect to the FTP server and the selected clip will be transferred. When using an

Ethernet connection, the Ethernet access lamp will flash while files are transmitted.

• Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation.

5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Transferring All the Clips

1 Open the index screen with the clips you want to transfer (A 133).

2 Select the desired network (A 162).

• Use an Infrastructure connection (A 156) or Ethernet connection (A 161).

• With Ethernet connections, connect the camcorder to the desired network using an Ethernet cable.

3 Select [FTP Transfer].

[ ! Network Settings] > [FTP Transfer]

4 Select [OK] and then press SET.

• The camcorder will connect to the FTP server and all the clips in the index screen will be transferred. When

using an Ethernet connection, the Ethernet access lamp will flash while files are transmitted.

• Press the CANCEL button to cancel the operation.

5 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions when transferring files. Failing to do so may interrupt the transfer and

incomplete files may remain at the transfer destination.

- Do not open the card slot covers.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

• If incomplete files remain at the transfer destination, check the content and make sure they are safe to delete

before deleting them.

NOTES

• Depending on the access point’s settings and capabilities, it may take some time to transfer files.

FTP File Transfer

180

181

Photos

Taking Phot os

You can record photos to SD card B (only) when the camcorder is in record standby mode. The photo size is the

same, regardless of the video configuration currently in use.

1 Set an assignable button to [Photo] (A 119).

2 When the camcorder is in record standby mode, press the assignable button to take a photo.

•

and the number of available photos appear at the top right of the screen. The maximum number of

available photos displayed on the screen is 9999.

•The SD CARD

access indicator will illuminate in red as the photo is being recorded.

• You can also press the PHOTO button on the supplied wireless controller.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while the SD CARD

access indicator is illuminated in red. Failure to do

so may result in permanent data loss.

- Do not open the SD CARD 3 card slot cover and do not remove the card.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

NOTES

• Photos cannot be taken in the following cases:

- When pre-recording is activated.

- When slow motion recording is activated.

- When Browser Remote is activated.

• If the LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent writing, you will not be able to record photos. Change the

position of the LOCK switch in advance.

Resolution currently in use Photo size Approximate file size per image

3840x2160, 1920x1080 1920x1080 880 KB

Operating modes:

Playing Back Photos

182

Playing Back Photos

You can view the photos you recorded on SD card B.

Displaying the [Photos] Index Screen

1 Set the camcorder in mode (A 22).

2 Open the [Photos] index screen (A 135).

Viewing Photos

1 Move the orange selection frame to the desired photo.

2Press the Ò button to view the photo.

• The photo playback screen appears and the selected photo is

displayed.

•Use the Ú/Ù buttons or push the joystick left/right to

switch to the previous/next photo.

• Press the DISP button to hide/show the onscreen displays.

• Press the Ñ button to return to the [Photos] index screen.

IMPORTANT

• Observe the following precautions while an access indicator is

illuminated in red. Failure to do so may result in permanent data

loss.

- Do not disconnect the power source or turn off the camcorder.

- Do not open the card slot cover of the card being accessed and do not remove the card.

NOTES

• The following photos may not be displayed correctly.

- Photos not recorded with this camcorder.

- Photos created or edited on a computer.

- Photos whose file names have been changed.

Operating modes:

183

Deleting Photos

You can delete photos you are not interested in keeping.

Deleting a Single Photo

1Display the photo to be deleted or select it in the [Photos] index screen (A 135) and then press

SET.

2 Select [Delete] and then press SET.

3 Select [OK] and then press SET.

4 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

Deleting All the Photos

You can delete all the photos in the [Photos] index screen.

1 Select [Delete All Photos].

> [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [Delete All Photos]

2 Select [OK] and then press SET.

3 When the confirmation message appears, press SET.

IMPORTANT

• Be careful when deleting photos. Deleted photos cannot be recovered.

Operating modes:

Deleting Photos

184

185

Additional Information

Menu Options

For details about how to select an item, refer to Using the Menus (A 25). A menu item’s location within a menu

is indicated by the page number icon (!", etc.) in the left column. For details about each function, see the

reference page or the explanation accompanying the menu entry. Setting options in boldface indicate default

values.

Depending on the camcorder’s operating mode and the settings, some menu items may not be available. Such

menu items do not appear or appear grayed out in menu screens.

To skip directly to the page of a specific menu:

[

Camera Setup] menu ( mode only)

[

Camera Setup] menu A 185

[/ Custom Picture] menu A 187

[

Recording/Media Setup] menu A 187

[

Audio Setup] menu A 189

[

Monitoring Setup] menu A 190

[

Assistance Functions] menu A 192

[7 Network Settings] menu A 193

[ Assignable Buttons] menu A 194

[

System Setup] menu A 195

[

My Menu] customized menu A 196

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Light Metering] [Backlight], [Standard], [Spotlight] (A 64)

[AE Shift] –2.0 to +2.0 in 0.25 point intervals (±0) (A 63)

[AE Response] [High], [Normal], [Low]

Determines how quickly the exposure (aperture, shutter speed and gain) changes when using the

automatic adjustment mode.

[Iris Limit] [On], [Off] (A 63)

[Iris Ring Direction] [Reverse], [Normal] (A 62)

[Shutter Increment] [Fine], [Normal] (A 57)

[AGC Limit] [Off/33 dB], [32.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 1-dB intervals (A 58)

[Gain L] (A 59)

[Mode] [Fine], [Normal]

[Fine] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 0.5-dB intervals ([0.0 dB])

[Normal] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 3-dB intervals ([0.0 dB])

[Gain M] (A 59)

[Mode] [Fine], [Normal]

[Fine] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 0.5-dB intervals ([6.0 dB])

[Normal] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 3-dB intervals ([6.0 dB])

[Gain H] (A 59)

[Mode] [Fine], [Normal]

[Fine] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 0.5-dB intervals ([12.0 dB])

[Normal] [33.0 dB] to [–6.0 dB] in 3-dB intervals ([12.0 dB])

[Shockless Gain] [High], [Normal], [Low], [Off] (A 59)

[White Balance: PRESET] [¼ Daylight], [É Tungsten], [È Kelvin] (A 68)

[Shockless WB] [On], [Off] (A 67)

Menu Options

186

The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.

[AWB Response] [High], [Normal], [Low] (A 68)

[AF Mode] [AF-Boosted MF], [Continuous] (A 79, 80)

[AF Frame] [Automatic], [Large], [Small] (A 81)

[AF Frame Position] [Selectable], [Center Frame] (A 81)

[AF Speed] [High], [Normal], [Low] (A 80)

[AF Response] [High], [Normal], [Low] (A 80)

[Face Det. & Tracking] [On], [Off] (A 81)

[Face AF] [Face Priority], [Face Only] (A 81)

[Focus Limit] [On], [Off] (A 84)

[Focus Ring Direction] [Reverse], [Normal] (A 76)

[Focus Ring Response] [High], [Normal], [Low] (A 76)

[Zoom Speed Level] [High], [Normal], [Low] (A 72)

[High-Speed Zoom] [On], [Off] (A 72)

[Digital Zoom] [Tele-converter 6.0x], [Tele-converter 3.0x], [Tele-converter 1.5x],

[Digital 300x], [Advanced 30x], [Off]

(A 70)

[Handle Zoom Speed H] 1 to 16 (16) (A 73)

[Handle Zoom Speed L] 1 to 16 (8)

[WL-D6000 Zoom Speed] 1 to 16 (8) (A 73)

[Grip Zoom Speed] [Constant], [Variable], [User Setting] (A 72)

[Constant Speed] 1 to 16 (8) (A 72)

[Users Settings] [User 1], [User 2], [User 3] (A 72)

[IS Mode] [Dynamic], [Standard] (A 85)

[Image Stabilizer] [On], [Off] (A 85)

[Powered IS] [On], [Off] (A 85)

[Color Bars] [On], [Off] (A 106)

[Color Bar Type] [SMPTE], [EBU]

, [ARIB] (A 106)

[Flicker Reduction] [Automatic], [Off] (A 57)

[Conversion Lens] [TL-U58], [WA-U58], [Off] (A 75)

(

[IR Rec Color] [White], [Green] (A 117)

[IR Light] [Toggle], [Always On], [Always Off] (A 117)

[IR Slow Shutter] [On], [Off] (A 117)

Menu item Setting options and additional information

187

Menu Options

[/ Custom Picture] menu ( mode only)

[

Recording/Media Setup] menu

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Preset], [Gamma],

[Color Space], [Color Matrix],

[HLG Color],

[Activate Other Settings],

[Other Settings]

Refer to the tables in the Custom Picture Settings section:

Preset Color Settings (A 65), Available Custom Picture Settings (A 126 - 130).

[File]

[Select] [C1:CP000001] to [C20:CP000020] (A 123)

[Rename] – (A 124)

[Protect] [Unprotect], [Protect] (A 124)

[Reset] – (A 124)

[Copy to SD Card B],

[Load from SD Card B]

– (A 125)

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Initialize Media] [SD Card A], [SD Card B] (A 35)

[Rec Format] [XF-HEVC], [XF-AVC], [MP4] (A 51)

[System Frequency] [59.94 Hz], [50.00 Hz]

(A 51)

[Recording Mode] [Normal Recording], [Slow Motion Recording]*, [Pre-Recording] (A 115)

* Available only for XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips.

[Frame Rate] When [System Frequency] is set to [59.94 Hz]:

[59.94i], [59.94P], [29.97P], [23.98P]

When [System Frequency] is set to [50.00 Hz]:

[50.00i], [50.00P], [25.00P]

(A 51)

Available settings vary depending on the video format and system frequency used.

[Resolution/Color Sampling] When [Rec Format] is set to [XF-HEVC]

[3840x2160 YCC422 10 bit], [1920x1080 YCC422 10 bit]

When [Rec Format] is set to [XF-AVC]

[3840x2160 YCC420 8 bit], [1920x1080 YCC420 8 bit]

When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4]

[1920x1080 YCC420 8 bit], [1280x720 YCC420 8 bit]

(A 52)

Available settings vary depending on the video format and frame rate used.

[Bit Rate] When [Rec Format] is set to [XF-HEVC]

[160 Mbps], [110 Mbps], [60 Mbps], [45 Mbps], [35 Mbps]*

When [Rec Format] is set to [XF-AVC]

[160 Mbps], [45 Mbps], [35 Mbps]*

When [Rec Format] is set to [MP4]

[35 Mbps], [8 Mbps]

(A 52)

Available settings vary depending on the video format and resolution used.

* Only during slow motion recording when the frame rate is set to 23.98P.

[Audio Format (MP4)] [AAC 16 bit 2CH], [LPCM 16 bit 4CH] (A 100)

Menu Options

188

The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.

[Clips]

[Copy All Clips],

[Delete All Clips]

– (A 142)

(A 142)

[Delete All Photos] – (A 183)

[Relay Recording],

[Double Slot Recording]

[On], [Off] (A 36)

[Metadata]

[Camera Index] [A] to [Z] (A 48)

[Reel Number], [Clip Number] [001] to [999] (A 48)

[User Defined] User defined text string up to 5 characters ([CANON]) (A 48)

[Scene], [Take] Scene description up to 16 characters / Take description up to 8 characters (A 111)

[Setting] [Remote], [SD Card] (A 110, 172)

[User Memo] [Off], list of user memo files available on SD card B (A 110)

[Country Code], [Organization],

[User Code]

Identifiers up to 4 characters ([00__] default for [Organization] only)

[Country Code]: This identifier is the country code defined by ISO-3166-1 and is to be entered

starting from the left.

[Organization]: This identifier represents the organization that owns or operates the camcorder and

can be obtained by registering with the SMPTE Registration Authority. If the organization is not

registered, enter [0000].

[User Code]: This identifier designates the user. Leave this blank if [Organization] is set to [0000].

[Add / File] [On], [Off] (A 125)

[Clip Numbering] [Reset], [Continuous] (A 48)

[Rec Command] [On], [Off]

When this setting is [On] and you connect the camcorder to an external recorder, if you start or stop

recording with the camcorder, the external recorder will also start or stop recording. To output the

recording command from the HDMI OUT terminal, you will need to set also [HDMI Time Code] to [On].

[HDMI Time Code] [On], [Off] (A 148)

[MP4 Clip/Photo Numbering] [Reset], [Continuous] (A 49)

[Vertical Filter] [On (1080i/1080p)], [On (1080i)], [Off]

When this setting is set to an option other than [Off], a vertical filter is applied when recording or

streaming video with a resolution of 1920x1080 (Full HD). This setting is available only in

mode.

[On (1080i/1080p)]: The vertical filter is applied to Full HD video, regardless of the frame rate used.

[On (1080i)]: The vertical filter is applied only when using an interlaced frame rate.

Menu item Setting options and additional information

189

Menu Options

[

Audio Setup] menu

Appears on page ! in mode.

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Select CH1/CH2 Input],

[Select CH3/CH4 Input]

[INPUT Terminals], [MIC Terminal], [Built-in Mic] (A 101)

[CH2 Input] [INPUT 2], [INPUT 1] (A 101)

[CH1/CH2 ALC Link],

[CH3/CH4 ALC Link]

[Linked], [Separated] (A 103)

[Audio Rec Level CH2]

[Audio Rec Level CH3],

[Audio Rec Level CH4],

[Audio Rec Level CH3/CH4]

[Automatic], [Manual] (A 102)

[CH2 Level]

[CH3 Level], [CH4 Level],

[CH3/CH4 Level]

0 to 100 (50) (A 102)

[Built-in Mic Low Cut] [Off], [LC1], [LC2] (A 103)

[Built-in Mic Sensitivity] [Normal], [High] (A 103)

[Built-in Mic Att.] [On], [Off] (A 104)

[INPUT 1 Mic Trimming],

[INPUT 2 Mic Trimming]

[+12 dB], [+6 dB], [0 dB], [–6 dB], [–12 dB] (A 104)

[INPUT 1 Mic Att.],

[INPUT 2 Mic Att.]

[On], [Off] (A 104)

[INPUT 1&2 Limiter] [On], [Off] (A 103)

[MIC Att.] [On], [Off] (A 104)

[MIC Low Cut] [On], [Off] (A 104)

[1 kHz Tone] [–12 dB], [–18 dB], [–20 dB], [Off] (A 106)

[Headphone Volume]

[Off], 1 to 15 (8) (A 138)

[Speaker Volume]

[Off], 1 to 15 (8) (A 138)

[Monitor Channels]

[CH1/CH2], [CH1/CH1], [CH2/CH2], [CH1+2/CH1+2], [CH3/CH4], [CH3/CH3], [CH4/CH4],

[CH3+4/CH3+4], [CH1/CH3], [CH2/CH4], [CH1+3/CH2+4]

(A 152)

[HDMI OUT Channels]

[CH1/CH2], [CH3/CH4] (A 152)

[Assign CH2 Switch & Dial] [CH1], [CH3]

Set this setting to [CH3] to be able to adjust the audio levels for channel CH3 using the CH2 audio

level switch and dial.

Menu Options

190

[

Monitoring Setup] menu

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[LCD Brightness], [LCD Contrast] –99 to +99 (±0) (A 30)

[LCD Color] –20 to +20 (±0)

[LCD Sharpness] 1 to 4 (2)

[LCD Luminance] [Normal], [+1], [+2]

[VF Brightness], [VF Contrast] –99 to +99 (±0) (A 30)

[VF Color] –20 to +20 (±0)

[VF Sharpness] 1 to 4 (2)

[VF Luminance] [Normal], [High]

[VF Eye Sensor] [On], [Off]

When this setting is set to [On], the viewfinder will be dimmed automatically when the sensor does

not detect the user’s eye near the eyepiece for 30 seconds (or 10 seconds, in playback mode).

[LUT: LCD], [LUT: VF] [Wide DR : BT.709], [HDR Assist. (800%)], [HDR Assist. (400%)], [Off] (A 149)

[LUT: SDI], [LUT: HDMI] [Normal1 : BT.709], [Normal2 : BT.709], [Normal3 : BT.709], [Normal4 : BT.709],

[Wide DR : BT.709], [Wide DR : BT.2020], [PQ : BT.2020], [HLG : BT.2020], [Off]

[HLG Color] [BT.2100], [Vivid] (A 151)

[Gain for HDRSDR Conv.] –7.5 dB to +7.5 dB (–3.0 dB) (A 151)

[Range: SDI] (A 151)

[During Canon Log 3 Output] [Full Range], [Narrow Range]

[During HDR Output] [Full Range], [Narrow Range]

[Range: HDMI] (A 151)

[During Canon Log 3 Output] [Full Range Priority], [Narrow Range]

[During HDR Output] [Full Range Priority], [Narrow Range]

[B&W Image: LCD],

[B&W Image: VF], [B&W Image: SDI],

[B&W Image: HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 30)

[Custom Display] –

[Audio Level Indicator] [On], [Off]

[Date/Time], [Camera Data] [On], [Off]

These settings are available only in mode when the menu is opened from the playback

screen (A 136) and determine whether the following onscreen displays will appear on the playback

image.

[Audio Level Indicator]: The audio level meter (clips only).

[Date/Time]: The date and time when the clip/photo was recorded. (For MP4 clips, the recording date

only.)

[Camera Data]: The aperture value, shutter speed and gain value used to record the clip (XF-HEVC or

XF-AVC clips only).

191

Menu Options

The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.

Appears on page $ in mode.

[OSD Output: SDI]

[OSD Output: HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 148)

[Custom Display 1] (A 44)

[Light Metering],

[Custom Picture]

[On], [Off]

[Zoom Indicator] [Bar], [Numerical]

[Zoom Position],

[Grip Zoom Speed: User],

[Object Distance]

[Always On], [Normal], [Off]

[ND Filter] [Only Warnings], [Normal], [Off]

[Focus Mode], [Key Lock],

[Full Auto], [IR Rec],

[White Balance], [AE Shift],

[Exposure Bar], [Iris],

[Gain], [Shutter], [Peaking],

[Tele-converter],

[Conversion Lens],

[Magnification], [LUT],

[Image Stabilizer]

[On], [Off]

[Custom Display 2] (A 44)

[Remaining Battery],

[Remaining Rec Time]

[Only Warnings], [Normal], [Off]

[Recording Mode], [Time Code],

[Reel/Clip Number]

[On], [Off]

[Remaining Photos] [Only Warnings], [Normal], [Off]

[Temperature/Fan],

[Resolution/Color Sampling],

[Frame Rate],

[Output Terminals Status],

[OSD Output]*,

[Rec Command], [User Bit]*,

[Monitor Channels]*,

[Audio Level Indicator],

[Network Functions], [GPS],

[WL-D6000], [Genlock],

[User Memo], [Rec Format]

[On], [Off]

[On], [Normal]: Show the icon/onscreen display always or whenever the necessary conditions are

triggered.

[Only Warnings]: Show the icon/onscreen display only when a critical level is reached.

• The default setting for items marked with an asterisk (*) is [Off].

[Date/Time] [Date/Time], [Time], [Date], [Off]

[Displayed Units] [Meters], [Feet]

Changes the distance units used in camcorder displays between meters and feet.

Menu item Setting options and additional information

Menu Options

192

[

Assistance Functions] menu

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Focus Guide] [On], [Off] (A 77)

[Magn.: VF+LCD],

[Magn.: SDI/HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 78)

[B&W during Magn.] [On], [Off] (A 78)

[Peaking: LCD], [Peaking: VF],

[Peaking: SDI], [Peaking: HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 78)

[Peaking] [Peaking 1], [Peaking 2] (A 78)

[Peaking 1] (A 78)

[Color] [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue]

[Gain] [Off], 1 to 15 (8)

[Frequency] 1 to 4 (2)

[Peaking 2] (A 78)

[Color] [White], [Red], [Yellow], [Blue]

[Gain] [Off], 1 to 15 (15)

[Frequency] 1 to 4 (1)

[B&W during Peaking] [On], [Off] (A 78)

[Zebra: LCD], [Zebra: VF],

[Zebra: SDI], [Zebra: HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 88)

[Zebra] [Zebra 1], [Zebra 2], [Zebra 1+2] (A 88)

[Zebra 1 Level] [5 ±5%] to [95 ±5%] in 5 percentage point intervals ([70 ±5%]) (A 88)

[Zebra 2 Level] 0% to 100% in 5 percentage point intervals (100%) (A 88)

[WFM: LCD]

, [WFM: VF]

[WFM: SDI]

, [WFM: HDMI]

[On], [Off] (A 107)

[Waveform Settings]

(A 107)

[Position] [Right], [Left]

[Type] [Line], [Line+Spot], [Select Line], [Field], [RGB], [YPbPr]

[Gain] [1x], [2x]

[Y Position] [0%], [15%], [30%], [45%], [50%]

[Select Line] When the vertical resolution is 720:

0 to 719 (360) in 1-line increments, [Set]

When the vertical resolution is 1080:

0 to 1079 (540) in 1-line increments, [Set]

When the vertical resolution is 2160:

0 to 2158 (1080) in 2-line increments, [Set]

193

Menu Options

Appears on page ! in mode.

[7 Network Settings] menu

[Markers] [On], [Off] (A 87)

[Center Marker],

[Horizontal Marker],

[Grid Marker], [Aspect Marker]

[Yellow], [Blue], [Green], [Red], [Black], [Gray], [White], [Off] (A 87)

[Marker Aspect Ratio] [4:3], [13:9], [14:9], [16:9], [1.375:1], [1.66:1], [1.75:1], [1.85:1], [1.90:1], [2.35:1],

[2.39:1], [Custom]

(A 88)

[Marker Custom Asp. Ratio] 1.00:1 to 9.99:1 (1.00:1) (A 88)

[Safe Area Marker] [Yellow], [Blue], [Green], [Red], [Black], [Gray], [White], [Off] (A 87)

[Basis for Marker Safe Area] [Whole Picture], [Selected Aspect Marker] (A 88)

[Marker Safe Area %] [80%], [90%], [92.5%], [95%] (A 88)

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Connection Settings] [1:] to [4:]

Default settings for profile [1: CameraAP]:

[SSID]: [XF705-xxxx_Canon0C],

[Password]: [12345678]

(A 162)

You can save up to 4 network configuration profiles in the camcorder. Initially, basic settings for a

Camera Access Point connection are saved under network configuration profile [1: CameraAP].

[Network Functions] [Browser Remote], [IP Streaming], [Off] (A 165, 176)

[Browser Remote Settings] (A 164)

[Port No.] 1 to 65535 ([80])

[Camera ID] Camcorder identifier up to 8 characters ([XF705])

[Users Settings] [One User (Full)], [Two Users (Camera/Meta)]

[Full: User Name],

[Camera: User Name],

[Meta: User Name]

User name up to 8 characters

(Default user names are [Full], [Camera] and [Meta], respectively)

[Full: Password],

[Camera: Password],

[Meta: Password]

Password up to 8 characters ([12345678])

Menu item Setting options and additional information

Menu Options

194

[ Assignable Buttons] menu

Following are the default settings for each assignable button. For a complete list of the functions that can be

assigned, refer to the detailed table (A 120).

[IP Streaming Settings] (A 175)

[Streaming Output Signal] XF-HEVC clips when [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [System Frequency] is set to

[59.94 Hz]:

[16 Mbps/3840x2160 59.94P], [9 Mbps/3840x2160 59.94P],

[16 Mbps/3840x2160 29.97P], [9 Mbps/3840x2160 29.97P],

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 59.94P], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 59.94P],

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 29.97P], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 29.97P]

XF-HEVC clips when [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [System Frequency] is set to

[50.00 Hz]:

[16 Mbps/3840x2160 50.00P], [9 Mbps/3840x2160 50.00P],

6 Mbps/3840x2160 25.00P], [9 Mbps/3840x2160 25.00P],

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 50.00P], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 50.00P],

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 25.00P], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 25.00P]

XF-AVC and MP4 clips when [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [System Frequency] is

set to [59.94 Hz]:

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 59.94i], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 59.94i]

XF-AVC and MP4 clips when [3 ! Recording/Media Setup] > [System Frequency] is

set to [50.00 Hz]:

[9 Mbps/1920x1080 50.00i], [4 Mbps/1920x1080 50.00i]

[Audio Out Channels] [CH1/CH2], [CH3/CH4]

[Dest. IP Address] 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 ([0.0.0.0])

[Dest. Port No.] 1024 to 65530 ([5000])

[Protocol] [UDP], [RTP], [RTP+FEC]

[FEC Port No.] 1026 to 65532 ([5002])

[FEC Interval] 10 to 100 in intervals of 5 (100)

[FTP Transfer] – (A 179)

[FTP Transfer Settings] (A 178)

[FTP Server] Server name up to 32 characters

[FTP: User Name] User name up to 32 characters

[FTP: Password] Password up to 32 characters

[Destination Folder] Destination folder’s path up to 152 characters (Default is the root folder [/])

[Port No.] 1 to 65535 ([21])

[Passive Mode] [On], [Off]

[New Folder by Date] [On], [Off]

[Same Named Files] [Skip], [Overwrite]

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Camera 1] to [Camera 7] 1: [Powered IS], 2: [Peaking: All], 3: [Zebra: All], 4: [WFM: All],

5: [Review Recording], 6: [Magn.: VF+LCD], 7: [Magn.: VF+LCD]

[Camera 8] to [Camera 14] [(NONE)]

[RC-V100 1] to [RC-V100 4] 1: [Powered IS], 2: [Peaking: All], 3: [Zebra: All], 4: [WFM: All]

Menu item Setting options and additional information

195

Menu Options

[

System Setup] menu

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[Reset] [All Settings], [Camera Settings], [Assignable Buttons]

These settings reset the following camcorder settings to default values/settings.

[All Settings]: All the camcorder’s settings except for the hour meter.

[Camera Settings]: White balance, iris, ISO speed, gain, shutter speed, [v Camera Setup] settings

and [/ Custom Picture] settings. This option is available only in mode.

[Assignable Buttons]: Only the assignable buttons.

[Transfer Menu/

] (A 131)

[Save] [To Camera], [To SD Card B]

[Load] [From Camera], [From SD Card B]

[Time Zone] List of world time zones.

[UTC-05:00 New York] or [UTC+01:00 Central Europe]

(A 23)

[Date/Time] – (A 23)

[Date Format] [YMD], [YMD/24H], [MDY], [MDY/24H], [DMY], [DMY/24H]

(A 23)

[GPS Auto Time] [On], [Off] (A 112)

This setting is available only when the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connectted to the camcorder.

[Language

] [Deutsch], [English], [Español], [Français], [Italiano], [Polski],

[Português], [ ], [], [ ], [ ]

(A 24)

[SDI/HDMI Max. Res.] [3840x2160], [1920x1080], [1280x720] (A 147, 148)

[SDI Output] [On], [Off] (A 147)

[3G-SDI Mapping] [Level A], [Level B] (A 147)

[SDI/HDMI Scan Mode] [P], [PsF (Forced 1080i)] (A 145)

[G-LOCK/SYNC Term.] [HD Sync Output], [Genlock Input] (A 94, 96)

[Genlock Adjustment] –1023 to +1023 (000) (A 94)

The phase difference between the external Genlock signal and the camcorder is initially set to 0. This

setting allows you to adjust it within the range of approx. ±0.4 H (–1023 to 1023). To set a 4-digit

adjustment value, set the first field to 10 or –10.

[SYNC Scan Mode] [P], [PsF] (A 96)

[Time Code Mode] [Preset], [Regen.] (A 90)

[Time Code Run] [Rec Run], [Free Run] (A 90)

[Time Code DF/NDF] [DF], [NDF] (A 91)

[Set Time Code] [00:00:00:00] to [23:59:59:29] (59.94 Hz recordings) or [23:59:59:24] (50.00 Hz

recordings)

(A 91)

[User Bit Recording Mode] [Internal], [External] (A 95)

[User Bit Type] [Setting], [Time], [Date] (A 93)

[TC In/Out] [In], [Out] (A 95, 96)

Menu Options

196

The default value depends on the country/region or purchase.

Appears on page # in mode.

Appears on page $ in mode.

[

My Menu] ( mode only)

[Key Lock] [All Buttons], [All Except REC Button] (A 43)

[Camera Grip REC Button] [Disable], [Enable]

Enables/disables the use of the REC button on the grip. This setting is available only in mode.

[Touch Screen Response] [Normal], [Low]

Adjusts the sensitivity of the camcorder’s LCD touch screen.

[REMOTE Term.]

[RC-V100 (REMOTE B)], [RC-V100 (REMOTE A)], [Standard] (A 39)

[WL-D6000] [On], [Off]

Enables/disables the use of the supplied wireless controller (WL-D6000).

[LED]

[Tally Lamp (Front)],

[Tally Lamp (Rear)],

[SD Card Access LED],

[ (Ethernet)]

[On], [Off]

These settings determine whether the following LEDs and indicators will illuminate.

[Tally Lamp (Front)], [Tally Lamp (Rear)]: The tally lamps on the camcorder. Note that regardless of

this setting, when the camcorder is turned off, the tally lamps will illuminate in red momentarily after

the Q button is pressed. These options are available only in mode.

[SD Card Access LED]: The SD card access indicators when the camcorder is accessing the card.

[ (Ethernet)]: The (Ethernet) indicator when the camcorder is accessing a wired network.

[Review Recording] [Entire Clip], [Last 4 sec] (A 114)

[Reset Hour Meter] –

The camcorder has two “hour meters” – the first keeps track of total operation time and the second

keeps track of operation time since the last time the second hour meter was reset with this function.

This setting is available only in mode.

[Fan] [Automatic], [Always On] (A 50)

[Certification Logos]

–

Displays certification logos that apply to the camcorder.

[Firmware] –

Displays the current firmware version of the camcorder. This setting is available only in mode

but is usually grayed out.

Menu item Setting options and additional information

[CAMERA-1 Edit] [Register], [Move], [Delete], [Reset All], [Rename] (A 26)

[CAMERA-2 Edit] [Register], [Move], [Delete], [Reset All], [Rename]

[CAMERA-3 Edit] [Register], [Move], [Delete], [Reset All], [Rename]

[CAMERA-4 Edit] [Register], [Move], [Delete], [Reset All], [Rename]

[CAMERA-5 Edit] [Register], [Move], [Delete], [Reset All], [Rename]

Menu item Setting options and additional information

197

Displaying the Status Screens

You can use the status screens to check the camcorder’s various settings.

You can also output the status screens to an external monitor.

1Press the STATU S button to open the status screens.

• The status screen most recently displayed will appear.

• You can also press the AUDIO STATUS button to display only the [Audio]

status screens (A 200).

2Push the joystick left/right to scroll through the status screens.

3Press the STATU S button again to close the status screens.

• You can also press the MENU button to close the status screen and open the menu instead.

[Gamma/Color Space/Color Matrix] screen A 198

[SDR Gain/Range] screen A 198

[

Data] screens A 198

[Camera] screens A 199

[Assignable Buttons] screens A 199

[Audio] screens A 200

[Media] screen A 201

[Terminal Outputs] screen A 201

[Recording] screen A 202

[Metadata] screens A 202

[Battery/Hour Meter] screen A 203

[Network] screens A 203

[GPS Information Display] screen* A 205

* Only when the optional GP-E2 GPS Receiver is connected to the camcorder.

Operating modes:

Displaying the Status Screens

198

[Gamma/Color Space/Color Matrix] and [SDR Gain/Range] Status Screens

(modeonly)

Gamma curve, color space, color matrix (A 126), SDR gain and range (A 151) used for recordings, video

output and displays

[

Data 1/3] to [/ Data 3/3] Status Screens ( mode only)

1 [SD CARD]: Settings used for clips recorded on

the SD card (A 65)

2 [SDI], [HDMI]: Settings/LUT used for video output

from the respective terminals (A 149)

3 [LCD], [VF]: Settings/LUT used for the LCD

screen and viewfinder (A 149)

4HLG color (A 151)

5 > [

/ ! Custom Picture] > [Activate

Other Settings] setting (whether detailed settings

in the custom picture file are active or not)

1 Custom picture file name (A 123) 2 Custom picture file's [Other Settings] (detailed

settings) (A 127)

199

Displaying the Status Screens

[Camera 1/4] to [Camera 4/4] Status Screens (modeonly)

[Assignable Buttons 1/3] to [Assignable Buttons 3/3] Status Screens

Current functions of the assignable buttons (A 119)

1 Automatic exposure (AE)

AE shift (A 63), AE response (A 185)

2Aperture limit (A 61)

3 Shutter speed increment (A 57)

4 AGC limit (A 58)

5 Gain settings by switch position (A 58)

6 White balance (A 67)

Setting of the PRESET switch position, shockless

white balance and auto white balance (AWB)

response

7Focus (A 76)

AF mode, AF frame size and position, AF speed,

AF response and focus limit

8Zoom (A 70)

Zoom speed level, high-speed zoom setting and

zoom speed settings for the handle zoom rocker,

supplied wireless controller and grip zoom rocker

1 On the camcorder’s body

Assignable buttons Camera 8 to 13 appear only

in mode.

2 On the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller

Displaying the Status Screens

200

[Audio] Status Screens

In mode

1 Audio source input, audio level adjustment mode

and audio level indicator for each audio channel

(A 97)

2 Audio channels output from the headphones/

built-in speaker (A 152)

3 Headphone volume (A 138)

4 Audio format, audio bit depth and audio channels

used for recording or output (A 97, 152).

[SD Card]: Settings used for clips recorded on the

card.

[SDI], [HDMI]: Settings used for audio output from

the respective terminal.

5 Press SET to open the [¡!Audio Setup]

menu.

(Only when the [Audio] status screen was opened

using the AUDIO STATUS button.)

201

Displaying the Status Screens

[Media] Status Screen

NOTES

• Depending on the SD card, the total space displayed on the screen may differ from the nominal capacity listed

on the card.

[Terminal Outputs] Status Screen

* The displayed bit depth refers to the video signal’s bit depth.

1 SD card A/SD card B

For each:

2 Visual bar: Approximate used/available space

3 Total space

4 Used (recorded) space

5 Available space

6 SD/UHS speed class

Only for SD card B:

7 Number of remaining photos

1 HDMI OUT terminal status: Output signal

(A 148), output onscreen displays (A 148)

2 SDI terminal status: Video output*, 3G-SDI output

mapping (A 147), output onscreen displays

(A 148)

3 Time code output from the HDMI OUT terminal

(A 148)

4 User bit type (A 93)

Displaying the Status Screens

202

[Recording] Status Screen ( mode only)

[Metadata 1/2] and [Metadata 2/2] Status Screens (modeonly)

* XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips only.

1 Resolution and color sampling (A 52)

2Bit rate (A 52)

3 Relay recording (A 36)

4 Special recording mode (A 115)

5 MP4 clip/photo numbering (A 188)

6 Clip numbering (A 48)

1User memo* (A 110)

(file name, title, creator, location and description)

2 Clip name and slate information (A 48, 111)

(camera index, reel number, clip number,

user-defined field, scene number and take

number)

3 Unique Material Identifier (UMID) information

(A 110)

(country code, organization and user code)

4 Custom picture file embedding in clips* (A 125)

203

Displaying the Status Screens

[Battery/Hour Meter] Status Screen

[Network 1/6] to [Network 3/6] Status Screens

Connection settings of the current network connection (A 155)

1 Remaining recording time

2 Remaining recording time indicator

3 Battery life indicator

4 Total operation time (A 196)

5 Operation time since using [Reset Hour Meter]

(A 196)

1 Network configuration name

2 Connection type

3 SSID (network name)

4 Authentication and encryption method

5 WEP index key

6 Wi-Fi frequency band and channel

7 TCP/IP settings of the current network

connection (A 157)

Displaying the Status Screens

204

[Network 4/6] and [Network 5/6] Status Screens ( mode)

Browser Remote settings (A 164)

* Only default passwords will be displayed. If a password was changed, the status screen will show only that the field is password

protected.

[Network 6/6] Status Screen ( mode)

IP streaming settings (A 175)

1 Camcorder settings (A 164)

2 Browser Remote's URL

3 User settings* (A 164)

1 Streaming video configuration and audio

channels

2 Receiver settings and transfer protocol

3 Error correction settings (A 176)

205

Displaying the Status Screens

[Network 4/6] to [Network 6/6] Status Screens ( mode)

* The status screen will show only that the field is password protected.

[GPS Information Display] Status Screen ( mode only)

For details refer to Recording GPS Information (Geotagging) (A 112).

FTP settings (A 178)

1 FTP server settings

(destination server, user name and password*)

2 FTP transfer settings

(destination folder, port number, passive mode,

new folder creation and dealing with same-

named files)

1Latitude

2 Longitude

3 Elevation

4 UTC (coordinated universal time) date and time

5 Satellite signal strength

Troubleshooting

206

Troubleshooting

If you have a problem with your camcorder, refer to this section. Consult your dealer or a Canon Service Center

if the problem persists.

Power source

The camcorder will not turn on or it turns off by itself.

- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.

- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.

Shortly after turning it on, the camcorder turns off on its own.

-You are using a battery pack that is not compatible for use with this camcorder. Use a recommended battery pack

(A 221).

Cannot charge the battery pack.

- The temperature of the battery pack is outside the charging range. If the battery pack’s temperature is below 0 °C

(32 °F), warm it before charging it; if it is above 40 °C (104 °F), let the battery pack cool down before charging it.

- Charge the battery pack in temperatures between 0 °C and 40 °C (32 °F and 104 °F).

- The battery pack is faulty. Replace the battery pack.

The battery pack is exhausted extremely quickly even at normal temperatures.

-Check the [Battery/Hour Meter] status screen (A 203) to check if the battery pack has reached the end of its battery

fe. If so, buy a new battery pack.

Recording

The camcorder’s controls are not responsive/disabled.

- When the KEY LOCK switch is set to

, all buttons (or all buttons with the exception of some REC buttons) are locked

and cannot be operated. Set the KEY LOCK switch to . You can change which controls are locked with the

> [$ System Setup] > [Key Lock] setting (A 196).

Pressing the REC button will not start recording.

- The REC button that was used may be disabled. Change the current settings in the

> [$ System Setup] >

[Camera Grip REC Button] setting to enable the use of the REC button on the grip.

- The camcorder may be set to a special recording mode. If the special recording mode is no longer necessary, return

> [! Recording/Media Setup] > [Recording Mode] to [Normal Recording] to end the special recording

mode.

- You may not be able to start or stop recording while controls on the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller are being

operated. Stop using the remote controller and then press the REC button.

The point where the REC button was pressed does not match the beginning/end of the recording.

-There is a slight interval between pressing the REC button and the actual start/end of recording. This is not a

malfunction.

The camcorder will not focus.

- The camcorder may not be able to focus on certain subjects using autofocus. Focus manually (A 76).

- When the AF mode is set to AF-boosted MF, start focusing manually until the AF frame changes to white (automatic

adjustment range).

- The viewfinder is not adjusted. Use the dioptric adjustment lever to make the proper adjustment (A 28).

-The lens is dirty. Clean the lens with a sof

t lens-cleaning cloth.

When a subject flits across in front of the lens, the image appears slightly bent.

-This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors. When a subject crosses very quickly in front of the camcorder,

the image may seem slightly warped. This is not a malfunction.

Abnormal images appear on the screen and the camcorder cannot record properly.

- While recording using an almost empty battery pack together with the compact power adapter, the compact power

adapter was inadvertently disconnected or the power supply was suddenly interrupted. Reconnect the compact

power adapter and turn the camcorder off and then on again or replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.

Changing between recording (

REC) and record standby (STBY) takes longer than usual.

- When the SD card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your clips

(A 153) and initialize the card (A 35). Alternatively, replace the card.

207

Troubleshooting

The camcorder cannot record to the SD card properly.

-This may occur as recordings are made and deleted over time. Save your recordings (A 153) and initialize the card

(A 35).

After using the camcorder for a long time, it becomes hot.

- The camcorder may become hot after using it continuously for long periods of time; this is not a malfunction. If the

camcorder becomes unusually hot or it becomes hot after using it only for a short while, it may indicate a problem with

the camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.

Playback

Cannot delete a clip.

- The XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clip may have an $ mark. Remove the $ mark (A 141).

- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.

Deleting clips takes longer than usual.

-When the SD card contains a large number of clips, some operations may take longer than usual. Save your

recordings (A 153) and initialize the card (A 35).

Cannot copy clips.

-There is not enough available space on the destination card or the card already contains the maximum number of clips

(999 clips). Delete some clips (

142) to free some space or replace the card.

Cannot delete a photo.

- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.

-Photos that were protected using other devices cannot be deleted with the camcorder.

Indicators and Onscreen Displays

appears in red on the screen.

- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.

appears on the screen.

- The camcorder cannot communicate with the battery pack attached so the remaining battery time cannot be

displayed.

The tally lamp does not illuminate.

- Set > [$ System Setup] > [LED] > [Tally Lamp (Front)] or [Tally Lamp (Rear)] to [On].

The tally lamp flashes quickly. (4 flashes per second)

- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.

-There is not enough available space on the SD card. Delete some clips (A 142) to free some space or replace the

selected card.

-A system error has occurred. Turn the camcorder off and then on again. If this does not solve the problem, consult a

Canon Service Center.

The tally lamp flashes slowly. (1 flash per second

)

- The combined available space on both cards is low. Replace the card that is not being recorded onto.

/ appears in red on the screen.

- A card error occurred. Remove and reinsert the card. If the display does not change back to normal, save your

recordings (A 153) and initialize the card (A 35).

6/7 (in red) and [END] appear on the screen.

-The SD card is full. Use a different card or delete some clips (A 142) to free some space on the card.

Even after stopping recording, the access indicator stays illuminated in red.

-The clip is being recorded on the card. This is not a malfunction.

appears in yellow on the screen.

-The camcorder’s internal temperature has reached a predetermined level. You can continue using the camcorder.

appears in red on the screen.

-The camcorder’s internal temperature has risen further while

appeared in yellow on the screen.

- If the icon appears in red in mode while > [% System Setup] > [Fan] is set to [Always On], turn off

the camcorder and wait until the temperature has decreased.

- In mode, if [Fan] is set to [Automatic] and the fan was turned off while recording, the fan will turn on

automatically (in that case,

will appear on the screen).

Troubleshooting

208

appears in red on the screen.

- The fan may not be working properly. The camcorder will automatically turn off in approximately 10 minutes. Consult a

Canon Service Center.

Picture and Sound

The peaking/magnification/zebra pattern/waveform monitor/B&W image does not appear on the screen.

-Check the corresponding output settings to make sure the display of the desired assistance function is enabled for the

desired screen/video output.

Screen displays turn on and off repeatedly.

- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.

- Remove the battery pack and reattach it correctly.

Abnormal characters appear on the screen and the camcorder does not operate properly.

-Disconnect the power source and reconnect it after a short time. If the problem still persists, use the >

[! System Setup] > [Reset] > [All Settings] function. This resets all the camcorder’s settin

gs to default values,

except for the hour meter.

Video noise appears on screen.

- Keep a distance between the camcorder and devices that emit strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful

magnets and motors, MRI machines or high-voltage power lines.

Horizontal bands appear on the screen.

-This is a phenomenon typical of CMOS image sensors when recording under some types of fluorescent, mercury or

sodium lamps. This is not a malfunction. You may be able to reduce the symptoms by setting the shutter speed mode

to Speed and the shutter speed to a value matching the frequency of the local electrical system: 1/50* or 1/100 for

50 Hz systems, 1/60 or 1/120 for 60 Hz systems.

* May not be available depending on the frame rate.

Audio cannot be recorded.

-The INPUT switch (audio input selection) is set to AES/EBU but an analog audio source is connected, or it is set to

ANALOG and a digital audio source is connected. Set the audio related switches correctly according to the audio

source you wish to use (A 100).

- When using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals, make sure you are using an XLR connector. When using the MIC terminal,

make sure you are using a condenser microphone with its own power supply and a ∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini plug.

- The external microphone connected to the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminal requires phantom power. Set the corresponding

ANALOG switch to MIC+48V (A 100).

Audio is recorded at an extremely low level.

- When using the INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals or MIC terminal: The

–

(audio level) switch for CH1 or CH2 is set to

M, and the recording level is set too low. Check the audio level meter on the screen and adjust the audio level correctly

(A 101).

- The microphone attenuator is on. Turn off the microphone attenuator (A 104, 104).

Sound is distorted or is recorded at lower levels.

- When recording near loud sounds (such as fireworks, shows or concerts), sound may become distorted or it may not

be recorded at the actual levels. Activate the microphone attenuator (A 104, 104), or adjust the audio recording level

manually.

The picture is displayed correctly but there is no sound from the built-in speaker.

- Speaker volume is turned off. Adjust the volume (A 138).

-Disconnect any cables/external devices connected to the × (headphone) terminal.

209

Troubleshooting

Cards and Accessories

Cannot insert the SD card.

- The card you are trying to insert is not facing the correct direction. Turn it over and insert it.

Cannot record on the SD card.

- A compatible card must be used (A 33).

- Initialize the card (A 35) when you use it with the camcorder for the first time.

- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.

-Photos can be recorded only to SD card B. Insert a card into SD card slot B.

-The card is full or it already contains the maximum number of clips (999 clips). Delete some clips (A 142) to free some

space or replace the card.

- The folder and file numbers have reached their maximum value. Set the > [" Recording/Media Setup] >

[MP4 Clip/Photo Numbering] setting to [Reset] and insert a new card.

Recording to and playing back from an SD card is slow.

-This ma

y occur as clips and photos are recorded/deleted over time. Save your recordings (A 153) and initialize the

card (A 35).

The optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or commercially available remote control does not work.

-Make sure that > [$ System Setup] > [REMOTE Term.] is set to [RC-V100 (REMOTE B)] or [RC-V100

(REMOTE A)] when using the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller or [Standard] when using a commercially available

remote control.

- Turn off the camcorder, reconnect the remote controller and then turn the camcorder back on again.

-When > [! Custom Picture] > [Activate Other Settings] is set to [Off] or the currently selected custom

picture file is protected, detailed custom picture settings cannot be adjusted using the RC-V100. Set [Activate Other

Settings] to [On] after selecting a custom picture file that is not protected (A 123).

Connections with External Devices

Video noise appears on a nearby TV screen.

-When using the camcorder in a room where a TV is located, keep a distance between the compact power adapter and

the power or antenna cables of the TV.

Playback looks fine on the camcorder but there is no image on the external monitor.

-The camcorder is not connected correctly to the external monitor. Make sure you are using the correct connection

(A 147).

- The video input on the external monitor is not set to the video terminal to which you connected the camcorder. Select

the correct video input.

The computer does not recognize the camcorder even though the camcorder is connected correctly.

-Disconnect the USB cable and turn off the camcorder. After a short while, turn it on again and restore the connection.

- Connect the camcorder to a different USB port on the computer.

-Establish the USB connection while the [MP4] or [Photos] index screen is displayed (A 134).

Cannot transfer MP4 clips or photos to the computer.

-The SD card contains too many MP4 clips and photos. Delete clips or photos until the card contains a combined total

of 2,500

(Windows)/1,000 (macOS) or fewer and then use a card reader to transfer the recordings from the card.

There is no picture or sound from an external monitor connected to the SDI terminal

-Make sure the connected external device is compatible with 12G-SDI and the frame rate used.

-Check that the external monitor’s settings match the configuration of the output signal selected on the camcorder

(A 145).

There is no picture or sound from an external monitor connected to the HDMI OUT terminal

-Disconnect the HDMI cable and then restore the connection or turn the camcorder off and then on again.

-Make sure the external monitor is compatible with the output signal selected on the camcorder (A 145).

Peaking/B&W image/magnification/zebra patterns/waveform monitor do not appear on the viewfinder.

-Check that the display of desired assistance function is enabled for the viewfinder ([B&W Image: VF] (A 190),

[Magn.: VF+LCD], [Peaking: VF], [Zebra: VF], [WFM: VF] (A 192)).

Peaking/B&W image/magnification/zebra patterns/waveform monitor do not appear in the video output from the SDI

terminal.

-Check that that displ

ay of the desired assistance function is enabled for the SDI terminal ([B&W Image: SDI] (A 190),

[Magn.: SDI/HDMI], [Peaking: SDI], [Zebra: SDI], [WFM: SDI] (A 192)).

Troubleshooting

210

Peaking/B&W image/magnification/zebra patterns/waveform monitor do not appear in the video output from the

HDMI OUT terminal.

-Check that that display of the desired assistance function is enabled for the HDMI OUT terminal ([B&W Image: HDMI]

(A 190), [Magn.: SDI/HDMI], [Peaking: HDMI], [Zebra: HDMI], [WFM: HDMI] (A 192)).

Network Functions

Check This First

Cannot connect with an access point.

- There are other devices in the vicinity interfering with the wireless signal. Refer to Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi

Networks (A 210).

-Password information is not saved with the camcorder settings. When you load onto the camcorder settings from a

previously saved camcorder settings file, all the passwords in the network-related settings are reset. Set up the

network-related settings as necessary (A 155).

- When using a Wi-Fi network, the camcorder cannot detect an access point if its stealth function is activated. Set up

the network connection manually (A 160) or turn off the stealth function of the access point.

Cannot establish a Camera Access Point connection with a network device.

- There are other devices in the vicinity interfering with the wir

eless signal. Refer to Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi

Networks (A 210).

- When you reset all the camcorder’s settings, all network settings are lost as well. Connect using the default settings or

set up the Camera Access Point settings again (A 157).

Cannot connect with a wired (Ethernet) network.

-Use a category 5e or better shielded twisted pair (STP) Ethernet cable.

- Try replacing the Ethernet cable.

- When you reset all the camcorder’s settings, all network settings are lost as well. Set up the network settings again

(A 155).

-Check that the network device to which the camcorder is connected is on and functioning properly. To use

1000BASE-T connection speeds, make sur

e to use network devices compatible with Gigabit Ethernet (1000BASE-T).

The Browser Remote application will not start on the Web browser.

-Make sure Browser Remote is activated (A 165).

- The URL entered into the Web browser’s address bar is incorrect. Be sure to use the URL exactly as it appears in the

mode’s [Network 4/6] status screen (A 204).

The Browser Remote screen is not displayed correctly on the Web browser.

- The device, operating system or Web browser used may not be supported. For the latest information about supported

systems, visit your local Canon Web site

-Enable JavaScript and cookies in your Web browser’s settings. For details, refer to the help modules or online

documentation of the Web browser used.

- Delete the cache and cookies for Browser Remote's URL in your Web browser and restart Browser Remote.

Precautions Regarding Wi-Fi Networks

When using a Wi-Fi network, try the following corrective actions if the transmission rate drops, the connection is

lost, or other problems occur.

Positioning a network device (access point, mobile device, etc.)

- When using a Wi-Fi network indoors, place the network device in the same room as the camcorder.

- Place the network device in an open, unobstructed location, where people or objects do not come between it and the

camcorder.

- Place the network device as close as possible to the camcorder and change the network device’s height or orientation

as necessary.

• Are the access point (wireless router), camcorder, computer or other network devices all turned on?

• Is the network working and correctly configured?

• Are all network devices correctly connected to the same network as the camcorder?

• Are there any obstructions between the camcorder and the access point or between the network device

used and the access point?

211

Troubleshooting

Nearby electronic devices

- If the transmission rate over a Wi-Fi network drops because of interference from the following electronic devices,

switching to the 5 GHz band or to a different channel may solve the problem.

- Wi-Fi networks using the IEEE 802.11b/g/n protocol operate in the 2.4 GHz band. For this reason, the transmission

rate may drop if there are nearby microwave ovens, cordless telephones, microphones, or similar devices operating on

the same frequency band.

- If another access point operating on the same frequency band as the camcorder is used nearby, the transmission rate

may drop.

Using multiple camcorders/wireless transmitters/access points

-Check that there are no IP address conflicts among the devices connected to the same network.

- If multiple XF705 camcorders are connected to a single access point, connection speeds may be r

educed.

- To reduce radio wave interference when there are multiple access points using IEEE 802.11b/g or IEEE 802.11n (in the

2.4 GHz band), leave a gap of four channels between each wireless access point. For example, use channels 1, 6, and

11, channels 2, 7, and 12, or channels 3, 8, and 13. If you can use IEEE 802.11a/n (in the 5 GHz band), switch to IEEE

802.11a/n and specify a different channel.

List of Messages

Refer to this section if a message appears on the screen. The messages in this section appear in alphabetical

order. Note that for some messages, an indication of the card involved (SD card A, SD card B, or both) may

appear above the message itself.

Accessing SD Card A/SD Card B Do not remove

- You opened the card slot cover while the camcorder was accessing the card. Close the card slot cover.

Battery communication error. Does this battery display the Canon logo?

- You attached a battery pack that is not recommended by Canon for use with this camcorder.

-If you are using a battery pack recommended by Canon for use with this camcorder, there may be a problem with the

battery pack or camcorder. Consult a Canon Service Center.

Buffer overflow. Recording was stopped.

- The data transfer rate was too high for the card in use and the recording was stopped. Use a recommended card

(A 33).

Cannot play back

- The card contains clips that were recorded using a system frequency different from the one currently used by the

camcorder. To play back the recordings on the card, change the > [! Recording/Media Setup] > [System

equency] setting to match the recordings on the card.

- The file control information of XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips is corrupted or there was a decoder error. Turn the camcorder

off and then on again. If this does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.

Cannot switch SD card slots

-The SLOT SELECT button was pressed while the camcorder is recording. Wait until recording is finished to change the

selected SD card slot.

Change the battery pack

- The battery pack is exhausted. Replace or charge the battery pack.

Cover is open

-The SD card slot cover was open when the camcorder was switched to or turned on in mode. Insert a card

and close the card slot cover.

Fan error

- The cooling fan may not be working properly. Consult a Canon Service Center.

File name error

- You attempted to record a clip while clip numbers are at their maximum value. Sav

e your clips (A 153) and initialize

the card (A 35) or delete all the clips (A 142).

- You attempted to record an MP4 clip or take a photo while MP4 clip/photo numbers are at their maximum value. Set

> [" Recording/Media Setup] > [MP4 Clip/Photo Numbering] to [Reset] and delete all the MP4 clips and

photos on the card (A 183) or initialize it (A 35).

INFRARED switch position changed (ON/OFF). Check the focus.

-The focus may change when you turn the infrared mode on or off. Check that the focus is correct.

Troubleshooting

212

Invalid operation

- The following are not valid operations and cannot be performed.

• Trying to add a shot mark to a frame that already has one.

• Trying to add an $ mark and a % mark to the same clip.

•Pressing the REC button when no cards are inserted in the camcorder.

Management file error

- Cannot record because the camcorder cannot write to the file control information of XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips. This

may occur if the files on the card were accessed using another device. Save your clips (A 153) and initialize the card

(A 35).

May not be possible to record clips on this media

- The card selected for recording has a Speed Class rating lower than 10. Use a recommended card (A 33).

Media full

-The SD card is full. Replace the card or delete some recordings (A 142, 183) to free some space on the card.

Media is almost full

- The amount of available space on the SD card is low. Replace the card or delete so

me recordings (A 142, 183) to free

some space.

- The amount of available space on SD card A and SD card B combined is low. Replace the card that is not selected.

Media is not supported

- 512 MB or smaller SD cards cannot be used with the camcorder. Use a recommended card (A 33).

Memory card is write-protected

- The LOCK switch on the SD card is set to prevent accidental erasure. Change the position of the LOCK switch.

Number of clips already at maximum

- The card selected for recording already contains the maximum number of XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips (999 clips).

Replace the card.

Number of Shot Marks at maximum

-The shot mark could not be added because the clip already contains 100 shot marks.

Recorded at 50.00 Hz/59.94 Hz SD Card A / SD Card B: Recommend checking the data and initializing

- The card contains clips t

hat were recorded using a system frequency different from the one currently used by the

camcorder. Save the content of the card if necessary and initialize the card with this camcorder (A 35).

Recording was stopped.

- The file control information of XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips is corrupted or there was an encoder error. Turn the

camcorder off and then on again. Then, remove the card being used and reinsert it. Alternatively, replace the card. If

this does not solve the problem, consult a Canon Service Center.

SD Card A / SD Card B: Check the data.

- Cannot access the card. Check the card and make sure it is inserted correctly.

- A card error occurred. The camcorder cannot record or display the image. Try removing and reinserting the card, or

use a different card.

-You inserted a MultiMedia Card (MMC) into the camcorder. Use a recommended SD card (A 33).

- If after the message disappears,

or appears in red, perform the following: Turn off the camcorder and remove

and reinsert the card. If

turns back to green you can resume recording/playback. If the problem persists,

save your clips (A 153) and initialize the card (A 35).

SD Card A / SD Card B: Recommend checking the data and initializing

- The card cannot be used for any of the following reasons. Save your clips (A 153) and initialize the card (A 35).

•A problem has occurred with the card.

• The camcorder cannot read the data on the card.

•The card was initialized using a computer.

•The card is partitioned.

-The card was initialized using a camcorder with a different firmware version. To be able to record on the card, save the

recordings it contains and then initialize it using this camcorder.

SD Card ASD Card B / SD Card BSD Card A Switched

- The camcorder switched to recording on the other card after you pressed the SLOT SELECT button or automatically

due to relay recording.

SD Card ASD C

ard B / SD Card BSD Card A Will switch in a moment

-The selected card is almost full so the camcorder will switch to recording on the other card in approximately 1 minute

(relay recording).

213

Troubleshooting

Network Functions

Along with this list, refer also to the instruction manuals of the access point or other external devices you are

using.

Some clips require data recovery.

- The power may have been suddenly turned off or the card may have been removed while the camcorder was

recording. As a result, one or more XF-HEVC or XF-AVC clips contain corrupted data. You can try to recover the clips

(A 37).

The following settings were changed.

-The settings displayed on the screen were changed automatically due to a change in one of the [Recording/Media

Setup] settings. Check the settings before you continue recording.

The memory card is not compatible with the current recording settings.

-Recording with a resolution of 3840x2160 or using slow & fast motion recording is not possible when the card used

has a speed rating lower than UHS U3. Replace the card, change the resolution (A 52) or change the recording mode

(A 115).

The sound of the camcorder zooming may also be recorded

- When you use the zoom while > [v%Camera Setup] > [Zoom Speed Level] is set to [High], the zoom

tor's operation sound may be picked up in the recording. Change the zoom speed level to avoid this.

The / file needs to be unprotected to change this setting.

- When the video format is set to XF-HEVC and a protected custom picture file is selected, the video format cannot be

changed. Unprotect the custom picture file first (A 124) or select an unprotected custom picture file and then change

the video format.

Too many photos and MP4 clips. Disconnect the USB cable.

-Disconnect the USB cable. Try using a card reader or decrease the number of MP4 clips and photos on the card to

fewer than 2,500 (Windows) or 1,000 (macOS) and then restore the connection.

Unable to recover data

- Could not recover the selected clip. Save your clips (A 153) and delete the clips that could not be recovered

(A 142).

- The camcorder may not be able to recover clips when there is not enough space on the card. Delete some clips

(A 1

42) to free some space.

A User is already accessing the server. Try again later.

-This message appears on the screen of the connected device. Another device connected to the network is already

operating the camcorder. To use this device, first end the connection on the device accessing the camcorder and then

touch Retry.

Cannot log in to FTP server.

-Check the user name and password information in the FTP server settings (A 178).

Cannot transfer files to FTP server.

-Check that there is enough available space in the data storage device (hard disk, etc.) that contains the destination

folder on the FTP server.

FTP transfer error. File transfer was not completed.

- An error occurred while transferring files to the FTP server. Turn then camcorder and the FTP ser

ver off and then on

again and try again the FTP transfer.

IP address conflict

- Another device on the same network has the same IP address assigned to the camcorder. Change the IP address of

the conflicting device or the camcorder.

LAN cable not connected.

- You attempted to connect to a wired network but the Ethernet cable is not connected. Check that the Ethernet cable is

correctly connected to the camcorder’s

(Ethernet) terminal and to the LAN/Ethernet port on the network device.

Multiple access points detected. Try the operation again.

- There are multiple access points sending out a WPS signal at the same time. Try the operation again later or perform

setup using the [WPS: PIN Code] or [Search for Access Points] option (A 159).

Network functions malfunction.

-There’s a hardware problem with the camcorder’s network related circuitry. Try turning the camcorder off and then on

again. If the problem persists, consult a Canon Service Center.

Troubleshooting

214

No access points found

- The camcorder searched for active Wi-Fi networks (access points) in the area but none were found. Make sure the

access point is working correctly and try connecting again.

- The access point is operating in stealth mode. Deactivate the stealth function in the wireless router (access point)

settings.

- The camcorder may not be able to find the access point if MAC address filtering is activated. Check the [Network 3/6]

status screen (A 203) and make sure to add the camcorder’s MAC address to the list of approved wireless devices in

the wireless router (access point) settings.

Reached the end of the adjustment range

-This message appears on the screen of the connected device. When focusing with Browser Remote, this messag

e will

appear when a focus adjustment would push the focus out of the lens’s available range.

Some files could not be transferred.

-The file system is corrupted or you attempted to transfer clips not recorded with this camcorder. Delete those clips

from the SD card and then transfer the files again (A 178).

-The destination folder contains files with the same file name as those to be transferred. Rename the files or set

> [! Network Settings] > [FTP Transfer Settings] > [Same Named Files] to [Overwrite] to overwrite the files

in the destination folder.

Unable to complete WPS. Try the operation again.

More than 2 minutes passed between activating WPS on the access point and selecting [OK] on the camcorder. Start

over the WPS procedure from the beginning.

-The WPS button was not held down long enough. Refer to the instruction manual of your wireless router. When using

WPS to make a wireless connection, keep the WPS button held down until the wireless router’s WPS function is

activated.

- The access point’s encryption method is set to [WEP]. Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) cannot connect to access points

set to this encryption method. Change the access point’s encryption method or use another connection method

(A 158).

Unable to connect

- Could not connect to the access point or network device selected.

-Cordless phones, microwave ovens, refrigerators and other appliances may interfere with the wireless signal. Try using

the camcorder in a location farther away from such appliances.

Unable to connect to FTP server.

- Could not connect to the FTP server. Check the FTP server settings (A 178).

Unable to obtain an IP address

- If you are not using a DHCP server, connect using the [Manual] option and enter the IP address using the [Manual]

option (A 160).

- Turn on the DHCP server. If it is already on, make sure it is functioning properly.

-Make sure the address range for the DHCP server is sufficient.

- If you are not using a DNS server, set the DNS address to one other than [0.0.0.0].

- Set the DNS server’s IP address in the camcorder.

-Turn on the DNS server. If it is already on, make sure it is functioning properly.

-Make sur

e that the DNS server’s IP address and the name for that address are correctly configured.

- If you are using a wireless gateway router, make sure all of the devices in the network, including the camcorder, are

configured with the correct gateway address.

Wi-Fi connection terminated

- An error occurred on the access point or connected device. Check the network or connected device and try

connecting again.

-The Wi-Fi signal became too weak and the wireless connection was lost. Wait a moment or turn off other devices in

the area that may be interfering with the Wi-Fi signal and then try connecting again.

Wi-Fi error. Incorrect authentication method.

-Make sure the camcorder and access point are using the same authentication/encryption method and encryption key.

Wi-Fi error. Incorrect encryption key.

- When the authentication mode was set to [WPA-PSK], [WPA2-PSK] or [Shared Key], or the encryption method was set

to [WEP], the encryption key (WEP key or AES/TKIP password) entered or its length (number of characters) is

inc

orrect.

•Valid passwords vary depending on the encryption method:

-AES / TKIP encryption

: 8 to 63 ASCII characters or 64 hexadecimal characters.

- 64-bit WEP encryption

: 5 ASCII characters or 10 hexadecimal characters.

- 128-bit WEP encryption

: 13 ASCII characters or 26 hexadecimal characters.

Wi-Fi error. Incorrect encryption method.

-Make sure the camcorder and access point are using the same authentication/encryption method and encryption key.

215

Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions

Be sure to read these instructions in order to operate the product safely. Follow these instructions to prevent

injury or harm to the operator of the product or others.

WARNING

Denotes the risk of serious injury or death.

• Stop using the product in any case of unusual circumstances such as the presence of smoke or a strange

smell.

• Do not touch any exposed internal parts.

• Do not get the product wet. Do not insert foreign objects or liquids into the product.

• Do not touch the product connected to a power outlet during lightning storms. This may cause electric shock.

• Do not disassemble or modify the product.

• Do not expose the product to strong shocks or vibration.

• Use only power sources specified in this instruction manual

for use with the product.

• Observe the following instructions when using a battery charger or compact power adapter.

- Do not touch the battery charger or compact power adapter connected to a power outlet during lightning

storms.

- Do not use the product if the power plug is not fully inserted into the power outlet.

- Do not unplug the product by pulling the power cord.

- Do not plug in or unplug the product with wet hands.

- Do not place heavy objects on the power cord. Do not damage, break or modify the power cord.

- Do not leave the product connected to a power source for long periods of time.

• Do not expose the power plug and terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other

metal objects.

• Do not charge batteries/battery packs at temperatures outside the range of 0 - 40 °C (32 - 104 °F).

• Observe the following instructions when using commercially available batteries or provided battery packs.

- Do not use leaking batteries/battery packs. If a battery/battery pack leaks and the material contacts your

skin or clothing, flush the exposed area thoroughly with running water. In case of eye contact, flush

thoroughly with copious amounts of clean running water and seek immediate medical assistance.

- Use batteries/battery packs only with their specified product.

- Do not heat batteries/battery packs or expose them to fire.

- Do not charge batteries/battery packs using non-authorized battery chargers.

- Do not expose the terminals to dirt or let them come into contact with metallic pins or other metal objects.

- When disposing of batteries/battery packs, insulate the terminals with tape or other means.

• Do not look through the viewfinder at strong light sources such as the sun on a bright day or lasers and other

strong artificial light sources.

• Do not leave the lens exposed without the lens cap attached. The lens may concentrate the light and cause

fire.

• Do not wrap the product in cloth or other materials when in use or shortly after use when the product is still

warm in temperature.

• Do not allow the product to maintain contact with the same area of skin for extended periods of time during

use. This may result in low-temperature contact burns, including skin redness and blistering, even if the

product does not feel hot. The use of a tripod or similar equipment is recommended when using the product in

hot places and for people with circulation problems or less sensitive skin.

• Keep the product out of the reach of young children.

• A strap wrapped around a person’s neck may result in strangulation.

• Periodically remove any dust buildup from the power plug and power outlet using a dry cloth.

• Follow any indications to turn off the product in places where its use is forbidden. Not doing so may cause

other equipment to malfunction due to the effect of electromagnetic waves and even result in accidents.

Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions

216

CAUTION

Denotes the risk of injury.

• Strap is intended for use on the body only. Hanging the strap with any product attached on a hook or other

object may damage the product. Also, do not shake the product or expose the product to strong impacts.

This may cause injury or damage to the product.

• Do not leave the product in places exposed to extremely high or low temperatures. The product may become

extremely hot/cold and cause burns or injury when touched.

• Only mount the product on a tripod that is sufficiently sturdy.

Camcorder

Be sure to observe the following precautions to ensure maximum performance.

• Do not use or store the camcorder in dusty or sandy places. The camcorder is not waterproof – avoid also

water, mud or salt. If any of the above should get into the camcorder it may damage the camcorder and/or the

lens. Consult a Canon Service Center as soon as possible.

• Be careful to avoid dust and dirt particles accumulating on the lens or entering the camcorder. When you finish

using the camcorder, make sure to remove the lens hood and attach the lens cap to the lens.

• Do not use the camcorder near strong electromagnetic fields such as near powerful magnets and motors, MRI

machines or high-voltage power lines. Using the camcorder in such places may cause anomalies in the video,

or audio or video noise to appear.

• Do not point the camcorder or viewfinder toward an intense light source, such as the sun on a sunny day or an

intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camcorder’s internal

components. Be careful especially when using a tripod or shoulder strap. When not using the camcorder,

remove the lens hood and attach the lens cap to the lens. When not using the viewfinder, attach the viewfinder

cap to the viewfinder.

• Do not carry the camcorder by the LCD panel. Be careful when closing the LCD panel.

Long-term storage

If you do not intend to use the camcorder for a long time, store it in a place free of dust, in low humidity, and at

temperatures not higher than 30 °C (86 °F).

Battery Pack

• Dirty terminals may cause a poor contact between the battery pack and the camcorder. Wipe the terminals

with a soft cloth.

DANGER!

Treat the battery pack with care.

• Keep it away from fire (or it might explode).

• Do not expose the battery pack to temperature higher than 60 °C (140 °F). Do not leave it near a heater or

inside a car in hot weather.

• Do not try to disassemble or modify it.

• Do not drop it or subject it to shocks.

• Do not get it wet.

217

Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions

Long-term storage

• Store battery packs in a dry place at temperatures no higher than 30

°C (86 °F).

• To extend the battery life of the battery pack, discharge it completely before storing it.

• Charge and discharge all your battery packs fully at least once a year.

Always attach the battery terminal cover.

Do not allow any metal objects to touch the terminals (Figure 1), as this can

cause a short circuit and damage the battery pack. Attach the terminal cover

whenever the battery pack is not being used (Figure 2).

The battery terminal cover has a [

]-shaped hole. This is useful when you

wish to differentiate between charged and uncharged battery packs. For

example, with charged battery packs, attach the terminal cover so that the

[

]-shaped hole shows the colored label.

Remaining battery time

If the remaining battery time displayed is not correct, deplete the battery pack completely and then charge it fully.

Still, the correct time may not be displayed if a fully charged battery pack is used continuously in high

temperatures or it is left unused for long periods of time. Also, the correct remaining time may not be displayed,

depending on the battery life. Use the time shown on the screen as an approximation.

SD Card

• We recommend backing up the recordings on the SD card onto your computer. Data may be corrupted or lost

due to card defects or exposure to static electricity. Canon shall not be liable for lost or corrupted data.

• Do not touch or expose the terminals to dust or dirt.

• Do not use SD cards in places subject to strong magnetic fields.

• Do not leave SD cards in places subject to high humidity and high temperature.

• Do not disassemble, bend, drop, or subject SD cards to shocks and do not expose them to water.

• Check the direction before inserting the SD card. Forcing a card into a slot if it is not correctly oriented may

damage the card or the camcorder.

• Do not attach any labels or stickers on the SD card.

Disposal

When you delete data on an SD card, only the file allocation table is altered and stored data is not physically

erased. Take the necessary precautions when you dispose of a card, for example by physically damaging it to

prevent the leakage of private data.

If you plan to give away the SD card to another person, initialize it first (A 35). Fill the card with unimportant

recordings, and then initialize it again. This makes recovering the original recordings very difficult.

Figure 1 Figure 2

Back side of the

battery pack

Uncharged

Terminal cover attached

Charged

Safety Instructions and Handling Precautions

218

Built-in Rechargeable Lithium Battery

The camcorder has a built-in rechargeable lithium battery to keep the date/time and other settings. The built-in

lithium battery is recharged while you use the camcorder; however, it will discharge completely if you do not use

the camcorder for about 3 months.

To recharge the built-in lithium battery: Connect the DC cable and compact power adapter to the camcorder

and use a power outlet to power the camcorder for 24 hours while it is turned off.

Lithium Button Battery

• Do not pick up the battery using tweezers or other metal tools, as this will cause a short circuit.

• Wipe the battery with a clean dry cloth to ensure proper contact.

WARNING!

• The battery used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mishandled.

• Do not disassemble, modify, immerse in water, heat above 100 °C (212 °F) or incinerate the battery.

• Do not insert the battery into the mouth. If swallowed, seek medical assistance immediately. The battery

case may break and the battery fluids may cause internal injuries.

• Keep the battery out of the reach of children.

• Do not recharge, short-circuit or insert the battery in the wrong direction.

• Dispose of the used battery according to applicable recycling regulations. In Europe, the used battery

should be returned to the supplier for safe disposal.

219

Maintenance/Others

Cleaning

Camcorder Body

• Use a soft, dry cloth to clean the camcorder’s body. Never use chemically treated cloths or volatile solvents

such as paint thinner.

Lens

• Remove any dust or dirt particles using a non-aerosol type blower brush.

• Use a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth to gently wipe the lens. Never use tissue paper.

LCD Screen

• Clean the LCD screen using a clean, soft lens-cleaning cloth and commercially available cleaning fluid for

eyeglasses.

• Condensation may form on the surface of the screen when the temperature changes suddenly. Wipe it with a

soft dry cloth.

Condensation

Moving the camcorder rapidly between hot and cold temperatures may cause condensation (water droplets) to

form on its internal surfaces. Stop using the camcorder if condensation is detected. Continued use may damage

the camcorder.

Condensation may form in the following cases:

• When the camcorder is moved quickly from cold to warm places

• When the camcorder is left in a humid room

• When a cold room is heated rapidly

To avoid condensation

• Do not expose the camcorder to sudden or extreme changes in temperature.

• Remove the SD cards and battery pack. Then, place the camcorder in an airtight plastic bag and let it adjust

gradually to temperature changes before removing it from the bag.

When condensation is detected

The precise time required for water droplets to evaporate will vary depending on the location and weather

conditions. As a general rule, wait for 2 hours before resuming use of the camcorder.

Using the Camcorder Abroad

Power Sources

You can use the compact power adapter to operate the camcorder and the battery charger to charge battery

packs in any country/region with power supply between 100 and 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Consult a Canon Service

Center for information on plug adapters for overseas use.

Optional Accessories

220

Optional Accessories

The following optional accessories are compatible with this camcorder. The availability differs from area to area.

For our customers in the USA: Call or visit your local retailer/dealer for genuine Canon video accessories. You

can also obtain genuine accessories for your Canon camcorder by calling: 1-800-828-4040, Canon U.S.A.

Information Center.

Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended.

The message [Battery communication error] is displayed if you use a non-genuine Canon battery pack, and

user response is required. Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages resulting from accidents, such

as malfunction or fire, that occur due to use of non-genuine Canon battery packs.

BP-A30, BP-A60

Battery Pack

CA-CP200 L

Compact Power Adapter

CG-A10

Battery Charger

TL-U58

Te l e-c o nve r ter

Protect Filter 58 mm,

ND4L Filter 58 mm,

ND8L Filter 58 mm

RC-V100

Remote Controller

TA-10 0 Tripo d AdapterGP-E2 GPS Receiver

CG-A20 Battery Charger and

CA-CP200B Compact

Power Adapter

WA-U58

Wide Attachment

IFC-400PCU

USB Cable

221

Optional Accessories

Battery Packs

When you need extra battery packs, select only the BP-A30 or BP-A60 Battery

Pack.

When you use battery packs bearing the Intelligent System mark, the camcorder

will communicate with the battery and display the remaining usage time (accurate

to 1 minute). You can only use and charge these battery packs with camcorders

and chargers compatible with Intelligent System.

TL-U58 Tele-Converter

• The minimum focusing distance at full telephoto with the tele-converter is 1.3 m.

• The tele-converter cannot be used together with the supplied lens hood.

WA-U58 Wide Attachment

• The wide attachment cannot be used together with the supplied lens hood.

This mark identifies genuine Canon video accessories. When you use Canon video equipment, we

recommend Canon-brand accessories or products bearing the same mark.

Specifications

222

Specifications

XF705

System

• Recording System

Clips:

XF-HEVC

Video compression: H.265 / HEVC

Audio format: Linear PCM, 24 bit, 48 kHz, 4 channels

File format: MXF

XF-AVC

Video compression: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264

Audio format: Linear PCM, 24 bit, 48 kHz, 4 channels

File format: MXF

MP4

Video compression: MPEG-4 AVC / H.264

Audio format: MPEG-2 AAC-LC, 16 bit, 48 kHz, 2 channels

Linear PCM, 16 bit, 48 kHz, 4 channels

File format: MP4

Photos: DCF (Design rule for Camera File system), compatible with Exif Ver. 2.3, JPEG compression

• Video Configuration

(recording/playback)

XF-HEVC

Bit rate: 160 Mbps, 110 Mbps, 60 Mbps, 45 Mbps

Resolution: 3840x2160, 1920x1080

Color sampling: YCbCr 4:2:2, 10 bit

Frame rate: 59.94i, 59.94P, 50.00i, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P

XF-AVC

Bit rate: 160 Mbps, 45 Mbps

Resolution: 3840x2160, 1920x1080

Color sampling: YCbCr 4:2:0, 8 bit

Frame rate: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P

MP4

Bit rate: 35 Mbps, 8 Mbps

Resolution: 1920x1080, 1280x720

Color sampling: YCbCr 4:2:0, 8 bit

Frame rate: 59.94P, 50.00P, 29.97P, 25.00P, 23.98P

Available options may differ depending on the system frequency currently in use.

• Recording Media (not included)

For approximate recording times, refer to the Reference Tables (A 227)

SD, SDHC (SD High Capacity) or SDXC (SD eXtended Capacity) card

; 2 slots for clips, only SD card B for

photos

SD card B is used also to save custom picture files, user memo files and the camcorder settings file.

•Image Sensor

Type 1.0 (1.0 in.) single-plate CMOS sensor

Effective pixels (approximate): 8,290,000 pixels (3840x2160)

• LCD Touch Screen

10.1 cm (4.0 in.) color LCD, 16:9 aspect ratio, approx. 1,230,000 dots, 100% coverage, capacitive touch

screen operation

• Viewfinder: 1.18 cm* (0.46 in.) organic LED display, approx. 1,770,000 dots*, 100% coverage

* When the language is set to simplified Chinese, the values with an asterisk are as follows:

1.09 cm (0.43 in.), approx. 1,555,000 dots.

223

Specifications

•Lens

f=8.3 – 124.5 mm, F/2.8 – 4.5, 15x optical zoom, 9-bladed iris diaphragm

35mm equivalent focal length: approx. 28.3 – 424.6 mm (Dynamic IS)

approx. 25.5 – 382.5 mm (other IS modes)

•Lens Configuration: 18 elements in 14 groups (including 2 aspheric elements)

• Filter Diameter: 58 mm

• Minimum Focusing Distance

60 cm (2 ft.) throughout the zoom range; 1 cm (0.39 in.) at full wide angle

• Shutter Speed

Automatic, speed (normal or fine increments), angle, clear scan, slow shutter, off

•Iris: Manual, push auto iris, automatic aperture

• Gain: –6.0 dB to 33.0 dB, normal (3.0-dB) or fine (0.5-dB) increments

•ND Filter: Built-in (Off, 1/4, 1/16, 1/64), motor operated

•Exposure: AE shift, light metering modes (standard, spotlight, backlight)

• White Balance

Automatic white balance (AWB); custom white balance (two sets, A and B); two preset settings (daylight,

5,600 K

and tungsten lamp, 3,200 K

); color temperature setting (2,000 K to 15,000 K)

Color temperature and color compensation (CC) adjustment available for all settings except custom white

balance and AWB.

Color temperatures are approximate and given for reference purposes only.

• Focus

Manual focus, autofocus (Push AF, AF-boosted MF, continuous AF, Face AF); face detection and subject

tracking available

AF type: Dual Pixel CMOS AF, contrast-detection AF

•Image Stabilization

Optical-shift image stabilizer + digital compensation (Standard IS, Dynamic IS, Powered IS)

• Subject Illumination (gain 33.0 dB)

59.94 Hz: 3 lux (59.94P, shutter speed 1/30)

50.00 Hz: 2.5 lux (50.00P, shutter speed 1/25)

• Infrared mode: Available, including built-in infrared light

• Built-in microphone: Stereo electret condenser microphone

• Size of Photos: 1920x1080

Wi-Fi

•Wireless Standard: IEEE802.11b/g/n (2.4 GHz band), IEEE802.11a/n (5 GHz band)

• Connection Methods

Infrastructure (Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), search for access points, manual), Camera Access Point

• Authentication Methods: Open, shared key, WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK

• Encryption Methods: WEP-64, WEP-128, TKIP, AES

Specifications

224

• Available Wi-Fi Channels

Available Wi-Fi channels differ depending on the camcorder model. Check the identification label in the battery

compartment (A 17). Note also that not all Wi-Fi channels are available for Camera Access Point

connections.

Model ID0117

2.4 GHz band: CH1 to CH11;

5 GHz band: CH56 to CH64 (Infrastructure only), CH149 to CH161 (Infrastructure/Camera Access Point)

Model ID0118

2.4 GHz band: CH1 to CH13;

5 GHz band: CH36 to CH64* (Infrastructure only)

* These channels are also prohibited for outdoor use in the following countries/regions:

Australia, Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece,

Hong Kong S.A.R., Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, New

Zealand, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Romania, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, United Kingdom

Terminals

• SDI Terminal

BNC jack, output only, 0.8 Vp-p / 75 Ω, unbalanced

HD-SDI: SMPTE 292, SMPTE ST 299-1

3G-SDI: SMPTE 424, SMPTE 425, SMPTE ST 299-2

6G-SDI: SMPTE ST 2081

12G-SDI: SMPTE ST 2082

Embedded audio, time code (VITC/LTC)

Supplemental displays (superimposed onscreen displays, peaking, zebra pattern, magnification, waveform

monitor) can also be output.

• HDMI OUT Terminal

HDMI connector, output only

Time code and supplemental displays (superimposed onscreen displays, peaking, zebra pattern,

magnification, waveform monitor) can also be output.

• INPUT Terminals (INPUT 1 and INPUT 2)

XLR 3-pin jack (pin1: shield, pin2: hot, pin3: cold), 2 sets, balanced

Analog Inputs

MIC setting: –60 dBu (volume center, full scale –18 dB) / 600 Ω , microphone attenuator: 20 dB

LINE setting: 4 dBu (volume center, full scale –18 dB) / 10 kΩ

Digital Inputs (AES/EBU)

AES3 standard (48 kHz, 24 bit, 2ch) / 110 Ω

•MIC Terminal

∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, –72 dBV (manual volume center, full scale –18 dB) / 5.6 kΩ

Microphone attenuator: 20 dB

•

(headphone) Terminal

∅ 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack, - to –8 dBV (16 Ω load, volume range Min to Max) / 50 Ω or less

•USB Terminal: mini-B receptacle, Hi-Speed USB, output only

• G-LOCK/SYNC Terminal

BNC jack, 1.0 Vp-p / 75 Ω

GENLOCK setting: input only; SYNC OUT setting: output only, tri-level HD signal

• TIME CODE Terminal

BNC jack, input/output

Input setting: 0.5 Vp-p to 18 Vp-p / 100 kΩ; Output setting: 1.3 Vp-p / 50 Ω or less

225

Specifications

• REMOTE A Terminal, REMOTE B Terminal

REMOTE A: ∅ 2.5 mm stereo sub-mini jack

REMOTE B: Circular 8-pin jack (for the optional RC-V100 Remote Controller, RS-422 interface)

• (Ethernet) Terminal: Ethernet, 1000BASE-T compatible

Power/Others

•Power Supply (rated): 14.4 V DC (battery pack), 24.0 V DC (DC IN)

•Power Consumption (recording using the LCD screen with SDI terminal output enabled)

XF-HEVC clips, 3840x2160, 160 Mbps: 21.5 W (59.94P), 20.8 W (50.00P)

XF-HEVC clips, 1920x1080, 60 Mbps: 20.6 W (59.94P), 19.9 W (50.00P)

XF-AVC clips, 3840x2160, 160 Mbps: 18.3 W (29.97P), 17.7 W (25.00P)

XF-AVC clips, 1920x1080, 45 Mbps: 19.1 W (59.94P), 18.8 W (50.00P)

MP4 clips, 1920x1080, 35 Mbps: 19.1 W (59.94P), 18.7 W (50.00P)

• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

•Dimensions (W x H x D)

Camcorder body only: 162 x 210 x 378 mm (6.4 x 8.3 x 14.9 in.)

Camcorder body with lens hood, microphone holder and eye cup: 191 x 258 x 433 mm (7.5 x 10.2 x 17.0 in.)

All dimensions are approximate.

•Weight

Camcorder body (including the shoulder pad and grip belt): 2,710 g (6.0 lb.)

Typical working configuration*: 3,160 g (7.0 lb.)

* Camcorder with shoulder pad, grip belt, lens hood, microphone holder, eye cup, BP-A30 battery pack and one SD card.

All weights are approximate.

CA-CP200 L Compact Power Adapter

•Rated Input: 100 – 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 90 VA – 120 VA

•Rated Output: 24 V DC, 1.8 A

• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

•Dimensions (W x H x D): 67.5 x 37 x 134 mm (2.7 x 1.5 x 5.3 in.)

•Weight: Approx. 290 g (10.2 oz.)

CG-A20 Battery Charger

•Rated Input: 24 V DC, 1.8 A

•Rated Output: 16.7 V DC, 1.5 A

• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

•Dimensions (W x H x D): 100 x 24 x 100 mm (3.9 x 0.9 x 3.9 in.)

•Weight: Approx. 145 g (5.1 oz.)

Specifications

226

BP-A30 Battery Pack

• Battery Type

Rechargeable lithium ion battery, compatible with Intelligent System

• Rated Voltage: 14.4 V DC

• Operating Temperature: 0 – 40 °C (32 – 104 °F)

• Rated Battery Capacity: 3100 mAh / 45 Wh

•Dimensions (W x H x D): 41.5 x 45.1 x 69.7 mm (1.6 x 1.8 x 2.7 in.)

•Weight: Approx. 225 g (7.9 oz)

Weight and dimensions are approximate. Errors and omissions excepted.

227

Reference Tables

Approximate Recording Time on an SD Card

Approximate times, for reference only, based on a single recording that continues until the card is full.

XF-HEVC / XF-AVC

MP4

Charging Times

Charging times are approximate and vary according to charging conditions, ambient temperature and initial

charge of the battery pack.

Bit rate

SD card capacity

32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB

160 Mbps 25 min. 50 min. 105 min. 210 min.

110 Mbps 35 min. 75 min. 150 min. 305 min.

60 Mbps 65 min. 140 min. 280 min. 565 min.

45 Mbps 90 min. 185 min. 375 min. 755 min.

Bit rate (audio format)

SD card capacity

32 GB 64 GB 128 GB 256 GB

8 Mbps (AAC) 505 min. 1015 min. 2045 min. 4100 min.

35 Mbps (AAC) 115 min. 235 min. 480 min. 965 min.

35 Mbps (LPCM) 110 min. 220 min. 445 min. 890 min.

Battery pack BP-A30 (supplied) BP-A60 (optional)

Charging time using the supplied

CG-A20 Battery Charger

170 min. 300 min.

Reference Tables

228

Approximate Recording Times with a Fully Charged Battery Pack

The usage times in the following tables are approximate and were measured under the following conditions.

Actual times may vary.

• “Typical recording” times measure recording times with repeated operations such as start/stop recording,

zooming and turning on/off the camcorder.

• The effective usage time of the battery pack may decrease when using a bright screen setting, when recording

in cold surroundings, etc.

Video configuration

Usage conditions

Battery pack

Video format,

resolution and bit rate

Frame rate

BP-A30

(supplied)

BP-A60

(optional)

XF-HEVC clips

3840x2160, 160 Mbps

59.94P

Recording (maximum) 120 min. 245 min.

Recording (typical) 65 min. 140 min.

Playback 140 min. 280 min.

50.00P

Recording (maximum) 125 min. 255 min.

Recording (typical) 70 min. 145 min.

Playback 140 min. 290 min.

1920x1080, 60 Mbps

59.94P

Recording (maximum) 125 min. 255 min.

Recording (typical) 70 min. 145 min.

Playback 145 min. 300 min.

50.00P

Recording (maximum) 125 min. 260 min.

Recording (typical) 70 min. 145 min.

Playback 155 min. 315 min.

XF-AVC clips

3840x2160, 160 Mbps

29.97P

Recording (maximum) 140 min. 290 min.

Recording (typical) 85 min. 170 min.

Playback 160 min. 330 min.

25.00P

Recording (maximum) 145 min. 300 min.

Recording (typical) 85 min. 175 min.

Playback 165 min. 345 min.

1920x1080, 45 Mbps

59.94P

Recording (maximum) 135 min. 280 min.

Recording (typical) 80 min. 165 min.

Playback 155 min. 325 min.

50.00P

Recording (maximum) 135 min. 285 min.

Recording (typical) 80 min. 165 min.

Playback 160 min. 340 min.

MP4 clips

1920x1080, 35 Mbps

29.97P

Recording (maximum) 135 min. 280 min.

Recording (typical) 80 min. 165 min.

Playback 160 min. 330 min.

25.00P

Recording (maximum) 135 min. 285 min.

Recording (typical) 80 min. 165 min.

Playback 165 min. 340 min.

229

(Ethernet) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

× (headphone) terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105, 138

Abroad, using the camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Access point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155, 158

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

AE shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63

AGC (automatic gain control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

AGC limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Automatic aperture (auto iris) . . . . . . . . .61

Push auto iris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62

Assignable buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Audio output channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

Audio peak limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Audio recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Audio recording level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Audio reference signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

AWB (auto white balance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68

Battery pack

Battery information . . . . . . . . . . . .203, 221

Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Remaining battery charge . . . . . . . .21, 203

Bit rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Browser Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

Built-in backup battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Button connection mode (WPS) . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Camcorder settings file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Camera Access Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Canon Log 3 (gamma curve) . . . . . . . . . . .65, 126

Canon XF Utility (download) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Check marks (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 141

Clips

Adding an $ mark/% mark . . . . 109, 141

Adding/Deleting shot marks . . . . 109, 143

Clip information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Clip name format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Clip numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 49

Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Recovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Saving to a computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Color bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Color sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Color space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65, 126

Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Connection to external devices . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Conversion lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Custom displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Custom picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Main settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

Other settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Preset color settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

DC IN terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Digital tele-converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Direct setting mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Double slot recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Dual Pixel Focus Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Exposure compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Face detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

FEC error correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Flicker reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Index

230

Focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

AF-boosted MF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

AF speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Continuous AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Face AF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Focus assistance functions . . . . . . . . . .77

Focus limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Manual focus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76

PUSH AF (momentary autofocus) . . . . . .79

Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83

Frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Free-run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

FTP transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

Full auto mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Gamma curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 126

Genlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

G-LOCK/SYNC terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94, 96

GPS information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 205

HDMI OUT terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145, 148

HDR (high dynamic range) . . . . . . . . . . . .126, 149

Headphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105

HLG (hybrid log gamma curve) . . . . . . . .126, 149

Hour meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 203

Image stabilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Index screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

Infrared light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Infrared recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Infrastructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Initializing an SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

INPUT 1/INPUT 2 terminals . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 100

IP streaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Iris . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Joystick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137

Key lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

LCD screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

Lens hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

Light metering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64

LUT (lookup table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Macro shooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Magnification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Menu settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Message list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

MIC terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 99

Microphone

Built-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97, 99

Sensitivity / Attenuator / Low cut filter . .103

Microphone holder unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 99

MP4 Join Tool (download) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

ND filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Network connection

Wi-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156

Wired (Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

Network functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Non-drop frame (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

OK marks ($) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 141

Onscreen displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 136

Onscreen markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

Peaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78

Phantom power (microphone) . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

231

Photos

Deleting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Photo numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

PIN code connection mode (WPS) . . . . . . . . . .159

Playback

Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

POWER switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Powered IS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Pre-recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116

Rec run (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Recording

Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Photos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Reference tables (charging, usage and

recording times, etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

Relay recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

REMOTE A, REMOTE B terminals . . . . . . . . . . .39

Remote controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

Remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 39, 164

Resetting all camcorder settings . . . . . . . . . . .195

Resolution (frame size) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Reviewing a clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114

Running mode (time code) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Safe area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87

SD card

Compatible SD cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

Initializing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Inserting/Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Recording method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

Switching SD card slots . . . . . . . . .35, 134

SDI terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

Search for access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159

Shooting frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Shot marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109, 143

Shoulder pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Shoulder strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Shutter speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55

Slow motion recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Special recording modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

Status screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

System frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Tally lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Terminal covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

Time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

Time code synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96

TIME CODE terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95, 96

Tripod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Turning the camcorder on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

USB terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112

User bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93

User memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

User settings (user names/passwords

for Browser Remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164

Video configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Video format (XF-HEVC, XF-AVC, MP4) . . . . . . .51

Video output configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

Viewfinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 30

Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Waveform monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

White balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Wide DR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65, 126

Wireless controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Zebra pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

Customizable grip zoom

speed patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72

232

CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED

IN THE UNITED STATES

The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon U.S.A., Inc. ('Canon USA') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the

'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in the United States. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill

of Sale or other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original

container, under normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:

Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.

Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon USA's factory service centers or

designated service facilities located in the United States.

When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of

purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-

shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to

approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your

risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within the United States.

This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible

software, as to which items Canon USA will have no responsibility. Canon USA shall have no responsibility under this limited warranty

for use of the Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon brand

peripheral equipment and software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without

warranty of any kind by Canon USA, including any implied warranty regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. The

sole warranty with respect to such non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the Equipment contains

a hard disk drive, Canon USA recommends that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent its loss in the event of

failure or other malfunction of such drive.

In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Equipment or contact the CANON

INFORMATION CENTER AT 855-CINE-EOS (855-246-3367) or on the Internet at pro.usa.canon.com/support

. You will be directed to the nearest

service facility for your Equipment.

This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Equipment and does not apply in the following cases:

A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishandling, accident, improper maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to

follow operating, maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon USA's user's manual;

B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of leaking batteries, sand, dirt or water damage;

C. If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon USA) that cause damage to the Equipment or

that cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems;

D. If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon USA's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;

E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;

F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;

G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.

This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside the United States. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or

consumables for the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon USA. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale

as a permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product

recall under applicable laws or regulations.

NO IMPLIED WARRANTY, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS EQUIPMENT AFTER

THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR

CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW

LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). CANON USA SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE, STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR

CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE EQUIPMENT'S HARD DRIVE, OR

ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT,

REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON USA HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY

OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON USA BE GREATER THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE

EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON USA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, YOU ASSUME ALL RISK AND

LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJUR

Y TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE,

MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF CANON USA (SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW

THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU).THIS

WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT

WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

CANON U.S.A., INC.

USA

233

CANON PROFESSIONAL DIGITAL VIDEO EQUIPMENT LIMITED WARRANTY FOR PRODUCTS PURCHASED

IN CANADA

The limited warranty set forth below is given by Canon Canada Inc. ('Canon Canada') with respect to Canon Professional Digital Video Equipment (the

'Equipment') packaged with this limited warranty and purchased in Canada. This limited warranty is only effective upon presentation of your Bill of Sale or

other proof of purchase. The Equipment is warranted to the original end-user purchaser, when delivered in new condition in its original container, under

normal use against defective materials or workmanship as follows:

Parts: Defective parts will be exchanged for new parts or comparable rebuilt parts for a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase.

Labor: For a period of ONE YEAR from the date of original purchase, labor will be provided free of charge by Canon Canada's factory service center or

designated service facilities located in Canada.

When returning Equipment under this warranty, you must pre-pay the shipping charges, and you must enclose a copy of the Bill of Sale or other proof of

purchase with a complete explanation of the problem. During the ONE-YEAR warranty period, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be return-

shipped to you free of charge. For repairs after the warranty period is over, you will be given an estimate of the cost of repair and an opportunity to

approve or disapprove of the repair expense before it is incurred. If you approve, repairs will be made and the Equipment will be returned to you at your

risk and expense. If you disapprove, we will return-ship the Equipment to you at no charge to you to an address within Canada.

This limited warranty only applies if the Equipment is used in conjunction with compatible computer equipment and compatible

software, as to which items Canon Canada will have no responsibility. Canon Canada shall have no responsibility under this limited

warranty for use of the Equipment in conjunction with incompatible peripheral equipment and/or incompatible software. Non-Canon

brand peripheral equipment and software which may be distributed with, or factory loaded on, the Equipment, are sold 'AS IS' without

warranty of any kind by Canon Canada, including any implied warranty or condition regarding merchantability or fitness for a particular

purpose. The sole warranty with respect to such non-Canon brand items is given by the manufacturer or producer thereof. If the

Equipment contains a hard disk drive, Canon Canada recommends that data stored on that drive be duplicated or backed up to prevent

its loss in the event of failure or other malfunction of such drive.

In order to obtain warranty service, please contact the authorized Canon retail dealer from whom you purchased the Equipment or contact the CANON

PROFESSIONAL SERVICE CENTRE 1-800-667-2666 or on the Internet at www.canon.ca/pro

. You will be directed to the nearest service facility for your

Equipment.

This Limited Warranty covers all defects encountered in normal use of the Equipment and does not apply in the following cases:

A. Loss or damage to the Equipment due to abuse, mishandling, accident, improper maintenance, use of non-Canon accessories or failure to

follow operating, maintenance or environmental instructions prescribed in Canon Canada's user's manual;

B. If the Equipment is defective as a result of leaking batteries, sand, dirt or water damage;

C. If defects or damages are caused by the use of parts or supplies (other than those sold by Canon Canada) that cause damage to the Equipment

or that cause abnormally frequent service calls or service problems;

D. If defects or damages are caused by service other than Canon Canada's factory service centers or authorized service facilities;

E. Any internal modification to product hardware or firmware;

F. Any applicable fee for Maintenance of the Equipment;

G. If the Equipment has had its serial number or dating altered or removed.

This Limited Warranty does not apply to Equipment purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty does not apply to accessories or consumables for

the Equipment, which are sold "AS IS", without warranty of any kind by Canon Canada. Please retain this warranty card and your Bill of Sale as a

permanent record of your purchase. This card ensures that you are contacted promptly should there be a safety inspection, modification or product recall

under applicable laws or regulations.

NO IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION, INCLUDING MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE APPLIES TO THIS

EQUIPMENT AFTER THE APPLICABLE PERIOD OF EXPRESS WARRANTY OR GUARANTY (EXCEPT AS MENTIONED ABOVE) GIVEN BY ANY

PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THIS EQUIPMENT SHALL BIND THE UNDERSIGNED (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW

LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY OR CONDITION LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO

YOU). CANON CANADA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUES OR PROFITS, EXPENSE FOR SUBSTITUTE EQUIPMENT OR SERVICE,

STORAGE CHARGES, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOSS OR CORRUPTION OF DATA STORED ON THE

EQUIPMENT'S HARD DRIVE, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR

INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF CANON CANADA

HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST CANON CANADA BE GREATER

THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE EQUIPMENT SOLD BY CANON CANADA AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING

THE

FOREGOING, Y

OU ASSUME ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO YOU AND YOUR PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND

THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF

CANON CANADA (SOME PROVINCES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO

THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU). THIS WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL

PURCHASER OF THIS EQUIPMENT OR THE PERSON FOR WHOM IT WAS PURCHASED AS A GIFT.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary from province to province.

CANON CANADA INC.

CANADA

The information in this document is verified as of March 2020. Subject to change without notice.

Visit your local Canon website to download the latest version.

USA http://pro.usa.canon.com

CANON U.S.A., INC.

http://pro.usa.canon.com/support

(855) CINE-EOS (855-246-3367)

(USA only)

UNITED KINGDOM

Canon UK Ltd

Unit 160, Centennial Park, Centennial Avenue,

Elstree, Hertfordshire, WD6 3SG

020-7660-0186

Canon Inc.

30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan

Canon Europa N.V.

Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands http://www.canon-europe.com

Canon 3041C002 XF705 4K 1" Sensor XF-HEVC H.265 Pro Camcorder

Product's Documents

Instruction Manual

Specifications

Canon 3041C002 Questions and Answers